JP7332910B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine.

A pachinko game machine generally acquires a random number for a lottery upon entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and temporarily stores the random number as an operation pending ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Each time a predetermined starting condition is established, such operation-reserving balls are successively consumed one by one, and a determination is made as to whether or not the game corresponds to a big hit. When the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit, after variably displaying the decorative patterns consisting of a plurality of rows, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the big winning port which is normally closed is opened. A special game (jackpot game) to be in the state is established.

Among pachinko gaming machines of this type, there is known one equipped with a performance display device for displaying game performance information obtained by measuring the number of game balls discharged from the game area and the number of prize balls awarded to the player. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2018-186936 A

A pachinko game machine that adopts such a configuration already exists as a conventional model, and there is room for further improvement in order to realize appropriate evaluation of game performance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a pachinko game machine capable of realizing appropriate game performance evaluation.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, and a first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and into which a game ball can enter. , a second start port provided at a position different from the first start port in the game area and changing between an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and to the first start port A first right/wrong determination means for executing a right/wrong determination triggered by the entry of a game ball, a second right/wrong determination means for executing a right/wrong judgment triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port, and the game a large winning opening which is provided in the area and is opened according to the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means and into which a game ball can enter; When the result of the success/failure determination by the determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit , until the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening reaches a specified number or until a specified time elapses. A special game execution means capable of shifting to a special game that repeats a unit game for opening the big winning opening a plurality of times; a ball-entering state control means capable of setting a normal ball-entering state or setting an easy-ball-entering state; a performance display device for displaying specific information; Equipped with a performance display device for displaying and a sound output device for outputting a performance sound , the game ball launched into the game area can be detected, and the game ball launched into the game area in all game states. It is possible to count the total number of shot balls, which is the total number of , and it is possible to count the number of normal shot balls, which is the total number of game balls shot into the game area in a normal ball entry state under a predetermined situation, and a predetermined It is possible to count the number of normal prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls given to the player in the normal ball entry state under the circumstances, and the base that indicates the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of balls fired at normal time A value can be measured, and the performance display device has a base value information display unit that displays base value information that can specify a base value, and identifies the type of base value information displayed in the base value information display unit. and an identification information display section for displaying identification information for playing the game, and a prize ball given to the player when the game ball enters the big winning opening during execution of the special game. It is possible to update the display of the accumulated number of prize balls, which is a display showing the accumulated value of the number, and give it to the player when the accumulated value of the number of prize balls reaches a specific value during the execution of the special game. A display corresponding to a specific value indicating that the accumulated value of the number of prize balls played has reached the specific value can be displayed separately from the display of the accumulated number of prize balls, and during execution of the special game, the game is played to the big winning opening. When a power failure occurs in a situation where a display corresponding to a specific value is displayed by entering one more ball, and the power failure is recovered, one game ball enters the big winning hole. However, the display corresponding to the specific value is configured not to be displayed, and during execution of the special game, the volume level of the effect sound output from the voice output device can be adjusted with the player's volume adjustment operation as a trigger. During the execution of the special game, it is configured to be able to display a volume adjustment image showing a plurality of stages of volume levels, triggered by the player's volume adjustment operation, and during the execution of the special game, the specific value is supported. The display and the volume adjustment image can be displayed at the same time. When a game ball is entered into a winning slot, a predetermined error occurs in which the awarding of prize balls to the player is temporarily interrupted when prize balls are awarded to the player, and the special game is completed. If the predetermined error continues until the normal ball-entering state, which transitions after the end of the easy-ball-entering state that transitions after the end, and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball-entering state, the predetermined error occurs. By doing so, the prize balls that were not given to the player during the execution of the special game can be given to the player after the predetermined error in the normal ball entry state is resolved, During the execution of the special game, the predetermined error occurs when the game ball enters the big winning hole and the prize ball is awarded to the player, and the process shifts after the special game ends. After the predetermined error continues until the normal ball-entering state transitions after the end of the easy-ball-entering state, if the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball-entering state, the predetermined error occurs. Even if the prize balls that were not awarded to the player during the execution of the special game are awarded to the player, the accumulated prize during the execution of the special game and after the occurrence of the predetermined error The display of the number of balls can be updated and the display corresponding to a specific value can also be displayed, and prize balls are given to the player when the game ball enters the big winning hole during the execution of the special game. is performed, the predetermined error continues to the normal ball-entering state after the transition to the easy-ball-entering state after the end of the special game, and then the normal ball-entering state By eliminating the predetermined error in the above, the amount of prize balls that were not awarded to the player during the execution of the special game due to the occurrence of the predetermined error If the prize balls are given to the player after the error is resolved, the base value will not be measured with the award of the prize balls that were not given to the player until the predetermined error is resolved. However, it corresponds to the ball entering the big winning hole during the execution of the special game, which is the trigger for the generation of the prize balls that were not awarded to the player until the predetermined error is resolved. It is characterized in that it is constructed so that the total number of shot balls can be counted based on the shot balls that have been counted .

According to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to realize appropriate game performance evaluation.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and effect control board of the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol success or failure lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 1 of special symbols. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of a special design. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of a special design. It is a schematic diagram which shows the design attribute of a decorative design. It is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern combination of the decorative pattern, and the production pattern during the jackpot. It is a schematic diagram showing the outline of super longevity jackpot production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of Kotobuki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of Kotobuki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of joy jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of the big hit B production. It is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen during a round game. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a winning-related effect; It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of over winning a prize production|presentation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of a large prize mouth count-up production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production|presentation of a bonus prize-winning production|presentation. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of the general winning mouth count-up effect. It is a time chart for explaining the priority of the big winning mouth count-up effect. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining an emphasis effect; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining error types of the gaming machine; It is a time chart for explaining whether or not an over winning effect is executed at the end of the jackpot. It is a time chart for explaining the presence or absence of the execution of the bonus winning effect at the end of the jackpot. 10 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows a volume adjustment screen. FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining overlapping execution of an over winning effect and a bonus winning effect; FIG. It is a time chart when over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of a winning ball signal when a game ball enters a general winning hole. It is a time chart of a winning ball signal when a game ball enters a big winning hole. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side; FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing control processing following FIG. 35 of the main processing on the main control side; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitor control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring control process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows special design control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol control general-purpose process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flow chart showing a special electric accessary product control process. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing control processing following FIG. 47 of the special electric accessary product control processing. 8 is a flowchart showing reset start processing; It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a prize effect content determination process; It is a flow chart which shows production control command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interrupt processing. 9 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing; It is a figure which shows typically the special design success or failure lottery table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table of the second embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and production mode of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table of the second embodiment. It is a comparison table of the variation time of the special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) according to the second embodiment; It is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. It is a front view showing the main control display device of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an emphasizing effect of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table of the third embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the emphasis effect, the special effect display, and the output of the specific effect sound during execution of the jackpot game of the third embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the execution time of emphasis effect|presentation of 3rd Embodiment, and the execution time of a jackpot end demonstration. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of emphasis production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment, light emission production|presentation, and character object production|presentation. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the variable character production of the third embodiment, and (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the big hit character production of the third embodiment. (A) is a time chart when the execution of the emphatic effect of the third embodiment is restricted, and (B) is a time chart when the execution of the over winning effect of the third embodiment is restricted. It is a time chart when power failure occurs during the execution of the jackpot type display of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a time chart when power failure occurs during execution of round display according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and production control board of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a functional block diagram showing power-on transition mode control means and performance information management means of the fourth embodiment; It is a front view which shows the main control board unit of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the performance display monitor of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the basic game specification of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol success or failure lottery table of the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between operations and transition modes at power-on in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of setting values on a performance display monitor according to the fourth embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing the contents of notification during the setting change mode of the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of notification during the setting confirmation mode of the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a storage area of a RAM of a main control board of a fourth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a performance information storage area of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of base values for each section according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing display contents displayed in identification segments and ratio segments for each management section (measurement section) according to the fourth embodiment; It is a time chart when the first hit occurs in the first interval A when the power is turned on in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when power is restored in the fourth embodiment is a special game state, and (B) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state when power is restored in the fourth embodiment is normal. 4 is a time chart showing an initial display period in a game state; It is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during execution of a jackpot game.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[First embodiment]
1 and 2 show a front view and a rear view of the pachinko game machine PM according to the present embodiment. First, with reference to these figures, an overview of the overall configuration of the pachinko game machine PM will be given. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic Configuration of Pachinko Machines>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PM (also simply referred to as "game machine PM") has an outer frame 1, which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame configured in the size of an outer rectangular frame. A front frame 2, which is constructed in the size of a rectangular frame and forms an opening and closing mounting frame, is attached to the front right edge by an upper and lower hinge mechanism 3 arranged on the left edge of the front so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached. The outer frame 1 is always kept in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected by using a locking device 4 called a double lock.

A rectangular glass frame 5 that fits the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and a locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2.例文帳に追加A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the multi-layered glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. there is

On the front side of the glass frame 5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the progress of the game, and a speaker 11 that produces sound effects according to the development of the game. Upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 8 and lower ball tray 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and the front center of the upper ball tray 8 is pressed by the player. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a shooting handle 12 for shooting game balls is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9 . Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effecting will be referred to as "effect button 15". cross-shaped switch (cross-key, cross-shaped button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches it, touch sensor , touch panel, etc., the concept includes all operation input means.

The game board 20 is configured with a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin as a base. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape to define a substantially circular game area PA in which game balls can roll. In addition, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and the position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (the position of the inner rail 42) A ball return prevention valve 43 is disposed at the tip portion) to prevent the game ball discharged into the game area PA from the outlet opening from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, there are various types of openings such as a first starting opening 51, a second starting opening 52, an operating gate 53, a big winning opening 54, and general winning openings 61, 62, 63, 64. In addition to the winning opening, the first special design display device 71, the second special design display device 72, the first special design reservation lamp 73, the second special design reservation lamp 74, the normal design display device 75, the general design reservation lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the performance display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center decoration 21.例文帳に追加

The game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the center, and includes a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to right-handed hitting). and a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area). A top plate portion 22 is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center ornament 21 and faces the outer rail 41 in a substantially vertical direction. A communication passage 44 is formed through which a game ball can pass to the right area PA2. In this embodiment, a game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter either the first starting hole 51 or the general winning holes 61 to 63 located below the center ornament 21 mainly. On the other hand, a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any one of the operating gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54, which are mainly arranged on the right side of the center ornament 21. is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided for discharging the game balls that have rolled down without entering the winning holes to the back side of the game board 20.例文帳に追加Each component provided on the game board 20 will be described below in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting port switch 511 for detecting the entry of game balls. The first starting port 51 is a normally open winning port that is open upward, and mainly allows game balls (left-handed game balls) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and has a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to hitting to the right, and mainly game balls flowing down the right area PA2 (game balls hit to the right) can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbols that are variably displayed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 72 are referred to as "second special symbols". The second starting port 52 includes a normal electric accessory 522 generally called an electric chew, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 522 . The ordinary electric accessary 522 is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the second starting port 52 . That is, the normal electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) described later. In the open state, the ease of entering a game ball increases. This ordinary electric accessory 522 has a front-rear slide type movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting port 52 . The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) that closes the second starting port 52 to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball, and a closed position (protruding position) that opens the second starting port 52 to allow the entering of the game ball. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between an open position (retracted position) that makes it easier. The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to slope downward from the right side to the left side as viewed from the front. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guide path, and from the right to the left on the guide path. It flows downward and falls from the left end of the normal electric accessory 522 .

The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the normal symbol game, and has an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of game balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 serves as a trigger for a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second starting port 52 is to be opened.

The big winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontally rectangular winning opening that is opened when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big win or a small win. The big winning opening 54 includes a big winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning opening for driving the special electric accessory 542 to open and close. A solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric accessory 542 changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the big winning opening 54 . In this example, the big winning opening 54 is provided in the right area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game (big win game, small win game), when the game ball is shot, it can be easily entered into the big winning hole 54 by hitting the right side area PA2, i.e. hitting the right side. It's becoming

The general winning holes 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side area PA1, which is a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting, and game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 are provided with a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting entry of game balls. This left general winning hole switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning holes 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction, etc. Incoming balls can also be detected.

The general winning hole 64 is arranged in the right side area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to hitting to the right, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 has a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of a game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of special symbols or ordinary symbols, but like the other winning openings (except for the operation gate 53), it gives the opportunity to win prize balls. becomes.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 51 as a trigger. This first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp stops and switches to lighting display. , the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and fixed display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 . The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the second special symbol is represented according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp stops and switches to lighting display. , the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 73 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps. (up to 4 of each). The number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is a number related to the random number acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. indicates the number of times the obtained random number is suspended, that is, the success/failure determination is temporarily suspended until the success/failure determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random value. In the same way, the number of activated balls of the second special symbol is a random value obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. This number indicates the number of times that the obtained random number value is suspended, that is, the success/failure determination is temporarily suspended until the success/failure determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random value. there is

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and fixed display of normal symbols. The normal design reservation lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of normal design fluctuations reserved (the number of normal design fluctuations that have not yet been executed). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, a round indicator 77 for displaying the number of round games (unit games) in the jackpot game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric accessory 542 operates continuously) is provided. ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes a variable effect of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed/stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and an effect including a notice effect that preliminarily suggests or informs the degree of expectation of the big hit. An image is displayed, and a suspension display corresponding to the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative pattern display area 700 in which variable display of decorative patterns, advance notice effect display, etc. are executed, a first special figure reservation lamp 73 and a second special figure reservation lamp 74 A suspended image display area 710 in which the suspended image of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in synchronization with, and a varying image display area 720 in which the varying image corresponding to the varying display is displayed are provided. there is In this embodiment, as the effect display device 70,
It uses a liquid crystal display. In the decorative pattern display section 700, three rows of display regions (left pattern display region Z1, middle pattern display region Z2, right pattern display region Z3), which are variable display regions of decorative patterns, are arranged on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) are provided, the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display region Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display region Z2, and the right side of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display region Z3. Each pattern is stopped and displayed. The reserved image display section 710 displays a reserved image (a reserved icon) corresponding to the first special symbol actuation reserved ball and a reserved image (a reserved icon) corresponding to the second special symbol actuation reserved ball. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (ball entry order) of the operation reserved balls of the special symbols. Display is possible. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the change display currently being executed is displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the performance display device 70, and has functions such as the flow path of game balls, the protection of the performance screen, and the decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 for executing a performance action according to the development of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured with a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the progress of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as "effect lamp LP".

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the rear side of the front frame 2, a rear set board 30 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape which is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 and which has a front-to-rear communication window in the center. It is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so that it can be opened, opened, and detached from the side. A back set cover 30C having a rectangular box shape with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2.例文帳に追加(The main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are thereby covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 includes a storage tank 31 that stores a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 that extends rightward from the storage tank 31 with a gentle downward slope, and a right end of the tank rail 32 that connects downward. a ball supply passage portion 33 extending to the upper ball tray 6; A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, there are a main control board 100 that controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine PM, an effect control board 200 that controls all effects, an image display corresponding to the game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing image processing is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, there is a payout control board 400 for controlling the shooting and payout of game balls, and power is received from the game facility side and supplied to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. A power supply board 500 for outputting an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the game machine PM, and an external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are placed in predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30 in an assembly state housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a crimping structure and a sealing structure. are placed. These control boards and electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine PM are connected to each other via harnesses (connector cables), and the pachinko game machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Pachinko game machine control configuration>
Next, with additional reference to FIG. 3, each control board installed in the pachinko game machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko game machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a temporary storage area and a work area and a buffer memory, peripheral boards and various Equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured with an I/O port circuit 104 for inputting and outputting signals between devices, and the main CPU 101 performs games according to the control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform the main controls relating to progression. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 includes a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and resets when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state, a CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and a program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 operate as a separate system to generate a predetermined random number (internal random number). A random number generation circuit is installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 based on detection information from each switch and performs arithmetic processing, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile memory backed up by backup power generated in the power supply board 500 . The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing the data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of power failure when the power is turned off. ), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

In addition, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start switch 511, the second start switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big win switch 541, the left general win switch 611, the right general win switch 641, and the like. , and inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104 . In addition, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75 and a general symbol reservation lamp. 76, and also electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are received via the I/O port circuit 104. Send to display means and various solenoids. The main control board 100 is also electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600 and transmits game information signals from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I/O port 104 . This external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the game machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via the payout control board 300, for example.

The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various production control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the production control board 200. - 特許庁Data cannot be transmitted from the performance control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

The performance control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game performance based on the performance control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores performance control programs and various data, etc., a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, Equipped with a performance control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured with a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I/O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. A sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to game effects according to a control program stored in a ROM 202 . In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 includes a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and a reset when the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state using the system clock, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and a serial data input/output circuit. A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

Effect control board 200, in the effect control processing based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, the image control command for instructing the image and sound to the image control board 300, the lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91 (lamp data), drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like. The production control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so that two-way communication is possible. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200 .

In addition, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 equipped with a plurality of LED drivers, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line for transmitting the lamp data. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions upon receiving a lamp control signal for driving the LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on/off the switch in the circuit based on this lamp control signal. By supplying or cutting off the drive current to the production lamp LP, control is performed to turn on or off the production lamp LP.

Furthermore, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends drive control signals (driving data) for controlling the motor drivers 92 to the motor drivers 92 via the I/O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching on/off the switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the performance control board 200. Alternatively, it is cut off to control each movable accessory 24 to operate. Data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processing related to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. and an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured with a RAM 303 functioning as a buffer memory and an I/O port circuit 304 for inputting/outputting signals between peripheral boards and devices. , the sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control relating to the image rendering according to the control program stored in the ROM 302 . In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 includes a VDP for generating image data according to the content of the effect based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301, and a It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads image data stored in the image ROM according to instructions from the sub-sub CPU 301, processes the image data, and transmits a generated video signal (image data) to the effect display device. This VDP is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read out from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads sound data stored in the sound ROM according to instructions from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs sound data generated by synthesizing the sound data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401 , a ROM 402 and a RAM 403 . The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and controls the prize ball payout unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out the prize balls. is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the shooting mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the shooting handle 12 to control shooting of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island, and a backup power supply. and a power failure monitoring circuit for monitoring power failure due to voltage drop. supply. A power switch for activating the power circuit is connected to the power board 500, and on the premise that primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, the power board Predetermined power is supplied from a normal power supply circuit 500 to each control board and the like. The power board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been cut off. , effect control board 200 and payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PM from the power supply of the game island. A RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power board 500 for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting the initial values when the pachinko game machine PM is powered on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be configured to be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500, for example.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal from the main control board 100 . The external information signals that the external information terminal board 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a jackpot signal, a consecutive game signal, a pattern confirmation signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), a door Frame opening signal, security signal (also called security information signal), magnetic sensor abnormality signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball passing time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included. Also, the external devices installed outside the game machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display serves as useful judgment material for the player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of the gaming arcade, and determines the status of each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via the data display or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko machine>
The pachinko game machine PM configured as described above is used for games in a state in which the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked. A game is started by storing game balls in the tray 8 and rotating the shooting handle 12.例文帳に追加When the shooting handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are delivered one by one to the shooting mechanism 14 by the ball feeding mechanism 13 disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. The shooting mechanism 14 shoots out to the game area PA. At this time, when the shooting handle 12 is operated by less than the predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side area PA2 and flows down the left side area PA1. In this left area PA1, a left flow path is formed for flowing down the game ball toward the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61-63. On the other hand, when the shooting handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side area PA2 and flows down the right side area PA2. In this right area PA2, a right flow path for flowing down the game ball toward the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54 is formed. Thus, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA2 is divided into the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operation gate 53 according to the route distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , the special winning opening 54, and the general winning openings 61 to 64. If the ball does not enter any of the winning openings, the ball is flowed down to the out opening 29.例文帳に追加

When the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters one of the first starting hole 51, the second starting hole 52, the big winning hole 54, and the general winning holes 61 to 63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning hole is awarded. A ball is put out to an upper ball tray 8 or a lower ball tray 9 by a prize ball putting out unit 34. - 特許庁In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning hole (referred to as "unit number of prize balls") is "4" for the first start hole 51, and "4" for the second start hole. The starting port 52 is set to "1", the general winning ports 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the big winning port 54 is set to "15". It should be noted that the number of unit prize balls in each winning hole is not limited to the number exemplified in the present embodiment, and other unit number of prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit winning balls, the number of the first start openings 51 may be set to "1" instead of "4". Also, the number of the second starting ports 52 may be "three" instead of "one". Also, the number of the general prize winning openings 61 to 64 may be "five" instead of "three". Further, the number of big winning openings may be "10" instead of "15".

When the game ball enters the first start port 51 or the second start port 52, the lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored up to a predetermined upper limit number as the operation reserve ball of the special symbol. Then, when a predetermined start condition (variation start condition for special symbols to be described later) is satisfied, determination of special symbols, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination are performed with respect to the lottery random number value related to the first ball to be activated. , In a manner corresponding to the determination result, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the performance display device 70. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern has elapsed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed in a stop mode indicating a big win, the game shifts to a special game (big win game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this jackpot game, an opening/closing operation is performed to change the big winning opening 54 to an open state only once or a plurality of times. When a prescribed count number of game balls enter the big winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the big winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time, the round game being executed ends. Here, the mode of stopping the decorative symbols indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the types of the three symbols are the same. In this embodiment, when the special symbols and decorative symbols are fixedly displayed in the stop mode indicating the big win, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the big win game.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the special symbol probability variation function may operate from after the jackpot game ends until the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined terminal number. When the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the special pattern lottery jackpot probability shifts from a normal low probability state to a high probability state, so that a new jackpot (jackpot game) occurs relatively early. Become. It should be noted that the special symbol probability variation function may continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, as the above-mentioned predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set substantially corresponding to the number of variable display times until the occurrence of the next big win.

In addition, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol variation time shortening function may operate in association with or independently of the special symbol probability variation function. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time is improved (the number of jackpots per unit time is increased. can increase the ease of acquisition).

Furthermore, after the jackpot game is over, an electric chew support function (also simply called "electric support") may operate in association with or independently of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function. As for the electric chew support function, the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessary 522 opening extension function are operated to increase the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 52. state (also referred to as “electric sapo state” or “easy ball entry state”). In addition, when the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is shortened. When the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 operates, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a higher possibility that the number of normal symbol variations per fixed time period will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 will also increase. The possibility of increasing the number of incoming balls is also improved. Therefore, due to the operation of the electric chew support function, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second start hole 52 during that period increase, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot game balls, increases. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chewing support function is activated is also referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which the electric chewing support function is not activated is also referred to as a "low base state".

<Major Functional Configuration of Pachinko Machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/the performance control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. Incidentally, FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200).

The main control board 100 includes, as shown in FIG. Special game control means 150 , symbol display control means 155 , electric accessory control means 160 , game state control means 165 , error monitoring control means 170 , main information storage means 180 and command transmission/reception means 190 are included. The above-described means in the main control board 100 are configured by hardware such as the main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and electronic circuits provided on the main control board 100, and software such as control programs stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

The ball entry judging means 110 determines each winning opening based on detection signals from the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switches 611 and 641, and the like. Entry of a game ball into is determined. When the entering ball determination means 110 detects the entry of the game ball by the first starting hole switch 511, it generates an effect control command (referred to as a "first starting hole winning command") indicating that effect, When the entry of the game ball is detected by the 2 starting port switch 521, an effect control command indicating that effect (referred to as "second starting port winning command") is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 detects the game ball. When passing is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operating gate winning command") indicating that is generated. A production control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated, and when the entry of a game ball is detected by the left general winning opening switch 611, a production control command ("left general winning opening When the entry of the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 611, an effect control command (referred to as "right general winning opening winning command") is generated. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software, and adds a soft random number per special symbol to be used for the lottery of the special symbol. A random number is generated per special symbol. The game lottery random number generating means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by program processing of the main CPU 101 . These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As the software random numbers, the soft random number per special symbol added to the internal random number for generating the random number per special symbol, and the initial value to be newly updated after one period of updating of the soft random number per special symbol is completed. Soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining , special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the winning symbol (combination of symbols that will operate the condition device) as a special symbol stop symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number A special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for a new update after the update of one cycle is completed, a special symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting a special symbol variation pattern, A random number per normal symbol for use in a lottery for success or failure of a normal symbol, an initial value random number per normal symbol for determining an initial value for newly updating after one cycle of updating of the random number per normal symbol is completed, Ordinary design variation pattern random numbers and the like for use in selecting the variation pattern of the normal design are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.). during loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

Reservation control means 130 includes special symbol reservation control means 131 and normal symbol reservation control means 132 .

The special symbol retention control means 131 is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 or the second start port 52, and the random number value per special symbol, which is the random number value related to the special symbol game, is determined. A symbol random number value and a special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation reservation ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol reservation control means 131 stores the operation reservation ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the form of being combined with the ball entry order of the reservation ball. Temporarily stored in the 180 first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area.

In the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), the reservation 2 storage area (2 reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area). Each reservation storage area can store a set of random numbers per special symbol, random numbers per special symbol, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers as operation retention ball information. The operation pending ball information is stored in the order of the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area, while the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area. Regions are digested in order (first-in, first-out principle). Further, when the hold ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area are respectively shifted to storage areas with lower numbers, Clear the contents of the Reserved 4 storage area to zero.

In addition, the special symbol reservation control means 131 includes a first special symbol reservation ball number counter for counting the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reservation ball number counter for counting the number of operation reservation balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter. The special symbol reservation control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation reservation ball of a special symbol is obtained as an updating process of the number of operation reservation balls of special symbols, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command ("symbol storage command") and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. FIG. This one command includes information on both the number of activated balls with the first special symbol and the number of activated balls with the second special symbol. In principle, the operation reserve balls of each special symbol are digested in the order they enter the ball. , In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game exists, regardless of the existence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game Configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation pending ball of the second special symbol, even if an operation pending ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation pending ball of the first special symbol is digested. will be put on hold.

The normal symbol reservation control means 132 is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operation gate 53, and is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, which is a random number value per normal symbol, a random number value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern. A random number value is obtained, and the random number value is managed as normal symbol operation retention ball information. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 stores normal symbol operation reservation ball information up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form that is combined with the ball entry order of the relevant reserved balls. Temporarily store. In addition, the normal design reservation control means 132 has a normal design reservation ball number counter for counting the number of normal design operation reservation balls. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation reservation ball of the normal symbol is obtained as update processing of the number of operation normal symbol reservation balls, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

The pre-determination means 135 executes pre-determination for pre-reading notice targeting the operation-reserving ball with a special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-determination timing, (1) while waiting for a hit, and when the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not in operation, (2) while waiting for a hit, and Either of the following: (3) when the operation suspension ball with the second special symbol is obtained while the electric chew support function is in operation; It is time to satisfy the conditions. The above pre-determination timing is an example, and the pre-determination timing is changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol that does not have a normal electric accessory, and 8 are normally reserved For models that can be accumulated, the above (1) is targeted not only for the first special symbol but also for the second special symbol, etc.) Or even if you adopt a specification that makes a preliminary judgment at any time without setting a preliminary judgment timing good. Also, in each game state, only the ball with the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be subject to preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the ball with the first special symbol is subject to preliminary determination. Then, in the time-saving gaming state, the latent probability variable gaming state, and the probability variable gaming state, it is preferable that only the second special symbol's operation holding ball is targeted for prior determination. Specifically, the prior determination means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the operation reservation ball acquired this time from the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether it is correct or not. Pre-determination (property pre-determination), pre-determination of the pattern (pre-determination of the symbol), pre-determination of the variation pattern (pre-determination of the variation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers is divided into a plurality of areas in each of the pre-determination table, the pre-determination table for the symbol, and the table for pre-determination of the variation pattern. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of preliminary determination (also referred to as a "predetermination number")) is assigned to each region (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination conforms to the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 to be described later (result of winning/failure determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination). In addition, the winning/failing preliminary determination table, the symbol preliminary determination table, and the like may be the same as the winning/failure lottery table, the symbol lottery table, and the like used for the lottery when the variation is actually started. Here, the fluctuation pattern pre-determining table has the possibility that the game situation at the start of fluctuation (whether there is probability change, whether there is time saving, whether it is during the limited frequency period referring to the special table, the number of pending balls, etc.) Therefore, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions the region is included in. In addition, as a modification, it is configured to determine in advance a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area. You may Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. store in

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141 , special symbol stop symbol determination means 412 , and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 . Special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied, to the foremost storage area (suspension 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180 The stored random number per special symbol, random number per special symbol, and random number of special symbol variation pattern are read out and stored in the special symbol validity determination area, the special symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern of the main information storage means 180. Each is stored in the judgment area. Here, "the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied" means (A1) that the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, and (A3) ) that there is a ball with the first special symbol in operation pending, when all the conditions are satisfied. Further, "the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied" means (B1) that the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, and (B3). It is when all the conditions of the presence of the second special symbol operation pending ball are satisfied. In addition, when the fluctuation start condition of the first special design and the fluctuation start condition of the second special design are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special design is preferentially processed based on the above-mentioned priority digestion. do.

The special symbol success/failure determination means 141 reads a special symbol winning random number value from the special symbol success/failure determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the success/failure determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. decide whether to The result of this success/failure determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", loss data "00H"), and is used in subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol success/failure determination means 141 holds a special symbol success/failure lottery table referred to during this success/failure determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol success/fail lottery table. FIG. 5(A) is referred to in a game state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, and FIG. 5(B) is a game state in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating (high probability state). In the special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol per random value and the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the determination of whether the special symbols are valid, in the game state (low probability state) where the probability variation function of the special symbols is not operating, the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In the game state (high-probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated, a big win occurs when the special symbol per random number falls within the range of "0 to 1506". That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the big win varies from low probability "1/319.69" to high probability "1/43.49". In this way, the winning probability of the big win changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big win is set equally between the winning judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the game state (low-probability state, high-probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 determines the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be stopped based on the result of the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 includes a first special symbol big-hit symbol table and a second special symbol big-hit symbol table and a second It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbols after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means a special pattern after the jackpot game ends. It means a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) that does not trigger the operation of the stochastic variable function.

In this embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probability variation game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", 2) The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a “time saving state” or “time saving game state”, (3) All The state in which the function is not activated is called "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" are advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal gaming state". Therefore, below, as a game state with a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal game state, the probability variable game state and the time-saving game state are also referred to as "advantageous game state".

In addition, each game state is a combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) The probability variable gaming state can be expressed as “high probability high base state”, (2) time saving gaming state as “low probability high base state”, and (3) normal gaming state as “low probability low base state”. In addition, while the operating state of the probability variation function is a high probability state, the operating state of the electric chew support function is a low base state (a game state that is advantageous to the player compared to the "normal game state"). One) may be provided, such a game state is called a latent game state, and this latent game state may be expressed as a "high probability low base state". This latent certainty gaming state (“high probability low base state”) is a gaming state suitable for playing a game centered on a small hit, and the details will be described later. Unless otherwise specified, these states (combination state of low probability/high probability and low base/high base) are game states (win/fail judgment and variable display are possible) in the state not during the big hit or the small hit. state), it is a low probability low base state during the big hit, and it is the same game state as the game state at the time of winning the small hit during the small hit. At this time, the special symbol variation time shortening function is a state in which the variation time of at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the subject of the game in the game state, is shortened. means that That is, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, at least the first special symbol variation time ( average variation time) is shortened, and the variation display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game (probability variation game state, latent probability game state, time reduction game state), at least the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is reduced.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is (1) a big win type (type of symbol group) and (2) a game at the time of winning a big win. determined according to the state. In addition, the number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbols are displayed) is the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbols is activated (referred to as "the number of times of probability variation"), and the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated. It is set in accordance with the number of times to operate (referred to as "fluctuation time reduction times") and the number of times the electric chew support function operates (referred to as "electric support times"). In this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function start operating at the same time and end at the same time. (Therefore, in FIG. 6, "number of fluctuation time reductions" and "electric sapo operation number of times" are described in the same column).

FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol big hit symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random number, symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electrical support frequency), prescribed round number of big hit game, each round are associated with the opening times (maximum opening times) of the big winning openings 54 (in this example, the stop symbols are omitted for the sake of convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, as two types of jackpot types (symbol groups), they are distributed to a 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group A)
When the ``4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)'' of the first special pattern is won, the probability variation frequency ``10000 times'', the variation time reduction frequency ``10000 times'', and the power supply frequency ``10000 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. Probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. In this variable probability game state, a huge number of ``10000 times'' is set as the number of continuations (the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of shortening the variation time, and the number of times of electrical support), and the jackpot is not won until the number of times of continuation is reached. is not probabilistic (approximately 1/44 of winning), so it will continue substantially until the next big win occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group B)
When the ``4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)'' of the first special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``0 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``100 times'', and the electric support frequency ``100 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. A time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Also, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for special symbol per symbol random number, symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electric power support frequency), prescribed round number of big hit game, each round are associated with the opening times (maximum opening times) of the big winning openings 54 (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, three types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into a 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), a 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: pattern group C)
When the ``16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)'' of the second special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``10000 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``10000 times'', and the power supply frequency ``10000 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. Probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. As described above, this variable probability game state is set to a huge number of "10000 times" as the number of continuations, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. Also, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds". Also, this 16R specific jackpot may be designed to win even the first special pattern, in which case it is harder to win than the second special pattern (for example, 5% of all jackpot patterns, the second In one special pattern, it is preferable to set the specifications such that the 16R specific jackpot is 5%, the 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and the 4R normal jackpot is 35%.

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group D)
When the ``4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)'' of the second special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``10000 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``10000 times'', and the power supply frequency ``10000 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. Probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. As described above, this variable probability game state is set to a huge number of "10000 times" as the number of continuations, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group E)
When the ``4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)'' of the second special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``0 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``100 times'', and the electric support frequency ``100 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. A time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Also, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

Here, in this embodiment, three types of jackpot types are provided: a 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), a 4R specific jackpot (symbol groups A and D), and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol groups B and E). It is The expected value of prize ball acquisition in the special game (referred to as "prize ball acquisition expected value") is 16R specific jackpot>4R specific jackpot=4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds of the special game in the case of winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is "4 rounds", whereas the actual number of rounds of the special game in the case of winning the jackpot with the second special symbol is "4 rounds". 16 rounds", there is a higher possibility of shifting to a special game with a larger number of rounds when a big hit occurs with the second special symbol than when a big win occurs with the first special symbol. This is advantageous for the player in that he/she can obtain a ball. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of executions of the "long open round game" set for the special game. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is set to a fixed time of 29 seconds (although all rounds are set to "long open round game"), a predetermined round in the same jackpot game Alternatively, a ``short opening round game'' is provided in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is shortened to 2 seconds in all rounds, so that even if the number of rounds of the big winning game is the same, the number of balls to be released is substantially increased. A configuration having jackpots with different numbers of rounds (jackpots with different actual numbers of rounds) may be adopted. In the long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 is set so that a game ball of a prescribed count number (full count = 10 balls) can be entered into the big winning opening 54 or can be easily entered. It is a round game. A short opening round game is a round in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 is set to make it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball of a prescribed count number (full count = 10 balls) into the big winning opening 54. It is a game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of variation patterns. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, "selection rate" is indicated, but in fact, the judgment value (random number range) for determining the variation pattern is set according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. The variation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the variation pattern random number value belongs to. Various variation patterns are associated with variation time for each variation pattern as a termination condition of variation display of special symbols, and it is premised that the variation display of decorative symbols is also executed at the variation time.

Here, the variation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, "normal selection state", "time saving selection state", and "probability variation selection state" are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to a game state (normal game state) in which none of the special pattern probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function are in operation. In the time reduction selection state, the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, but the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated. It is in the pattern selection state. The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which all of the special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are operating.

In the special symbol variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, columns to be referred to are different for the first special symbol and for the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random number value is obtained. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation pending balls described in each figure ("0 pending", "1 to 2 pending", "3 pending") is the first special symbol fluctuation pattern lottery, It means the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation pending balls after holding digestion), and if it is a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (after holding digestion number of operation retention balls). The number of balls with pending operation is the number of balls with pending operation that exist at the time of the fluctuation pattern lottery (at the start of the relevant fluctuation display/after digestion of the holding) (does not include balls with pending operation that have been digested by the relevant fluctuation display). . In addition, as a modification thereof, the total value of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

The variation effect of the decorative design performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special design is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special design. For reference, FIGS. 7 to 9 also describe the contents of the variable effect set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "super shortened variation", "shortened variation", and "normal variation" are effects in which the decorative patterns in the three rows fluctuate, and without going through the reach state even once, they become "off" with so-called loose eyes. is. In the following, ultra-shortening variation, shortening variation and normal variation are also collectively referred to as "non-reach deviation". The non-reach out-of-reach types differ from each other in that the variable display stops in a shorter time in the shortened variation than in the normal variation and in the ultra-shortened variation than in the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state (reach state) where the same decorative pattern is stopped in 2 rows (generally left and right rows) of the 3 rows of decorative patterns, and the remaining 1 row (generally If a different decorative pattern stops in the middle row), it becomes a "lose", and if the same decorative pattern stops in the remaining one row (generally a middle row), it becomes a "big hit".

"SP reach (super reach)" is a reach production with relatively higher expectations for big hits than the above N reach. etc. is displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as types of SP reach. The SP reach A is a reach effect executed when the game state currently being executed is the normal state. The SP reach B is a reach effect executed when the game state currently being executed is the time-saving game state. The SP reach C is a reach effect executed when the game state currently being executed is the variable probability game state. In the variation pattern type of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase in the order of "non-reach"<"N reach"<"SP reach". As a modification, the contents of SP reach are the same (SP reach A) in the normal state and the time-saving game state, and different SP reach (SP reach C) may be set in the probability variable game state. Also, as another modified example, a variation pattern including pseudo-runs may be prepared. Pseudo-continuation means that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporary stop) and again variably displayed during one variative display of the decorative symbols. It is a production (pseudo-continuous production, pseudo-fluctuation production, pseudo-continuous fluctuation production, re-variation production) to be shown. In other words, the pseudo-run is an effect in which the pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times in which all the decorative symbols in the three rows start to fluctuate or re-variate and then temporarily stop or stop. The higher the number of pseudo-runs (the number of pseudo-fluctuations), the higher the possibility of developing into an SP reach with a high degree of expectation for a big hit.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the normal selection state. The variation pattern table 1 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (big win, loss).

Variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for loss. Here, if the result of the validity determination of the first special symbol is "off", the variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach A) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol are set so that the contents of the table are different, and even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random number values are the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the first special symbol activated, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short, and the number of the balls with the first special symbol activated is more likely to be selected. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation time is relative regardless of the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol. A variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation) or PH1-2 (normal variation), which is set to be relatively short, is selected. In addition, as a modification, when the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", only the main variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortening variation is selected regardless of the number of operation suspensions of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation is most easily selected (it is preferable that the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of balls that are activated in the second special symbol).

Variation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit/fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time reduction selection state. The variation pattern table 2 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for loss, fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set. . Here, if the result of the determination of the suitability of the first special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH2- 2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach A) are selected. That is, if the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is selected regardless of how many balls with the first special symbol are activated. never. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach B) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol are set so that the contents of the table are different, and even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random number values are the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the second special symbol operation pending ball does not exist, the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortening variation) is not selected, and the second special symbol operation pending ball does not exist. If there is, the larger the number of balls with the second special symbol activated, the more easily the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation) is likely to be selected.

Variation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit/fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the probability variation selection state. The variation pattern table 3 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for loss, fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), PH3-2 (normal fluctuation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set. Here, if the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", the variation pattern PH3- 2 (normal variation) or PH 3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. That is, if the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is selected regardless of how many balls with the first special symbol are activated. never. On the other hand, if the result of the right or wrong determination of the second special symbol is lost, one of the variation patterns PH3-1 (super shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. be done. At this time, if the result of the right or wrong judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, depending on the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol (in detail, depending on the presence or absence of the operation pending ball of the second special symbol) Reference destination have different table contents, and
Even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the second special symbol operation pending ball does not exist, the variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortened variation) is not selected, and the second special symbol operation pending ball exists. Since the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation) can be selected only when there is a second special symbol operation retention ball is present than when the second special symbol operation retention ball does not exist This tends to make it easier for a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time to be selected.

A variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits. Here, when the result of the win/loss determination of the first special symbol is a big win, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big win type (4R specific big win, 4R normal big win). Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is independent of the jackpot type (16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot). selected.

As described above, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the variation time of the special symbol is defined for each variation pattern. display time) is set to "0.5 second". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbols is the time during which the special symbols are definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time and fixed stop time of the decorative symbols are also set corresponding to the variable time and fixed stop time of the special symbols. In addition, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the performance contents and variation time at the time of the big win can be the same as those at the time of the loss, but it is preferable to make the final performance contents different at the time of the big win and the time of the loss. In other words, even if it is the same N reach, the decorative pattern will be a double eye (example: "7, 7, 7") at the time of the big hit, while the decorative pattern will be out of the reach (example: "7, 8・ 7”), or even if the SP reach is the same A to C, the final production content will be the production content showing success at the time of the big hit, and the decorative pattern will be double (example: ally character wins the enemy character. , and then "7, 7, 7" is displayed). and then "7-8-7" is displayed). In addition, it is preferable that the variation time (production time) is longer at the time of the big hit than at the time of the loss, even if the contents of the production are the same (when it develops into the same SP reach). , It is preferable that the SP reach A to C at the time of the big hit have a longer variation time (performance time) than the SP reach A to C at the time of loss by 10 seconds.

After selecting the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start varying the decorative symbol, so whether the communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. Production control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not, production control command (variation additional information designation command) including special design variation addition pattern (information for adding or subtracting variation time), special design variation pattern Generate a production control command (variation pattern specification command) containing information, a production control command (symbol specification command) containing information on the character production number (symbol group and game state), etc. (Hereafter, these commands are collectively called " ), which is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has normal symbol suitability determination means 146 , normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 , and normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 . The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol reserve storage area when the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied. They are stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "normal symbol variation start condition" is (1) normal symbol variation standby, and (2) presence of a normal symbol operation pending ball. When all these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbols are in a state where fluctuation can be started (state where the fluctuation start condition is established).

The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads out the normal symbol hit random number from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the normal symbol suitability determination, and the determination result is either "hit" or "loss". to determine whether The result of the normal symbol determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in subsequent processing, and then cleared when the normal symbol variation stops. The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 holds a normal symbol success/failure lottery table (not shown) that is referenced when the normal symbol success/failure determination is made. The probability of hitting the normal pattern is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of normal patterns) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of normal patterns) is operating. is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and if the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, a predetermined winning symbol (a trigger for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate) While selecting the stop pattern to become), when the result of the judgment of the normal pattern is a loss, a predetermined losing pattern (a stop pattern that does not trigger the operation of the normal electric accessory 522) is selected. In this embodiment, while assigning the symbol A and the symbol B as the winning symbol of the normal symbol, the symbol C is assigned as the losing symbol of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads a normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and refers to a normal symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. (variation time) is determined. The fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is set to "0.2 seconds". Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 second". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in the normal design control, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, if the electric chew support function is not operating, the probability of winning the judgment of the normal design is set to "0", and the normal design It is also conceivable to adopt a specification that makes the variable time uniform.

In addition, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessary 522 according to the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 holds a normal electric accessory opening pattern table referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessory 522 . The opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessory 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chewing support function (opening extension function) is not operating, and the electric chewing support function (opening extension function) is set to "0.2 seconds". If activated, "5.8 seconds" is set. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522 may be different according to the type of the winning pattern of the normal pattern. For example, as an opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522, when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating, if the hit pattern of the normal pattern is pattern A, "open for 3 seconds x 1 time -> 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds)”, and if the winning pattern of the normal symbol is symbol B, “2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds)” .8 seconds)”.

The special game control means 150, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a jackpot, according to the determined jackpot type (symbol group), the execution time (demonstration time) of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration, A round game execution time (round time) is determined. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the performance control board 200 to execute a performance control command (referred to as a "jackpot start demo command") for instructing execution of a jackpot start demonstration performance and a jackpot end demonstration performance. A performance control command (referred to as a "jackpot end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. - 特許庁The jackpot start demo command is also a trigger for determining the contents of a series of jackpot middle effects (jackpot start demo effect, round effect, and jackpot end demo effect) developed during the jackpot game on the effect control board 200 side. Become. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "round effect specification command") for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the jackpot game. , is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the big winning opening 54, and the like. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is uniformly set to 5 seconds, and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is uniformly set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time of the end demo (demonstration time), not only the jackpot type (symbol group) but also the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, even if it is the same jackpot type (symbol group), the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot. The execution time of the end demonstration (demonstration time) may be different. For example, on the premise that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special pattern, and for the 4R normal jackpot, if the jackpot is won in a low probability and low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (as a jackpot start demo effect , Execution of production A-1 displaying ``start of normal jackpot''), execution time of jackpot end demonstration is 15 seconds (as jackpot end demonstration production, production B-1 and prepaid A high-probability high-base state or a low-probability effect C is executed to call attention to forgetting to take out a card (*a storage medium storing information about the amount of money required to borrow game balls for games). When the jackpot is won in the high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (execution A-1 as the jackpot start demonstration effect), and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, production B-1 is executed and production C is not executed), and for 16R specific jackpots and 4R specific jackpots, when a jackpot is hit in a low-probability low-base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (jackpot start demo As a production, the production A-2 displaying ``Start of the probability variable jackpot'' is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 20 seconds (Production B-2 displaying ``Entering the probability variable mode'' as the jackpot end demonstration production. and performance C), on the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (the performance A-2 is executed as the jackpot start demonstration performance). The execution time of the jackpot end demonstration may be set to 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demonstration production, the production B-3 displaying "Continue variable probability mode" is executed, and the production C is not executed). In addition, on the premise that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special pattern, if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (16R specific jackpot) regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot. , 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot are set to 5 seconds, and as jackpot start demonstration effects, the effect A-1 or effect A-2 is executed), and the jackpot end demonstration execution time is 30 seconds (16R specific jackpot 30 seconds for the 4R specific jackpot, the performance B-2 and the performance C are executed as the jackpot end demonstration performance, but for the 4R normal jackpot, the performance is set to 15 seconds, and the performance B-1 and the performance C are executed as the jackpot end demonstration performance. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big hit, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (in any of the 16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot), regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. The execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 20 seconds (20 seconds for the 16R specific jackpot and the 4R specific jackpot, and the jackpot end demo is executed for 5 seconds, and the jackpot start demonstration production is performed by the production A-1 or the production A-2). As a performance, the performance B-3 is executed and the performance C is not executed, but the 4R normal jackpot is set to 10 seconds, and as the jackpot end demonstration performance, the performance B-1 is executed and the performance C is not executed). . This relationship of time values is an example, and if the magnitude relationship of each demonstration time in each situation is the same as above, it is not limited to this time value. Also, in any of the above specifications, when a big hit is made in the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state, the effect C does not occur. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored during the fluctuation or during the big win game, the performance C may be generated exceptionally.

The symbol display control means 155 includes special symbol display control means 156 and normal symbol display control means 157 . The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variation display, the first special symbol is definitely displayed. Let In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 . The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). To generate a production control command (referred to as a “variation stop command”). The normal symbol display control means 157 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 75 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and definite-displays the normal symbol after the variable display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of normal symbols. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 .

In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 outputs a production control command (referred to as a "standby demonstration command") that triggers the execution of a waiting demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration production) when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more. This is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . "The game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer" means that a period in which there is no special symbol operation pending ball and no variable display of special symbols continues for a predetermined period of time or longer. If a period in which no game balls are fired continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, or a period in which no game balls enter any of the winning holes continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, the game will be interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer. It is good also as a specification which continues.

The electric role product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric role product solenoid 543 as a jackpot game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, and a special electric role is performed. The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening and closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for the specified number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a big winning opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric accessory 542 has been operated (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, the operation end condition (unit game end condition) of the special electric accessory 542 in the jackpot game is that a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enter the big winning hole 54. Alternatively, the opening time of the big winning opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time ("29 seconds" in this embodiment).

In addition, the electric role product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric role product solenoid 523 when the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol corresponds to a hit, and the normal electric role product 522 (the second 2 Controls the opening and closing of the starting port 52). Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 522 for only 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chew support function (open extension function) is not activated. Then, in the high base state where the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enter the second start port 52, or that the second start port 52 The opening time reaches the maximum opening time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

The game state control means 165, when the result of the winning judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the big win game based on the big win type (the kind of the symbol group) and the game state at the time of winning the big win. determines the game state after the end of , and switches the game state after the big win game ends. In this embodiment, as described above, as the game state of multiple types, normal game state (low probability low base state), time-saving game state (low probability low base state), variable game state (high probability high base state) One of a plurality of types of game states is set alternatively. Since each game state has already been described in detail, redundant description will be omitted here.

In addition, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game based on the big win type (type of symbol group) when the big win game is executed, and after the end of the big win game Toggle the variation pattern selection state of . In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection state, normal selection state, time saving selection state, probability variation selection state is set, depending on the determined game state and jackpot type, the number of times of variation display of special symbols, etc. Therefore, one of a plurality of variations pattern selection states is set alternatively. Since each variation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, redundant description will be omitted here.

In addition, the game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "game state designation command") including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I/O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, door/frame opening signal, etc. , determines whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, in order to instruct the effect control board 200 to perform an error state effect, a effect control command ("error effect designation command") including the error information is requested. Although omitted in FIG. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch detects whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Also, the magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming behavior.

The main information storage means 180 stores the random number information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation reserved ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game shortening function, electric chew support function) information, information on variation pattern selection status, information on the result of judging the success or failure of special symbols and normal symbols (big hit, lose), stop symbols (including symbol groups) related to special symbols and normal symbols Information, information on special symbols and normal symbols variation pattern (including variation addition pattern), information on big hit game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of openings per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, information on the performance control command data, etc., and a predetermined storage for storing each information. have an area.

The command transmission/reception means 190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the performance control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when there is a command transmission request. It is Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data.
1”, and Bit 7 of the EVENT data is set to “0”. When transmitting such information as valid information, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control commands generated in each process are transmitted one command per interrupt period according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes effect lottery random number generation means 210, effect control means 220, lamp control means 230, role control means 240, error effect control means 250, sub-main information storage means 260, command transmitting and receiving means 270; It should be noted that each of the above means in the effect control board 200, sub-main CPU201 arranged on the effect control board 200, ROM202, RAM203, hardware such as electronic circuits, and software such as control programs stored in the ROM202. It is a functional representation of something.

The effect lottery random number generating means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by program processing of the sub-main CPU 201 . These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include the pre-reading lottery random number used in the lottery of the pre-reading effect, the decorative pattern random number used in the lottery of the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, the variable effect pattern random number used in the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, and the advance notice effect. It includes a notice lottery random number used for lottery, a jackpot performance pattern random number used for lottery for a jackpot performance pattern, and a stage lottery random number used for stage shift lottery. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the main processing of the effect control side described later (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100). do.

Effect generalizing means 220 includes effect mode control means 221 , pending information display control means 222 , prefetching notice control means 223 , fluctuation effect control means 224 , decoration pattern control means 225 , notice effect control means 226 and special game effect control means 227 . include.

The production mode control means 221, based on the game state designation command etc. from the main control board 100, controls the production mode (" (also referred to as "game production mode"). In this embodiment, as a plurality of production modes, "normal production mode", "time saving production mode", "probability variable production mode" are set, and the game state (or fluctuation pattern) managed on the main control board 100 side Selected state) and the number of times of variable display of special symbols, etc., one of a plurality of types of performance modes is set alternatively, and a variable performance corresponding to the set performance mode is executed. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal production mode" is set, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving production mode" is set, and the game state is the variable probability game state. When there is, "probability variation production mode" is set. When one of the production modes is set, as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in the production mode, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

The holding information display control means 222 has a first holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and a second holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. have. Reservation information display control means 222, when receiving a pattern memory number command from main control board 100, updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation reservation balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives a variation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. In addition, the pending information display control means 222 displays the number of active pending balls of the first special symbol on the pending image display section 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first pending ball number counter and the second pending ball number counter. and the number of pending images corresponding to the number of active pending balls of the second special symbol are displayed. In addition, the pending information display control means 222 is displayed in the changing image display area 720 of the effect display device 70 by digesting the operation pending ball (first active pending ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , control is performed to display a changing image that is switched to a holding image corresponding to this operation holding ball. In this embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "held image" without distinguishing between them, and the changing image of the first special symbol It may simply be referred to as a "fluctuation image" without distinguishing it from the fluctuation image of the second special symbol.

The pre-reading notice control means 223 executes a pre-reading determination (referred to as "pre-reading lottery") for the operation suspension ball to be the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous notice effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot winning or a high-expectation effect (such as a reach effect) occurring over one or more times of variable display before the operation reserve ball targeted for look-ahead is digested. is generated as an aspect of At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100 . Here, when the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, respectively Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4), they are temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form linked to the entry order of the pending balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the reservation storage area of the main control board 100, and the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), A reserved 2 storage area (second reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided. Each reservation storage area can store information on the result of propriety pre-determination, information on the pre-determination result of pattern, and information on the pre-determination result of variation pattern as a set. The information of the pre-determination result is stored in the order of reservation 1 storage area, reservation 2 storage area, reservation 3 storage area, reservation 4 storage area, reservation 1 storage area, reservation 2 storage area, reservation 3 storage area, reservation 4. It is digested in order of storage area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the information of the preliminary judgment result in the reservation 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary judgment result stored in the reservation 2 storage area, the reservation 3 storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is stored in the lower numbered storage areas. While shifting, clear the contents of the reserved 4 storage area to zero.

The variation production control means 224 controls the variation process (production process ) is determined by lottery. The variable performance control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variable performance pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variable performance pattern of decorative symbols, and selects a special symbol variation pattern from among these multiple types of variable performance pattern tables. A variable effect pattern table corresponding to (variable time) is selected. Here, on the side of the main control board 100, the main variation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A", "SP reach B", etc.) is determined, while on the production control board 200 side, based on the main variation pattern A sub-variation pattern (for example, “SP reach A1, A2 . In the decorative pattern fluctuation production pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuation display mode, that is, the scenario of the series of production display process from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the end of the fluctuation is defined. Timings for producing effects are also stipulated as a time schedule. Also, regarding the variation production pattern of this decorative pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special pattern is the same (even if the same information variation start command is received), if the production mode during stay is different, production Variation performance patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, the variable effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during stay.

In addition, the fluctuation production control means 224 is triggered by the reception of the standby demonstration command from the main control board 100 until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started after receiving the standby demonstration command (the next fluctuation start During the customer waiting period (until the command is received), for example, a standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) for reproducing a moving image for demonstration is executed.

The decoration symbol control means 225 is based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of symbols to be stopped (left, middle, and right symbols) is determined by lottery. In this example, three pattern rows containing a plurality of types of decorative patterns are formed, and the decorative patterns are formed by identifying elements such as numbers. In addition, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when determining a combination of decorative symbol stop symbols (also referred to as a "stop symbol pattern") by lottery. The plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for out of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-out of reach. A stop pattern of the decorative pattern is formed as a combination of three patterns, and includes a ``stop pattern indicating a big win (big hit pattern)'' and a ``stop pattern indicating a loss (lost pattern)''. A jackpot pattern indicating a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered patterns are aligned. A jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2, 2, 2") in which three patterns of the same even number are aligned. A winning pattern is a combination of stop patterns (for example, "1, 3, 8") in which at least one of the three patterns is a pattern with a number different from the other numbers. Here, out of the winning symbols, the reach-losing symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbols are shifted back and forth by several frames while the left and right symbols match. Become. In addition, in the case of a small winning pattern or a 2R big winning pattern even if it is a big winning pattern, there may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7", for example. In addition, if the lottery result is a non-reach out, a specific outcome called a so-called "chance eye" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7" as order, "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the offset. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, when performing temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display before final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, a special symbol ( Pseudo consecutive pattern) is selected. In the case of displaying a temporary stop pattern suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-run, characters such as "NEXT" are displayed for at least one stop pattern (typically a middle pattern) among the stop patterns of the three rows of decorative patterns. There are cases where special symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols) are replaced and displayed (for example, "2, NEXT, 3", etc.). The order of stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variable effect pattern to be described later. In this embodiment, as a rule, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol→right symbol→middle symbol. However, in the case of a variable production pattern with a shortened variation in which the fluctuation time is set to be extremely short, the left design, middle design, and right design are stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a special fluctuation production pattern, the right design → It is also possible to stop in the order of middle symbols→left symbols, and in this case, there is a tendency that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes relatively high. In addition, it is desirable that the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern start to fluctuate at the same time, regardless of the stop order. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design.

Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol attributes of the decorative symbols in this embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of identification elements consisting of numbers and colors (display colors) assigned to the identification elements. In this embodiment, a total of 9 types of numerals "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (that is, there are a total of 9 types of decorative patterns). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern rows, and the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1") on the effect display device 70. is cyclically displayed or scrolled in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, and after "9", it returns to "1" (or returns to "9" again after "1"). . This specification is the same in other embodiments. Each decorative pattern has a pattern attribute determined by the type of color applied to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative patterns are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same pattern attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three colors of "blue", "red" and "gold" are set as the colors of the decorative pattern. In the drawings, the display modes of the three types of decorative patterns of "blue", "red", and "gold" are represented by "outline", "diagonal lines", and "solid". Specifically, decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified into blue pattern attributes (blue attributes), and decorative patterns "1", "3", "5", and "9" are classified into blue pattern attributes (blue attributes). ” is classified into the red design attribute (red attribute), and the decorative design “7” is classified into the gold design attribute (golden attribute). In the present embodiment, as the symbol attributes of the decorative symbols, the expectation of winning ball output and the expectation of probability change increase in the order of “blue”<“red”<“golden” one step at a time. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the decorative design with the blue attribute is also referred to as "blue design", the decorative design with red attribute is also referred to as "red design", and the decorative design with gold attribute is also referred to as "gold design".

A notice performance control means 226 draws lots for notice performance patterns defining details of the notice performance executed at each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation performance pattern determined by the variation performance control means 224. - 特許庁Determined by The notice performance patterns include performance patterns for temporarily or stepwise image display of specific character images, animations, etc., performance patterns for outputting specific sounds, performance patterns for operating movable accessories, and the like. The advance notice performance is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative pattern, and suggests in advance that the degree of reliability of the big win that the pattern fluctuation is stopped in the big win mode is high. The advance notice performance includes the advance notice performance executed before the ready-to-win state occurs (including when the ready-to-win state occurs) in the variable display process of the decorative pattern, and the notice performance to be executed after the ready-to-win state occurs. Each notice effect has a different hit reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the occurrence of reach is relatively more expected than the notice effect displayed before the occurrence of reach. getting higher. A notice performance control means 226 holds a notice lottery table referred to when selecting a notice performance pattern for each kind of notice performance, and makes a notice corresponding to the kind of notice performance occurring along the scenario of the variable performance pattern. A lottery table is selected. Specific types of notice effects include, for example, comment notice effects, background notice effects, SU (step-up) notice effects, logo notice effects, mini character notice effects, group notice effects, and role notice effects. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 70 . Therefore, even if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed by the same variable performance pattern, it is possible to generate various performance modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice performances.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the contents of the effect during the big win (big win effect pattern) for notifying that the big win game is in progress. The performance during the big win includes a big win start demonstration performance for reporting the start of the big win game, a round performance for reporting that the round game is in progress, and a big win end demonstration performance for reporting the end of the big win game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the jackpot start demonstration command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227, based on the information of the jackpot type stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, creates a effect pattern during the jackpot (jackpot start demo effect pattern). , round performance pattern, jackpot end demo performance pattern) are determined. In this big win performance pattern, a big win start demonstration performance time, a round performance time (a performance time corresponding to the opening pattern of the big prize winning port 54), and a big win end demonstration performance time are set along the time axis. A series of performance contents are set. In addition, the special game effect control means 227 executes the big win start demonstration effect in response to receiving the big win start demonstration command from the main control board 100 according to the big win effect pattern, and in response to receiving the round effect designation command. Each round performance is executed, and when a big win end demonstration command is received, the big win end demonstration performance is executed. In the jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the words "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. In addition, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that liven up the jackpot game are displayed. Then, in the jackpot end demonstration performance, for example, the characters "jackpot end" are displayed on the screen to announce the end of the jackpot game, and then the performance indicating the game state (mode) to be shifted to is displayed.

As described above, the effect control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined effect contents (prefetch effect pattern, variable effect pattern, advance notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot effect pattern, etc.), This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 .

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamps, the color of light emitted, etc. according to the content of the effect set by the effect generalizing means 220 . The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10, the board lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. , and transmits this lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board 91 .

The role control means 240 controls driving of each movable role 24 according to the content of the effect set by the effect control means 220 . The role control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for controlling the driving of the movable role 24, and transmits a drive control signal (driving data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify that an error state has occurred in the game machine according to the error effect pattern. there is

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative pattern information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like. It has a storage area. For example, the command storage area includes an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands for the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. includes an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission/reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Command transmitting/receiving means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal described above from the main control board 100, executes the reception interrupt processing (details described later) of the production control command, and various production control commands in this interrupt processing It is designed to be acquired. In addition, when the command transmitting/receiving means 270 receives the strobe signal, the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command is preferentially performed over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing with a priority level less than 7, which will be described later). ing.

In addition, the command transmitting/receiving means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct the execution of the effect contents (fluctuation effect pattern information, advance notice effect pattern information, decoration pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The received image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by serial communication. In principle, the image control commands are transmitted at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. , the advance notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the symbol change effect at each stage of the variable display process. Furthermore, the command transmission/reception means 270 receives an ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 .

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko game machine PA having such a configuration is configured such that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game. Below, among various game effects, the contents of the effect during the big hit will be described. In the following, "restricting execution" or "regulating execution" means, for example, not executing all, not executing part of, relatively low priority of display or output, etc. It is used as a concept including Also, hereinafter, "execute (overlapping)" means that one execution period (or execution timing) overlaps with the other execution period (or execution timing). It is used as a concept including a case where the entire periods (or execution timings) overlap and a case where both execution periods (or execution timings) partially overlap.

[Production during the jackpot]
As described above, the during-big-hit production includes the big-hit start demonstration production, the round production, and the big-hit end demonstration production. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type (type of pattern group), the jackpot pattern combination (combination of decorative patterns when the jackpot occurs), and the production pattern during the jackpot. (A) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, and (B) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state. . As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the jackpot symbol combination and the type of the jackpot effect pattern are determined according to the jackpot type (symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process. In this embodiment, even if the jackpot types are the same, the type of the jackpot pattern combination and the type of the jackpot pattern combination can be different depending on the game state when the jackpot is won.

The jackpot pattern combination is composed of a combination of stop modes "*.*.*" in which three decorative patterns of the same number (identification element) are aligned (*: decorative pattern of an arbitrary number). The jackpot pattern combinations are “specific jackpots” such as “1.1.1”, “3.3.3”, “5.5.5”, “7.7.7” and “9.9.9”. Odd number design combination (red design combination, gold design combination) and "specific jackpots" such as "2 2 2", "4 4 4", "6 6 6", "8 8 8" ” or an even symbol combination (blue symbol combination) indicating a “normal jackpot”. In other words, the odd pattern combination (gold pattern combination, red pattern combination) is a jackpot pattern combination that confirms that you have won the "specific jackpot", while the even number pattern combination (blue pattern combination) is a "specific jackpot" and " It is an undetermined jackpot pattern combination which jackpot type of "normal jackpot" is won.

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" and that the player has won a "specific jackpot" that triggers the shift to the probability variable gaming state. That is, the gold pattern combination is a jackpot pattern combination that definitely informs that the player wins the maximum advantage jackpot (16R specific jackpot) which is the most advantageous to the player among a plurality of jackpot types. The red symbol combination is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either ``16 rounds'' or ``4 rounds'', but the winning of the ``specific jackpot'' that triggers the transition to the variable game state. It is a big hit pattern combination that informs of. The blue symbol combination is confirmed that the actual number of rounds is "4 rounds", but whether it is elected to the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the variable gaming state, or to the "time-saving gaming state" It is a jackpot symbol combination that informs that it is uncertain whether the "normal jackpot", which is the trigger for transition, is won. Here, even if it is a blue symbol combination, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (that is, even if the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds", even if the blue symbol combination However, it is preferable that the red symbol combination is more likely to result in a substantial number of rounds of "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "joyful jackpot effects" to be described later, a "joyful jackpot C effect" that is a variable promotion and a round promotion may be provided.

In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of jackpot production patterns, "super longevity jackpot performance", "Kotobuki jackpot A performance", "Kotobuki jackpot B performance", "big hit A performance", and "big hit B performance" are set. It is The super longevity jackpot effect is a jackpot mid-win effect pattern type set corresponding to the jackpot pattern combination being the “gold pattern combination”. Kotobuki big hit A production and Kotobuki big hit B production are the big hit medium production pattern types set corresponding to the big win pattern combination being "red pattern combination". The big-hit production A and the big-hit B production are the medium-big-hit production pattern types set corresponding to the big-hit pattern combination being the “blue pattern combination”. In other words, the big hit effect pattern type is set according to the symbol attributes (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the big hit symbol combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11(A), a description will be given of a big win symbol combination and a big win production pattern selected when the game state at the time of winning the big win is the normal game state. First, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, the "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, ``Kotobuki jackpot A production'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot pattern, and ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. In the case of , "big hit B effect" is selected as the corresponding big win middle effect pattern. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the first special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``joy jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium performance pattern. In addition, when the ``16R specific jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``gold pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``longevity jackpot performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, when the ``4R specific jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, and the ``Kotobuki jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``joy jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium performance pattern.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11(B), a description will be given of the jackpot symbol combination selected when the game state when the jackpot is won is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, and the effect pattern during the jackpot. When the ``4R specific jackpot'' of the first special pattern is won, the ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, and the ``Kotobuki jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium performance pattern. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the first special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, and the ``joy jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot middle performance pattern. Also, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the gold symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "gold pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "super longevity jackpot production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium production pattern, and the "red pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. In the case that the player wins, "Kotobuki big win B effect" is selected as the corresponding big win effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, ``Kotobuki jackpot A production'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot pattern, and ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. In the case of the ``big win B effect'' is selected as the corresponding big win middle effect pattern. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``joy jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium performance pattern.

The super longevity jackpot performance is a jackpot performance pattern for definitely notifying that the player wins the maximum advantage jackpot (16R specific jackpot) with the highest degree of advantage for the player among a plurality of jackpot types.

Kotobuki jackpot A production and Kotobuki jackpot B production are confirmed to have been elected to the "specific jackpot" type that triggers the transition to the variable game state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (4 rounds) are reached. is an effect pattern during a big win in which the effect progresses while the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds" remains uncertain. Here, even if the Kotobuki jackpot A production reaches the predetermined number of rounds (fourth round), the promotion production (round promotion production) is not performed, and the specified number of rounds of the big hit game this time is "4 rounds". One thing is certain. On the other hand, in Kotobuki big hit B production, when the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached, a promotion production (round promotion production) occurs, and the specified number of rounds for this big win game is "16 rounds". (The specified number of rounds has been upgraded to "16 rounds") is confirmed.

It is confirmed that the actual number of rounds of the happy jackpot A performance and the happy jackpot B performance is ``four rounds'', but until the jackpot ending demo is reached, the ``specific jackpot'' that triggers the shift to the probability variable gaming state is established. This is a performance pattern during the jackpot, in which the performance progresses while it is uncertain whether the game is won in the ``normal jackpot'' that triggers the transition to the time-saving game state. Here, even if the big hit A production reaches the big hit end demonstration, the promotion production (variable promotion production) is not performed, and the type of this big hit is "normal big hit" (time saving after the end of this big hit game). to shift to the game state) is determined. On the other hand, when the big hit B effect reaches the jackpot end demonstration, a promotion effect (probability change promotion effect) occurs, and the current jackpot type is "specific jackpot" (probability change game state after the end of this big hit game ) is confirmed. In addition, in FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the effect pattern during the jackpot is changed according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Correspondence may be established. Also, a 16R specific big hit may be provided for the first special symbol, and in that case, even when the first special symbol is a big hit, a super longevity big hit performance or a Kotobuki big hit B performance may be executed. In addition, the detailed contents of the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each jackpot middle effect pattern will be described. 12 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the effect pattern during the big hit. In the figure, the corresponding relationship between the type of individual performance that occurs during the big win game and the generation timing is defined for each performance pattern during the big win. In addition, in order to facilitate the understanding of the explanation, the opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is added. However, in this embodiment, as the opening mode of the big winning hole 54, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning hole 54 is set to an opening time in which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. Only the set "long opening" is prepared, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 is a specified count number (full count). A "short opening" set to an opening time that is impossible or difficult to enter may be prepared.

First, during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration, a screen suggesting the type of the jackpot mid-jackpot production (super longevity jackpot production, longevity jackpot production, happy jackpot production) is displayed, and any jackpot production is started for the player. It is suggested that In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is set to "5 seconds" in common for all jackpots.

During execution of each round game, a round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the effect during the big win (super longevity big win effect, Kotobuki big win effect, happy big win effect). That is, when the production pattern during the big hit is the super longevity jackpot production, the super longevity jackpot round screen, when the Kotobuki jackpot A production A or Kotobuki jackpot B production, the Kotobuki jackpot round screen, the big hit A production or the big hit B. In the case of production, a joyful big hit round screen is displayed. However, when a round promotion effect described later occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of the effect during the jackpot is promoted, and the round effect screen of the low-rank type is switched to the round effect screen of the high-rank type. It has become.

After the end of each round game, there is an interval which is a pause time (closing time of the big winning opening 54) from when the end of each round game is set until when the setting of the next round game or jackpot end demonstration is started. A period is set. Therefore, the special game is "jack start demo" → "round game" → "interval period" → "round game" → "interval period" → ... → "round game" → "interval period" → "jack end demo" It is deployed in such a way. In this embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" in common for all jackpots. The details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the jackpot end demonstration, the content of the performance mode (game state) to be shifted to after the end of the jackpot game currently being executed is suggested, and the player is suggested which performance mode to enter or continue. be done. In addition, during this jackpot ending demonstration period, there is a case where a probability variation promotion effect or a holding consecutive suggesting effect, which will be described later, is performed. It should be noted that, in the holding continuation suggestion production performed during this jackpot end demonstration period, the holding continuation suggestion production (over winning production or bonus winning production) that is performed with the occurrence of over winning or bonus winning in the modified example described later Combined performance) is not included. That is, the holding consecutive suggestion effect according to the modified example described later is not the effect performed during the jackpot ending demonstration period, but the effect performed during the interval period. The details of the variable probability promotion effect and the pending consecutive suggestion effect of the present embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpots. As described above, the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo are either the jackpot game at the time of the first hit (that is, the jackpot from the low-probability low base state) or the jackpot game during the series (that is, the high-probability Each demo time may be configured to be different depending on whether it is a high base state or a jackpot from a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of a jackpot game during a series of games, compared to the case of a jackpot game at the time of the first hit, the processing of the game before and after the jackpot proceeds more quickly. to progress), each demo time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as described above, when performing an effect to call attention to forgetting to take a prepaid card in the jackpot game at the time of the first win, it is preferable to perform it within the jackpot end demonstration period set for a relatively long time. There is, when performing an effect to call attention to forgetting to take a prepaid card in a jackpot game during a series of games, it can be performed during the round game execution period, not during the jackpot end demonstration period set for a relatively short time. preferred. In addition, with respect to the holding consecutive suggestion effect, in the jackpot game at the time of the first hit (that is, the jackpot from the low-probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute or to lower the execution probability even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold. Yes, in a jackpot game during a series of games (that is, a jackpot from a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state), it is preferable not to execute or to increase the execution probability even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold. . Furthermore, the holding consecutive suggestion performance is preferably carried out during execution of the special game corresponding to the 16R specific big win, and is carried out when the big win holding in the holding is the big win holding corresponding to the 16R specific big win. (That is, the jackpot where the holding consecutive suggesting effect is displayed and the jackpot pending in the hold that triggers the execution of the holding consecutive suggesting effect are only for the 16R specific jackpot, and the 4R specific / normal jackpot is the target It is preferable to avoid this).

Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen (round effect screen) during the round game. Although not shown, in the central area of the screen, various images (animation images, etc.) corresponding to the types of effect patterns during the big win are displayed in order to liven up the big win game.

A round display area 730 on the screen displays the number of rounds (the third round in the illustrated example) indicating how many times the round game currently being executed is. For example, when the round game currently being executed is the first round game (first round), "ROUND1" is displayed in the round display area, and the round game currently being executed is the second round game (second round game). If it is the second round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and thereafter, "ROUND3", "ROUND4", .

A right hitting display area 731 of the screen displays a right hitting image (also referred to as a shooting instruction effect) for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area PA2 (right hitting). In addition, in spite of the situation that should be hit to the right (during the jackpot), contrary to this, if the game ball flows down the left side area PA1 and enters the general winning openings 61 to 63, or the first start When the ball enters the mouth 51, that is, when the game ball is shot toward the left area PA1, an effect (caution notification effect) is executed to call attention so that the player does not hit left. can be In the caution notification effect, a message instructing to hit to the right is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP lights in a special light emission mode (for example, high brightness, high speed or momentary blinking), so that the game ball The player is informed that the ball should be shot toward the right area PA2 (right shot). Note that, as the warning effect, for example, the speaker 11 may output a voice saying "Please hit to the right" (a right-handed instruction voice). As for this caution notification effect, it is desirable that it be in a conspicuous position (for example, the central display area) and size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that the player can clearly see it. , the right-handed image, the display contents in the winning ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display contents in the accumulated number of winning balls display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be displayed. However, since the right-handed image is also information that should be clearly communicated to the player (information on the appropriate firing position), it is possible to display the right-handed image and the caution notification effect in different display areas so that they are not superimposed. Appropriate. On the other hand, in order not to hinder the visibility of the caution notification effect, the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732, the display contents in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733, the emphasized effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730, which will be described later, are displayed. It is desirable to configure such that the display priority is also high (that is, while superimposed display is possible, in that case the caution notification effect is displayed in front). This shooting instruction effect is displayed under the display condition that the ball enters the general winning holes 61 to 63 or the first starting hole 51 during the big hit, and the display time is set to 10 seconds. It is However, if the display condition is satisfied again before the display time of 10 seconds elapses, the display time is set to 10 seconds again (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-handed image and warning effect not only during the big win, but also in the high base state such as the high-probability high base state and the low-probability high base state. It is displayed continuously over the high base state, and if the warning effect is displayed when less than 10 seconds are left until the end of the jackpot (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot end demonstration), the state will change from the middle jackpot to the high base state. It is desirable to be configured so that it is continuously displayed over the entire period.

Predetermined prizes (over prizes and bonus prizes to be described later) are displayed in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen.
is generated, the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) given based on the prize is displayed in order to notify that the prize has occurred. This winning ball acquisition display area 732 displays the number of winning balls acquired by the over winning (the number of unit winning balls acquired when one game ball wins in the big winning opening 54) when the over winning occurs. The first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the number of prize balls acquired by the bonus winning when the bonus winning occurs (unit winning ball number acquired when one game ball wins in the general winning opening 64) and a second winning display area 732B to be displayed. For example, when over winning occurs, "+15pt" corresponding to the number of unit prize balls (15) of the big winning opening 54 is displayed, and when a bonus winning occurs, the unit prize of the general winning opening 64 is displayed. "+3pt" corresponding to the number of balls (three) is displayed. As a modification, the first winning display area 732A and the second winning display area 732B may be separated from each other.

In the cumulative number of winning balls display area 733 of the screen, the cumulative number of winning balls acquired up to the present time based on the game balls entering the big winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the jackpot game during the continuous game ( (referred to as "accumulated number of prize balls") is displayed. "Renso" is a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (when the first hit is It is a state in which big hits in a specific game state occur continuously after that as a starting point). In addition, "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is increased than the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the probability variation function of special symbols, the variation time of special symbols A state in which at least one of the shortening function and the power chew support function is activated (at least one of the high-probability high-base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability low-base state). In this embodiment, the game state (high base state) in which at least the electric chew support function is activated corresponds to the "specific game state". The cumulative number of prize balls also includes the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game balls into the special prize winning opening 54 or the general winning prize opening 64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. Note that the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the over-win, which will be described later, or may not include the number of prize balls given by the over-win. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls provided by the bonus prize described later, or may not include the number of prize balls provided by the bonus prize. . The over winning effect, which will be described later, is executed only during the big win (it can be executed because the big winning hole 54 can be opened and the ball can be entered), but the general winning hole 64 is executed during the big win. You can enter the ball with or without it. However, the bonus winning effect, which will be described later, is also configured to be executed only during the big hit. Regarding bonus prizes, if the jackpot is in effect, the bonus prize effect will be executed, but if the probability is low and the base state is low, a special effect that is different from the bonus prize (for example, the line "Don't enter here now!" A special effect with display and sound is executed, however, it may be generated when 3 balls are hit within a predetermined time (for example, within 5 seconds) instead of 1 ball. If it is in the base state or the low-probability high-base state, neither the bonus prize effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, nothing needs to be executed, but as another effect, a red flame is displayed around the frame of the effect display device 70). may be executed to the extent that is generated for a moment).

In addition to the accumulated number of prize balls, or instead of the number of accumulated prize balls, it is based on the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64 in one big hit game currently being executed. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired up to the present time (referred to as "the number of prize balls during the jackpot") may be displayed. Since the number of prize balls in the jackpot is the number of prize balls that the player actually obtained during execution of one jackpot game, basically, the number of obtainable prize balls set according to the type of jackpot ( It may be less than the theoretical expected number of prize balls), but it will not exceed the number of obtainable prize balls. However, when an over-winning, which will be described later, occurs, the number of prize balls in the jackpot may exceed the number of obtainable prize balls (theoretically expected number of prize balls) set according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, although not shown, during consecutive games, the number of consecutive big wins in a specific game state or the number of consecutive games including the first hit (the number of times with one added) is displayed. good too. For example, if the big win is made three times in the specific game state after the first win, a display such as "three consecutive games" or "four consecutive games" may be displayed during the big win. Also, in each round of the special game, a pseudo decorative pattern (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo decorative pattern") may be displayed in a variable display and a stop display (temporary stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo decoration pattern is a pattern mode (design dedicated to the big win) different from the normal decoration pattern that is variably displayed during the non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative patterns that are variably displayed during the non-special game consist of patterns (characters) and numbers, during the special game, the decorative patterns are only numbers and their sizes are reduced. Alternatively, if the decorative symbols variably displayed during the non-special game consist only of numbers, during the special game the decorative symbols having only the same numbers are reduced in size. Furthermore, when a double number such as ``7.7.7'' is aligned at the time of a big hit, it is sufficient to recognize which decorative pattern has resulted in a big hit, so ``7.7.7'' is displayed during the special game. Instead, only "7" (not a combination of three decorative symbols, but only one decorative symbol) should be displayed. In addition, during execution of the jackpot game (round game), a “winning-related effect”, which is a characteristic effect of the present embodiment, is executed.

[Award-winning production]
Next, the winning-related effect of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effect of this embodiment. Winning-related effects are effects that are executed based on a game ball entering a specific winning hole (big winning hole 54 or general winning hole 64) during execution of a big win game. The prize-winning effects include (A) a special prize-winning effect and (B) a general prize-winning effect.

<A. Grand prize winner performance>
The big winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 during execution of the special game. The big prize mouth winning effect includes a big prize mouth normal winning effect, a big prize mouth over winning effect, and a big prize mouth count-up effect. In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, (b) the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, and (c) the game ball Being detected by the big winning slot switch 541 and (d) receiving a big winning slot winning command from the main control board 100 are used synonymously.

«A-1. Grand Prize Opening Normal Prize-winning Performance≫
The big winning hole normal winning effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 54 when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 within the prescribed count number. In other words, the large winning opening normal winning effect is performed each time a game ball enters the large winning opening 54 until the number of game balls entering the large winning opening 54 in one round game reaches a prescribed count number. It becomes a performance. In this embodiment, although a specific example of the special prize opening normal prize effect is not particularly specified, at least one of a plurality of effect means such as the effect display device 70, the speaker 11, the effect lamp LP, and the movable accessory 24 is used. A normal prize-winning effect is performed at the big prize-winning mouth. As an example, (1) display an object corresponding to the prescribed count number in one unit game (for example, display a treasure box for the prescribed count number in one unit game), and play the game to the big winning opening 54 (2) A speaker for outputting a sound "charin" every time a game ball enters the big winning slot 54. 11, and (3) an effect with the effect lamp LP in which the lamp blinks twice every time the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, and the like. In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, only the large winning opening count-up effect described later is provided for the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 54 up to the specified count number without providing the large winning opening normal winning effect. may be configured to do so.

«A-2. Grand prize mouth over prize-winning performance≫
The large winning opening over winning effect (also called "over winning effect") targets the winning of game balls that exceed the specified count number to the big winning opening 54 (over winning), and the game ball goes to the big winning opening 54. This is a production that suggests or notifies that a prize has been won. "Over winning" means that a game ball exceeding a prescribed count number (in this embodiment, the 11th game ball or later) is detected by the big winning opening switch 541 during the execution of one round game. say. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the effective detection period of the big winning opening switch 541 is the detection grace period after each round game is completed (in this embodiment, it is the same period as the interval period, but the interval period is detected). The grace period may be a different period, and for example, it is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration, and is closed from the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54. If the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) which is the period during which is maintained or the interval period which is the end demonstration waiting time is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is between each round game or the final round It is a period set between the game and the jackpot end demonstration, and it is possible to detect the entry of game balls (such as the entry of game balls exceeding the prescribed count number) after the start of the closing operation of the big prize opening 54. The detection grace period, which is the period for detecting, may be set to 1 second after the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54 while at least partially overlapping with the interval period, or may be set to 3 seconds. may be) has passed, and over-winning can occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of over-winning, when the tenth count game ball enters the big winning opening 54 and is detected by the big winning opening switch 541, the closing operation of the big winning opening 54 is started. If the subsequent game ball (game ball after the 11th count) is in the big winning hole 54 before the winning opening 54 is closed, this subsequent game ball (the game after the 11th count) Ball) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period), thereby causing over winning.

The types of over-winning effects include over-winning image display effects and over-winning sound output effects. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the over winning effect of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect mode of the over-winning effect is preferably different from the effect mode of the above-described large winning opening normal winning effect. In addition, as a modified example, as an effect related to over-winning, only over-winning images may be installed (over-winning sounds are not installed), or only over-winning sounds are installed (over-winning images are not installed).

The over-winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image suggesting that over-winning has occurred (referred to as an "over-winning image"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-winning image with characters "+15pt" is displayed as an over-winning image in the winning ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "15" is displayed based on the occurrence of over-winning. It is suggested that a prize ball was won. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that over-winning has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is a effect of outputting from the speaker 11 a sound (“over-winning sound”) suggesting that an over-winning has occurred. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, a sound effect (a character's voice) saying "You did it" is output from the speaker 11, suggesting that an over-win has occurred.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of over-winning effect patterns may be provided. In other words, multiple types of over-winning images or multiple types of over-winning sounds may be prepared, and one of the over-winning images and over-winning sounds may be selected by a drawing for production when an over-winning occurs. good. In this case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or the over-winning sound, it is possible to make a suggestion of a holding series, a variable probability, a suggestion of the number of rounds, or the like. As an example, there is only one type of over-winning image, "+15pt", while over-winning sounds include "good", "that's good", and "congratulations" in addition to "you did it". Above all, when an over-winning sound such as "congratulations" is generated, (1) the performance also serves as a suggestion of a holding series, and (2) it also serves as a role of suggesting that the jackpot currently being executed is a definite variable jackpot. (3) It may also play a role of suggesting that the currently executed jackpot is not the 4R jackpot but the 16R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are set, and in addition to over-winning, an on-hold continuation is generated according to the type of over-winning sound. A configuration may be employed that suggests the possibility that the player is in a winning position (that is, both the over-winning effect and the pending consecutive-suggesting effect are used). Here, "retained within the reserve" means that when the result of the judgment of whether the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding ball with pending operation is a big hit, it is related to this preceding ball with pending operation. A big hit is scheduled to occur in one or more succeeding operation pending balls that exist at a predetermined timing from when the special symbol success/failure determination is permitted until the end of the special game executed in the wake of the big win. It means that the operation retention ball (also referred to as “jackpot retention”) is included. In this modified example, an over-winning sound A (“You did it”) and an over-winning sound B (“Congratulations”) are prepared as multiple kinds of over-winning sounds. Then, if there is no jackpot hold when the over-winning occurs (if the suspension-in-residence is not established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "0%". ”. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot pending at the time of the occurrence of the over winning (if the suspension is established), the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "100%". ”. That is, the over-winning sound A is a sound of a normal mode suggesting that an over-winning has occurred and that the pending game has not been established. The over-winning sound B is a sound of a special mode suggesting that over-winning has occurred and that the pending game has been established. In addition, the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B may be set as appropriate. may be "80%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "20%". In addition, in the above modification, the case where the holding consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the over winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the holding consecutive suggesting effect may be applied to the over winning image display effect (for example, over winning If "+15pt" is displayed in black characters as an image display effect, it is unlikely that the pending internal relationship has been established or is unlikely to be established, but if it is displayed in gold characters, it means that the pending internal relationship It may be a specification that the Zhuang has been established or has a high possibility of being established). Also, in the above modification, the over-winning sound B as a holding consecutive suggestion has been described, but the over-winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of probability variation suggestion or round number suggestion. Depending on whether the jackpot being played is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A and B is set to "100%" in the case of a normal jackpot. , the selection rate of over-winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of over-winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of over-winning sound B is "100". %", or the selection rate of over winning sound A may be set to "80%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B to "20%", depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, in the case of the 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "0%". In the case of , the selection rate of over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of over winning sound A is "80%" and over winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted that preferentially digests the operation retention ball of the second special symbol over the operation retention ball of the first special symbol. Only the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol may be targeted as the target operation reservation ball. In addition, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). Alternatively, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be executed with the over winning occurring during the execution of the special game as a trigger. Also, on the premise that the preceding actuation hold ball will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), and if the subsequent actuation hold ball contains a specific hold that will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) as the earliest specific hold In addition, it is also possible to execute the holding consecutive suggesting effect with the over winning that occurs during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold (if there are multiple jackpot holds, the earliest jackpot hold) is a low-profit jackpot, the hold It may be configured so as not to execute the suggestion production. In other words, when the holding consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is certain that the holding consecutive game will be played with the high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, in addition to over winning, the possibility of winning a variable probability jackpot may be indicated by over winning effect. In other words, the over winning effect and the probability variation suggesting effect may be combined. The probability variation suggestion production is that the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (variability jackpot), that is, the production that suggests that the special game will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end is. In this modification, for example, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds A to C are set, and if the jackpot type won this time is the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "70%", and the over-winning sound The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of over winning sound C is "0%". In addition, when the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "over winning sound A"<"over winning sound B"<"over winning sound C", the probability variation expectation (expectation for transition to probability variation gaming state) increases by one step. In addition, as a further modified example, the over-winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support provided after the end of the special game instead of the probability change expectation.

<<A-3. Large winning mouth count-up performance≫
In the big winning hole count-up effect, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 during execution of a special game in a series of games, the value of the accumulated prize ball number displayed in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733 is increased. , the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole is added and displayed. In the present embodiment, one game ball enters the big winning hole 54, so that "15" prize balls are paid out (the number of unit prize balls in the big winning hole 54 is 15). When the ball enters the big winning hole 54, the value of the accumulated number of awarded balls displayed in the accumulated number of awarded balls display area 733 is updated in units of "15". In addition, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative winning ball number counter for counting the cumulative number of winning balls. Each time a big winning hole winning command is received), the count value of the cumulative winning ball counter is incremented by "15", which is the unit winning ball number of the big winning hole 54, and accordingly, the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 is displayed. A big winning opening count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the displayed cumulative number of winning balls. This big winning hole count-up effect is executed regardless of whether the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 is within the specified count number or exceeds the specified count number. is.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a series of large winning opening count-up effects. As shown in FIG. 20, the big winning hole count-up effect is, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54, the number of accumulated prize balls displayed in the accumulated number of prize balls display area 733 is changed to this. This is an effect in which the number of prize balls provided based on the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up manner by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by counting up one by one in the order of "7000"→"7001"→...→"7014"→"7015". It should be noted that FIG. 20 shows the flow of the large winning opening count-up effect when over winning occurs. At E), a big winning mouth count-up effect is performed. FIG. 20 shows the large winning opening count-up effect when the over winning effect is performed, but not only when the over winning is performed, but also for the ball entering the game ball within the specified count number, the large winning opening count up effect is done. In addition, while the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the entry of the game ball within the specified count number (particularly, the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count which is the specified count number) is being performed. Yes, if over-winning occurs when the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, the count-up for the big prize opening count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed will be completed. After that (after 15 balls are counted), it is desirable to start the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over winning. Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the big winning opening count-up effect itself corresponding to the over-winning will be started in the next round (after the interval period has elapsed). next round), but during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period), the big winning mouth count-up effect corresponding to the over winning will be performed. Even if a ball enters the big winning hole 54 during execution, the ball entering timing is during the big winning hole count-up performance corresponding to the over winning, and the count-up for 15 balls is still completed. If not, after the count-up of the big winning mouth count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed is completed (after the count-up for 15 balls has been performed), the big prize in the next round It is desirable to configure such that the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 54 is started.

As a modification of the present embodiment, when an over-win occurs during execution of a special game, an over-win effect is executed, and the number of prize balls provided based on the over-win is changed to the accumulated number of prize balls. It may be configured not to display addition. In other words, the number of accumulated prize balls is added to the number of prize balls given based on the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 54 within the specified count number, and the specified count number to the big winning hole 54 is added. It may be configured so that the number of prize balls provided based on the excess number of game balls entered is not subject to addition display.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, during the execution of a special game performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the hit or miss determination of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a big hit), the specified count number is exceeded. It may be configured not to execute the over winning performance even if the over winning is generated. In addition, as types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games). It may be constructed so that the over winning performance is executed by the occurrence of the winning, and the over winning performance is not executed even if the over winning over the specified count number occurs during the execution of the low-profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) that allows game balls of a specified count (full count) to enter or is easy to enter. and a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. During execution of the open round game, an over winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs, and an over winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the short open round game. It may be configured not to execute the over winning effect. In addition, during execution of a special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is won, an over-winning effect exceeding a specified count occurs, and an over-winning effect is executed, and a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot) is performed. During the execution of the special game which is performed when the player wins , even if an over-win that exceeds the prescribed count number occurs, the over-win effect may not be executed.

<B. General winning entrance winning performance>
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect executed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 as a trigger. The general prize-winning performance includes a general prize-winning performance and a general prize-winning performance.

«B-1. General winning entrance normal winning performance≫
The general winning opening normal winning effect (also referred to as “bonus winning effect”) is an effect that suggests or notifies that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 64 . In addition, hereinafter, the fact that a game ball enters the general winning port 64 during execution of a special game is also referred to as "bonus winning". Winning at mouth 64 may also be referred to as "bonus winning".

The types of the bonus winning effect include a bonus winning image display effect and a bonus winning sound output effect. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the bonus winning effect of the present embodiment. In addition, as a modified example, as an effect related to the bonus prize, only the bonus prize winning image is installed (without the bonus winning sound), or only the bonus winning sound is installed (without the bonus winning image). It should be noted that this bonus prize effect is constructed to be executed even during the execution of the round game and while the big prize winning port 54 is closed (during the interval period) during the big win. If the big winning opening 54 is closed (during the interval period), it is configured to be able to be executed at the same time as the over winning effect.

The bonus winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as a "bonus winning image") suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a bonus winning image with characters "+3pt" is displayed as a bonus winning image in the winning ball winning display area 732 of the screen, and "3" is displayed based on the occurrence of the bonus winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that a bonus prize has been won.

The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“bonus winning sound”) from the speaker 11 suggesting that a bonus prize has been won. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the sound effect "picon" is output from the speaker 11, suggesting that a bonus prize has been won.

As a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for the bonus winning effect may be provided. That is, it is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of bonus prize winning images or a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds, and to select one of the bonus prize winning images and bonus prize winning sounds by means of an effect lottery when a bonus prize occurs. good. In this case, depending on the type of the bonus winning image or the bonus winning sound, it is also possible to make a suggestion of the holding series, a variable probability, a suggestion of the number of rounds, and the like. As an example, there is only one type of bonus prize image, "+3pt", while there are other bonus prize sounds such as "Gachan", "Chin", and "Boom" in addition to "Pikon". When the bonus winning sound "" is generated, (1) the effect also serves as a role of suggesting a pending series, (2) also serves as a role of suggesting that the jackpot currently being executed is a variable jackpot, (3) ) It may also play a role of suggesting that the currently executed jackpot is not the 4R jackpot but the 16R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of the bonus winning, an on-hold renso is generated according to the type of the bonus winning sound. A configuration may be adopted that suggests the possibility that the player is in the game (that is, both the bonus prize winning effect and the pending consecutive suggesting effect are used). In this modified example, a bonus prize winning sound A (sound effect "picon") and a bonus prize winning sound B (sound effect "boom") are prepared as a plurality of types of bonus prize winning sounds. Then, if there is no jackpot pending at the time of the bonus winning (if the suspension is not established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%". ”. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot pending at the time of the bonus winning (if the suspension is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%". ”. In other words, the bonus winning sound A is a sound in a normal mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that the reservation is not established. The bonus winning sound B is a sound of a special mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that a pending internal reunion has been established. Also, if there is a jackpot pending at the time of the bonus winning (if the suspension is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "20%". ” may be used. In the modified example, the case where the holding consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the bonus winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the holding consecutive suggesting effect may be applied to the bonus winning prize image display effect (for example, the bonus winning prize image If "+3pt" is displayed in black as a display effect, it is unlikely that the reservation has not been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold, it means that the reservation is established or is likely to be established). In addition, in the above modification, the bonus winning sound B as a holding consecutive suggestion has been described, but the bonus winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of a probability variable suggestion or a round number suggestion. Depending on whether the jackpot is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of bonus winning sounds A and B is set to "100%" in the case of a normal jackpot. , the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100 %", or the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A may be set to "80%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B to "20%", depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, in the case of the 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus prize winning sounds A and B is "100%" and the selection rate of the bonus prize winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the bonus prize winning sound B is "0%". , the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "0%", the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection of bonus winning sound B is The rate may be "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted that preferentially digests the operation retention ball of the second special symbol over the operation retention ball of the first special symbol. Only the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol may be targeted as the target operation reservation ball. In addition, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). Alternatively, the holding-continue-suggestion effect may be executed with the bonus winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. Also, on the premise that the preceding actuation hold ball will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), and if the subsequent actuation hold ball contains a specific hold that will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) as the earliest specific hold In addition, it is also possible to execute the holding consecutive suggesting effect with the bonus winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold (if there are multiple jackpot holds, the earliest jackpot hold) is a low-profit jackpot, the hold It may be configured so as not to execute the suggestion production. In other words, when the holding consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is certain that the holding consecutive game will be played with the high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, in addition to the fact that a bonus prize has been won, the possibility of winning a probability variable jackpot may be suggested by the bonus prize effect. In other words, the bonus winning effect and the probability variation suggesting effect may be combined. The probability variation suggestion production is that the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (variability jackpot), that is, the production that suggests that the special game will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end is. In this modification, for example, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set, and if the jackpot type won this time is the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "70%" and the bonus winning sound The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "0%". Also, if the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "bonus winning sound A"<"bonus winning sound B"<"bonus winning sound C", the probability variation expectation (expectation for transition to probability variation gaming state) increases by one step. In addition, as a further modified example, the bonus winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support to be given after the end of the special game instead of the probability change expectation.

≪General prize gate count-up production≫
In the general winning hole count-up effect, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during the execution of a special game in a series of games, the number of accumulated prize balls displayed in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733 is increased. This is an effect of adding and displaying the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general prize winning opening 64 . In the present embodiment, one game ball enters the general winning hole 64 so that "3" prize balls are paid out (the number of unit winning balls in the general winning hole 64 is 3). When the ball enters the general winning hole 64, the accumulated number of prize balls displayed in the accumulated number of prize balls display area 733 is updated in units of "three". In addition, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball number counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls as described above, and each time a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 (mainly Every time a general winning hole winning command is received from the control board 100), "3" corresponding to the unit winning ball number of the general winning hole 64 is added to the count value of the cumulative winning ball number counter, and the cumulative winning balls are accumulated accordingly. A general winning hole count-up effect is performed in which “3” is added to the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the number display area 733 .

Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a succession of general winning mouth count-up effects. As shown in FIG. 22, the general winning hole count-up effect is the current value of the cumulative winning ball number displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 when a game ball enters the general winning hole 54. In addition, the value of the number of unit prize balls given based on the entry of the game ball into the general prize winning port 64 is added and displayed by "1" in order in a count-up manner. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls is counted up one by one in the order of "8000"→"8001"→"8002"→"8003".

It should be noted that the general winning gate winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning gate count-up effect) is performed during the execution of the special game, during execution of the special game, the general winning gate 64 provided in the right area PA2 among the plurality of normal winning gates 61 to 64 It is performed for the entry of game balls to. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, even if a game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 provided in the left area PA1 among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the general winning opening winning effect is executed. can't break However, if the game ball enters any of the general winning openings 61 to 64 during execution of the special game, regardless of the type of the general winning openings 61 to 64 (regardless of whether or not the general winning opening winning effect is executed) ), prize balls (three pieces) are paid out based on the winning of game balls into the general prize winning openings 61-64.

In the present embodiment, each time a bonus win occurs, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball count) given by the bonus win is added to the cumulative number of prize balls. It is not limited, but the number of prize balls based on all the bonus prizes that occurred during the execution of one round game (number of unit prize balls x number of bonus prizes during one round game) At the end of the game, the number of accumulated prize balls may be collectively added to the number of prize balls. The number of bonus wins during the special game) may be collectively added to the accumulated number of prize balls and displayed at the end of the final round game or at the end of the special game.

Further, in this embodiment, a board configuration is adopted in which the general winning opening 64 is arranged upstream of the second starting opening 51, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A board configuration may be adopted in which the board surface is arranged downstream of the starting port 51 . In that case, the general winning opening 64 may be arranged upstream of the big winning opening 54 , or the general winning opening 64 may be arranged downstream of the big winning opening 54 .

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also be used as an activation opening (activation gate 53) that triggers execution of the normal symbol lottery. In other words, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second start opening 52 is performed, and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) is performed. of prize balls may be paid out.

In addition, as described above, in the general winning mouth winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning mouth count-up effect), the game ball enters the general winning mouth 64 when the game state currently being executed is the special game state as described above. Therefore, if the game state currently being executed is a non-special game state, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64, the general winning hole winning effect (bonus winning effect, general Winning mouth count-up effect) will not be performed. That is, even if the game state currently being executed is a game state (non-electric support state) in which the game is mainly variably displayed with the first special symbol, the game state currently being executed is variably displayed with the second special symbol. Even in the game state (electric sapo state) that is the main part of the game, the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 64 triggers the general winning hole winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning hole count-up effect). can't break In addition, if the game state currently being executed is a game state (electrical sapo state) in which the game is mainly based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the screen In the accumulated prize ball number display area 733, the accumulated number of prize balls acquired in the special game during the consecutive game (the accumulated number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game) is displayed. However, in this power support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls won in the special game during the continuous game is displayed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64, the number of prize balls will be the accumulated prize. The number of balls is not added and displayed (the general winning hole count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the accumulated number of prize balls does not change (the accumulated number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game is maintained).

Also, during the execution of the special game that is performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a big hit), even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 , may be configured so as not to execute the bonus prize effect. Also, as types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games). A bonus winning performance may be executed by entering a ball, and the bonus winning performance may not be executed even if a game ball enters a general winning hole 64 during execution of a low-profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) that allows game balls of a specified count (full count) to enter or is easy to enter. and a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. Even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port 64 during execution of the open round game, a bonus prize winning effect is executed, and a game ball enters the general prize winning port 64 during execution of the short open round game. It may be configured so as not to execute the bonus winning effect. Also, during the execution of a special game performed when a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is won, a game ball enters a general prize winning port 64 to execute a bonus prize winning performance, and a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is executed. Even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during the execution of the special game that is performed when winning , the bonus winning effect may not be executed.

<Other features of prize-winning performances>
Next, other features of the special winning mouth winning effect and the general winning mouth winning effect of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, since the big winning hole count-up effect and the general winning hole count-up effect are effects for the same display object (the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733), hereinafter, the big winning hole count will be described. The up effect and the general winning mouth count-up effect may be collectively referred to simply as "count-up effect".

≪Count-up production time≫
In this embodiment, the count-up time for one prize ball (time required for count-up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 second". In other words, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area 733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the big winning hole count-up effect is the number of prize balls given by one game ball entering the big winning hole 54 (unit The execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". becomes. Similarly, the general winning hole count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number), and the execution time of the general winning mouth count-up effect is "3 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds". . Below, for the sake of convenience, the execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one big winning mouth count-up effect) will be referred to as "count-up effect time A", and the general winning mouth count-up The performance execution time (a time value from the start to the end of one general winning opening count-up effect) is abbreviated as "count-up effect time B". Here, the big winning mouth normal winning effect, the over winning effect, and the bonus winning effect are configured not to be executed during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration and the execution of the jackpot end demonstration even during the execution of the special game. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect and the general winning mouth count-up effect are configured not to be executed during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration even during the execution of the special game. ing.

(Relationship 1 of count-up production time A)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than an interval time (also called an "interval period") set after each round game ends. The interval time is the waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration, and is the period during which the big winning port 54 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation. It is a game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or an end demo waiting time. In this embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds" in common for all round games. In this embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 just before the end of a certain round game. Even when the big winning mouth count-up performance is performed based on the entry of the ball, the big winning mouth count-up performance is completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the big winning mouth count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next round game or the jackpot end demo (if you win over, it is possible that the interval period will be exceeded) possible), a break between each round game or a break between the final round game and the jackpot end demo can be defined.

(Relationship 2 of count-up production time A)
The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. As described above, the count-up effect time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effects). ing. The execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final round game in the special game has passed until the special game ends. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final round game, the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54 is effectively detected (in other words, it is detected as a winning ball payout target, and it is determined as an illegal entry). is set as the remaining time (delay time) of the round game during which there is a possibility that a game ball will enter the big winning opening 54 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for a game (production mode) after the end of a special game separated from the round game, which has no possibility of being effectively detected. In this embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, so that the game ball Enters the big winning hole 54, even if the big winning hole count-up effect is performed, more specifically, even if over winning occurs in the final round game, the final round Even after the closing of the big winning opening 54 after the game (even during the big winning ending demonstration period), if the specifications are such that the big winning opening count-up effect is performed, the big winning opening is counted during the big winning ending demonstration period. Up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the period of the demonstration period after the end of the big win and until the variable display after the end of the special game, and the time between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation is not performed. Separation can be clarified. As a modification, for at least part of the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, entry of a game ball into the jackpot 54 may be effectively detected during that time.

(Relationship 3 of count-up production time A)
In the present embodiment, when a specified count number of game balls enter the big winning opening 54 in one round game, the total time (1 The big winning opening count-up effect for the number of prize balls obtainable in one round game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot ending demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A)×10 balls (specified count number)=4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effect), as described above. In this embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, so that the final time Even if a plurality of large winning opening count-up performances are continuously performed based on a plurality of game balls continuously entering the large winning opening 54 just before the end of the round game, the final round game is performed. Even after the closing of the big winning opening 54 after the round game (even during the big winning ending demonstration period), if the specification is such that the big winning opening count-up effect is performed, the big winning opening will be opened within the big winning ending demonstration period. The count-up effect is completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the period of the big win end demonstration period and until the variable display after the special game ends, and the special game ends and the variable display of the first rotation starts. Separation can be clarified.

In addition, even if the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 in one round game exceeding the specified count number (when over winning occurs), the cumulative count number in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A (regular count number+over winning number) is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. That is, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up effect time A for the number of over winnings is the time after the end of the round game. By setting the execution time to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, even after closing the jackpot 54 after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demonstration period), the big win port count-up effect is produced. In the case of the specification, even if over-winning occurs, the big winning mouth count-up effect is finished within the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, and the end of the special game and the start of the variable display are separated. should be clarified. The number of over-winning prizes is indeterminate because it depends on the progress of the game (game ball launch situation and game ball flow situation), but even if it is assumed that 10 balls, which is the same number as the prescribed count number, It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of the count-up production time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up production time A for the number of over winnings) The time taken is 9 seconds (4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds), which is shorter than 20 seconds, which is the execution time of the jackpot ending demo).

(Relationship 4 of count-up production time A)
As a modification of the present embodiment, when game balls of a prescribed count number enter the big winning opening 54 in one round game, the total count-up production time A for the prescribed count number in this one round game The time may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modification, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A)×10 balls (specified count number)=4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) in the above embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common for all round games. In this modification, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number is shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that a certain round game ends. Even when a plurality of game balls continuously enter the big winning prize 54 at the last moment, even when a plurality of big winning mouth count-up performances are continuously performed, within the interval time after the end of the round game. The big prize mouth count-up effect is completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the interval period until the next round game or the jackpot end demonstration, and the break between each round game or the final round game and the jackpot end demo is not performed. can clarify the delimitation between

It should be noted that, in one round game, even if only one game ball enters the big winning hole 54 exceeding the specified count number (when only one over winning occurs), this one round game It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A for the cumulative count number (prescribed count number + 1 over winning number) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. That is, the total time of the count-up production time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the count-up production time A for one over winning prize (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4 .95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so that even if over-winning occurs, the big winning mouth count-up effect is finished within the interval period. , It is preferable to clarify the division between round games.

(Relationship 5 of count-up production time A)
As a modification of the present embodiment, when game balls of a specified count number (full count) enter the big winning opening 54 in all round games of one special game, the full count number generated during execution of this special game The total time of the count-up performance time A in minutes (regular number of rounds×regular count number) may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. In this modification, when the specified number of rounds for one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), the game balls enter the big winning opening only the specified count number (10 balls) in all round games. In this case, a total of 160 big winning opening count-up effects are executed. Therefore, the total time of count-up effect time A for all counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified number of rounds) = 72 seconds". be. On the other hand, in this modified example, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "120 seconds" in common for all the jackpot types (during the jackpot effect). In this modification, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up production time A for the total number of counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration. , Even after the closing of the big winning hole 54 after the final round game (even during the big winning end demonstration period), if the specification is such that the big winning hole count-up effect is performed, the big winning hole 54 is opened. Even if the execution of the big winning mouth count-up performance is congested during the round game or during the interval period due to the continuous winning of the game balls, all the big winning mouth count-up performances must be completed at least by the end of the big winning end demonstration. is guaranteed, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the production during the big hit.

≪Priority of the big winning mouth count-up effect before and after≫
FIG. 23 is a time chart for explaining the priority of the big winning mouth count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 23, during execution of a certain round game, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) enter the big winning hole 54 in succession, two balls based on the continuous winning The big winning mouth count-up effect will be executed. Specifically, when the first game ball enters the big winning hole 54 and the condition for executing the big winning hole count-up effect is established, the previous big winning hole count-up effect is executed. Similarly, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole 54 and the condition for executing the big winning hole count-up effect is satisfied, the later big winning hole count-up effect is executed. The condition for executing the big winning mouth count-up effect is a condition for starting the execution of the big winning mouth count-up effect. Triggered by the fact that the game ball has been detected by the opening switch 541, it is established. At this time, when the conditions for executing the later big winning mouth count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect, the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted. After the execution of the previous large winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the subsequent large winning mouth count-up performance is started. That is, in the present embodiment, of the two large winning opening count-up effects, the priority of the previous big winning opening count-up effect is set higher than the priority of the later big winning opening count-up effect. Before the execution of the previous big prize mouth count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later big prize mouth count-up performance is not started, and the execution of the previous big prize mouth count-up performance is completed. After that, execution of the later big winning mouth count-up effect is started. In addition, when the execution of the later big winning mouth count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the previous big winning mouth count-up effect and the later big winning mouth count-up effect It is preferable to continuously (seamlessly) connect the performance with the big winning opening count-up twice. However, as a modified example, after a predetermined time (minute time) has passed after the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later big winning mouth count-up effect is started, and the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is started. A clear separation may be provided between the big winning mouth count-up effect and the subsequent big winning mouth count-up effect. Here, the special winning mouth count-up effect has been described, but the general winning mouth count-up effect may also have the same specifications, and during the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect, the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning mouth count-up effect If the situation is established, the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect will not be interrupted, and after the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the subsequent general winning mouth count-up will be performed. It is preferable to configure to start the execution of the production. Also, during the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect, if the conditions for executing the subsequent general winning mouth count-up effect are met, the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect will be interrupted. It is preferable that the execution of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect is started after the previous execution of the large winning opening count-up effect is completed without being terminated. Also, during the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect, if the conditions for executing the later big winning mouth count-up effect are satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect will be interrupted. It is preferable that the execution of the later big winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the preceding general winning opening count-up effect is completed without being terminated.

As a modification of the present embodiment, when the conditions for executing the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the previous large winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to interrupt and start execution of the next big winning mouth count-up effect. That is, the priority of the later big winning mouth count-up effect is set higher than the priority of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect. In that case, when the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted, the count value is forcibly changed to the final value of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect or the initial value of the subsequent big winning mouth count-up effect. It is preferable to switch to , and start the big winning mouth count-up effect after that point. In this modified example, the special winning mouth count-up effect has been described, but the general winning mouth count-up effect may be of the same specification. When the execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning opening count-up effect may be started. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning mouth count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect, the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted, and the next general winning effect is performed. It may be configured to start execution of mouth count-up effect. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent big winning mouth count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted, and the next big prize winning is performed. It may be configured to start execution of mouth count-up effect.

(Emphasis on the cumulative number of prize balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the emphasis effect of this embodiment. (A) in the figure shows the case where the over prize winning performance is executed during execution of the emphasized performance, and (B) in the figure shows the case where the bonus winning performance is executed during the execution of the emphasized performance. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64 during the execution of a special game, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls during consecutive games reaches a predetermined specific value. When it reaches, it is configured to execute an emphasizing effect to inform that the accumulated number of prize balls has reached a specific value. The specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000). That is, every time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30000, etc.) of the predetermined number of prize balls, the emphasis effect is performed. Therefore, the emphasizing effect may be referred to as a specific value reaching effect, and the emphasizing display may be referred to as a specific value corresponding display. In this embodiment, even when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value triggered by over winning or bonus winning, an emphasizing effect is executed. The effect or the bonus prize winning effect is executed in duplicate.

As shown in FIG. 24, the types of highlighting effects include a highlighting effect of enlarging and displaying a specific value ("20000pt" in the illustrated example) that the number of accumulated winning balls has reached in a highlighting area 735 in the center of the screen, and a speaker. From 11, there is an emphasizing sound output effect for outputting a special sound (in the illustrated example, a voice saying "great condition").

The highlighting of the specific value continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and during that time, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is updated (addition display ), the highlighted display is not updated (additionally displayed). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of "accumulated number of winning balls display"<"highlighted display"<"round display". "Layer" means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image that constitutes the entire image. Layers with higher display priority are placed on higher layers (front side from the player's perspective), and layers with lower display priority are placed on lower layers (back side from the player's view). be done. In FIG. 24, the highlighted display and the display of the accumulated number of prize balls are shown without being superimposed, but in order to further emphasize the highlighted display, the display area may be enlarged and superimposed. Accordingly, it may be configured such that the highlighting is displayed in front of the display of the number of accumulated prize balls (the highlighting is displayed covering part or all of the display of the number of accumulated prize balls).

Also, as shown in FIG. 24, the winning display area 732 and the highlighted display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas. , the emphasized image and the over winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed in parallel. When the enhanced image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed at the same time, even if the priority of displaying the emphasized image is higher than the over-winning image or the bonus winning image, the over-winning image is displayed over the emphasized image. Alternatively, the priority of displaying the bonus winning image may be increased. In FIG. 24, the highlighted display and the over-winning image/bonus winning image are shown without being superimposed. It may be configured such that, according to the priority, the highlighting is displayed in front of the over winning image/bonus winning image (the highlighting is displayed covering part or all of the over winning image/bonus winning image).

In addition, when over-winning occurs during the output of the special sound, the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound is redundantly output during the output of the special sound. In addition, when the special sound overlaps with the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound, the volume of the over-winning prize sound or the bonus winning sound may be made smaller than the volume of the special sound with the higher priority, and vice versa. Then, the volume of the special sound may be set to be smaller than the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus-winning sound having the higher priority. In that case, the volume of the lower priority (lower volume) may be substantially set to "0".

≪Over-winning performance/bonus winning performance when an error occurs≫
In this embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, it is configured to control whether or not to execute the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect according to the error type. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining error types of gaming machines. In this embodiment, the types of errors that occur in the game machine include "door/frame open error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", "excess winning error", and "payout error". ” etc. is set. Note that the error types described above are merely examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

When the glass frame 5, the front frame 2, or the back set board 30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1, the door/frame open error is detected by the door open switch that detects the opening of the glass frame 5 and the opening of the front frame 2. This error occurs when the frame open switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 or the back set open switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 is broken or broken. This door/frame open error is canceled when the game machine is checked for any abnormality and the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 and the back set board 30 are closed.

A magnetic sensor error and a radio wave sensor error are errors that occur when a magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when a radio wave sensor detects radio waves, or when disconnection, short circuit, or failure of a magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor occurs. Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors are canceled when the gaming machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

A disconnection short-circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when a disconnection, short circuit, or failure occurs in the radio wave sensor and various switches provided on the game board surface. The disconnection short circuit power supply error is canceled when the gaming machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The excessive winning error is an error that occurs when an excessive number of game balls enter various winning holes. The excessive winning error is canceled when the gaming machine is checked for any abnormality and the power is turned on again. Here, the excessive winning error includes an excessive winning error of the large winning opening 54 (also referred to as a "large winning opening excessive winning error") and an excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 64 ("general winning opening excessive winning error ”), etc. For example, the large winning opening excess winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 during execution of one round game. A general winning opening excessive winning error occurs when a predetermined number (eg, 30 balls) of game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 per unit time (eg, 30 seconds), or per unit time (eg, 30 seconds) This error occurs when a specific number of game balls (for example, 60 balls) enter the general winning hole 64 . Since the general winning opening 64 is arranged more easily for game balls to enter than the general winning openings 61 to 63, the general winning opening 64 has an error judgment value (error and The value of the number of game balls to be judged) is a numerical value with a margin. In this embodiment, when a large winning hole excess winning error occurs, or when a ball enters the big winning hole 54 while the big winning hole 54 is not open (during a non-special game), that is, When abnormal winning regarding the big winning opening 54 is detected (when determined as abnormal winning), the external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, when a general winning hole excessive winning error occurs, that is, when abnormal winning relating to the general winning holes 61 to 64 is detected (when determined as abnormal winning), an error is sent from the external information terminal board 600. It does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that it has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board 600 will be described later.

A payout error is an error that occurs when there is a problem with the payout of prize balls. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball tray 9 is full of game balls (the full tank switch is turned on), a ball jam/ball jam error in the prize ball payout unit 34, and a game ball replenishment from the game island. This includes errors such as ball missing errors that cannot be done and are insufficient. When a full-tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. Notification level 1 is a level in a state where the ON state continues for 30 seconds after the full tank switch is turned ON. At notification level 1, only the voice notification of "Please pull out the ball" is executed. At this notification level 1, even if a ball enters the special winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, the payout of prize balls is not restricted (the payout of prize balls is not stopped). When the ON state exceeds 30 seconds, it shifts to notification level 2, and not only the voice notification "Please pull out the ball" is displayed, but also the "image prompting to pull out the ball from the lower ball tray" is displayed on the effect display device 70. Further, even if a ball enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning holes 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is restricted (the prize ball payout is stopped). As a modification, the specification may be such that only image notification is performed at notification level 1, and both image notification and sound notification are performed at notification level 2. FIG. Regarding the ball jam/ball jam error of the prize ball payout unit 34, and the ball missing error in which the game balls cannot be supplied from the game island and are insufficient, even if there is a ball entering the big prize winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, The payout of prize balls is restricted (the payout of prize balls is stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, various errors are classified into "first error", "second error", and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. The first error is an error type whose priority (importance) is set to a medium level to prohibit or make it difficult to continue playing the game. The first error includes a "door/frame open error". The second error is an error type with a high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing the game. The second error includes "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", and "excess prize winning error". The third error is an error type with a low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game. The third error includes a "payout error".

Here, when the above-mentioned error occurs in the game machine, various error notifications such as image effects and sound effects are performed. Specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 Then, an error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at the error volume. As a modification of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to blink with error brightness.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine encounters the first error (door/frame open error), even if over-winning or bonus winning occurs, part of the over-winning effect or part of the bonus winning effect is performed. It is configured so that it cannot be broken. That is, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, execution of the over winning image display effect and the bonus winning image display effect out of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is allowed, but the over winning sound output effect and the bonus winning image display effect are permitted. Execution of the bonus winning sound output effect is restricted. Even if over winning or bonus winning occurs during the first error, part of the over winning effect and bonus winning effect is not performed, so that the game machine is in the first error state so as not to miss it. It has become. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect and general winning mouth count-up effect) is permitted. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed in order to notify that the first error has occurred, but it is not displayed on the entire screen. , is displayed using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over winning image and the bonus winning image. However, while the error notification sound for reporting the first error is being output, the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). When the gaming machine enters the first error state and an over-win or a bonus win occurs, prize balls are paid out based on this over-win or bonus win.

In addition, if the game machine encounters the second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short circuit power supply error, excessive winning error), even if over winning or bonus winning occurs, over winning effect or bonus winning effect are configured to prevent all of That is, when the second error occurs in the gaming machine, execution of both the over-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect as the over-winning effect is restricted, and the bonus-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect as the bonus winning effect. Execution of both bonus winning sound output effects is restricted. Even if over winning or the like occurs during the second error, the fact that the game machine is in the second error state is not overlooked because the over winning performance or the like is not performed at all. In this case, the execution of the count-up effects (large winning opening count-up effects and general winning opening count-up effects) is also restricted. Specifically, when the second error occurs, an error image indicating the second error is displayed on the full screen in order to notify that the second error has occurred. Winning images and count-up effects are not displayed. Further, while the error notification sound for reporting the second error is being output, the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound are not output. When the game machine enters the second error state and an over-win or a bonus win occurs, prize balls are paid out based on this over-win or bonus win.

In addition, even if the game machine becomes the third error (payout error) and the prize balls cannot be paid out, if an over-win or a bonus win occurs, the over-win effect or bonus It is configured such that a winning effect is executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no possibility that any particular trouble will occur even if the game is continued, and there is no risk that the player will suffer a disadvantage. This is because limiting the presentation may rather reduce the interest in the game. In this case, a count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect and general winning mouth count-up effect) is also executed. However, when the game machine enters the third error state and an over-win or a bonus win occurs, prize balls are not paid out based on this over-win or bonus win.

In the present embodiment, when an over-win or a bonus win occurs when the gaming machine is in a "specific error" as described above, part or all of the over-win effect is performed depending on the type of error that has occurred. In addition to being restricted, part or all of the bonus prize winning effect is configured to be restricted. In other words, when the first error among the specific errors occurs, the execution of one or a part of the over-winning effect (over-winning sound output effect) is restricted, and the second error occurs. When it occurs, execution of a plurality of or all element effects (over-winning sound output effect, over-winning image display effect, etc.) of the over-winning effect is restricted. This is because, in the present embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. It should be noted that a specific error may be an error type for which progress of the game is prohibited. Further, a specific error may be an error type that occurs when an abnormality that is suspected of fraudulent activity (goto) is detected. Further, a specific error may be an error type that can be resolved by turning off/on the power again.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than the over winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is output preferentially over the over winning sound (for example, the over winning sound A higher audio level is set for the error notification sound than for the error notification sound), and the error notification image may be displayed preferentially over the over winning image (for example, the error notification image is given priority over the over winning image can be set higher).

≪Over-winning performance at the end of the jackpot≫
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not an over winning effect is executed at the end of the big win. Each round game is set with a detection effective period (large winning opening effective period) during which detection of game balls by the large winning opening switch 541 is effective. This detection effective period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball entered just before the big winning opening 54 to close to reach the big winning opening switch 541 . In this embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from the opening to the closing of the big winning opening 54) and after the end of the round game (the closing of the big winning opening 54) A detection valid period of the big winning opening switch 541 is set over the entire period from the interval period until the predetermined time elapses. By setting this detection effective period from the round period to the interval period, even if the game ball is detected by the big winning hole switch 541 within the interval period after the round period ends, the big winning hole 54 Winning of game balls to is treated as valid (subject to payout of prize balls). That is, the "round game execution period (large winning opening open period)" and the above-described "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as continuous detection effective periods. Also, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In this embodiment, the period of the interval period is set as an over winning effect permission period in which the execution of the over winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the over winning effect arrives. On the other hand, the period outside the interval period is set as an over winning effect prohibition period in which the execution of the over winning effect is prohibited even if the execution timing of the over winning effect has arrived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, game balls exceeding the prescribed count number at the big winning opening switch 541 (11 in the illustrated example) When the second game ball) is detected and the execution timing of the over winning effect comes within this interval period, the execution of the over winning effect within this interval period is permitted. However, if the performance time of the over-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, all of the over-winning effect will be executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, based on the end of the interval period, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over winning effect at the end timing of the interval period. However, if an over-winning image and over-winning sound are provided as an over-winning effect, the over-winning image may be interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), and the over-winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, like the over-winning effect, the large-winning mouth count-up effect may be executed with the over-winning within the interval period as a trigger. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big winning mouth count-up effects by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly interrupt

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26(B), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, a game ball that exceeds the specified count number at the big winning opening switch 541 (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example Even when the ball) is detected, when the execution timing of the over winning performance comes within the big winning end demonstration period after the interval period has passed, the over winning performance is executed within this big winning ending demonstration period. is prohibited. However, during the jackpot ending demonstration period, execution of the over-winning effect is only prohibited, and prize balls are paid out based on this over-winning. Further, in the above case, the execution of the big winning mouth count-up effect may be prohibited in the same manner as the over winning effect.

As a modification of the present embodiment, the jackpot end demonstration period is set as an over winning effect permitted period during which the execution of the over winning effect is allowed, and the over winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot ending demonstration. may In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demonstration period as the over winning effect permitted period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demonstration period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the over winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the over winning effect prohibited period. In addition, as a further modification, an over winning effect permitted period and an over winning effect prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. Seconds may be set as the over winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 0.5 second may be set as the over winning effect prohibiting period, and the subsequent jackpot ending demonstration period may also be set as the over winning effect prohibiting period. In addition, as a further modified example, considering that the timing at which game balls exceeding the specified count number are detected by the big winning opening switch 541 and the execution timing of the over winning effect are synchronized, During the interval period after the end of the round game, when a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the big winning opening switch 541, it is configured to always execute the over winning effect (at the end of the interval period) ), when executing it, as described above, if the time from the start of the execution of the over winning effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the over winning effect effect time, the interval period Based on the end, the over-winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period (however, if the over-winning effect includes the over-winning image and the over-winning sound, the over-winning image is interrupted). (It may be hidden or erased from the middle), the over winning sound may be output without interruption), and when a game ball is detected in the big winning opening 54 during the jackpot end demonstration period ( When a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the big winning mouth switch 541), it may be configured so that the over winning effect is not executed. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count number is detected at the big winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, it is always executed (except for entering balls at the end of the interval period), At the time of execution, as described above, if the effect time of the large winning mouth count-up effect is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the big winning mouth count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period, at the end of the interval period Based on this, the big winning hole count-up effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period, and when a game ball is detected in the big winning hole 54 during the big winning end demonstration period (big winning hole When a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the switch 541), it may be configured not to be executed.

≪Extra prize-winning performance at the end of the jackpot≫
FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus prize effect is executed at the end of the big win. In the present embodiment, the period of the round period and the period of the interval period are set as the bonus winning effect permissible period in which the execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the bonus winning effect arrives. On the other hand, the period of the jackpot end demonstration period is set as a bonus winning effect prohibition period in which the execution of the bonus winning effect is prohibited even if the execution timing of the bonus winning effect comes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, within this interval period When the execution timing of the bonus winning effect arrives at , the execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted within this interval period. However, if the duration of the bonus winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the start of the bonus winning effect to the end of the interval period, the entire bonus winning effect will be executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, based on the end of the interval period, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus prize effect at the end timing of the interval period. However, if a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound are provided as a bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. good. Also, as with the bonus prize winning effect, the large winning mouth count-up effect may be executed with the bonus prize winning within the interval period as a trigger. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all the big winning mouth count-up effects by the end of the interval period, so based on the end of the interval period, the big winning mouth count-up effect will be performed at the end timing of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly interrupt

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(B), even if a gaming ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, this interval period When the execution timing of the bonus winning presentation arrives within the jackpot end demonstration period after the elapse, the execution of the bonus winning presentation is prohibited during the jackpot ending demonstration period. However, during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus winning effect is simply prohibited, and the payout of prize balls based on this bonus winning is performed. Further, in the above case, the execution of the big winning mouth count-up effect may be prohibited in the same manner as the bonus winning effect.

As a modification of the present embodiment, the jackpot end demonstration period is set as a bonus prize winning effect allowable period during which execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted, and the bonus winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration. may In this case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot ending demonstration period as the bonus winning presentation permissible period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demonstration period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the bonus winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the bonus winning effect prohibited period. As a further modification, the bonus winning effect permitted period and the bonus winning effect prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. Seconds may be set as the bonus winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 0.5 second may be set as the bonus winning effect prohibiting period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the bonus winning effect prohibiting period. In addition, as a further modification, considering that the timing at which the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 and the execution timing of the bonus winning effect are synchronized, after the final round game ends If a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period, the bonus winning effect is always executed (except for the ball entering at the end of the interval period). As described above, if the time from the start of execution of the bonus winning effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the effect time of the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning effect will be performed during the interval period based on the end of the interval period. (However, if a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound are provided as a bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image is interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus The winning sound may be output without interruption), and when a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demonstration period (the game is played with the right general winning opening switch 641 ball is detected), the bonus winning effect may be configured not to be executed, and in that case, the right general winning effect may be configured so that the general winning hole count-up effect is performed within the interval period after the end of the final round game. When a game ball is detected by the opening switch 641, it is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the final timing of the interval period). Also, if the time from the start of the general winning mouth count-up effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the time, based on the end of the interval period, the general winning mouth count-up effect will be forced at the end of the interval period. It is configured to be interrupted, and configured not to be executed when a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demonstration period (when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641). You may

On the other hand, during the period of the jackpot start demonstration period, theoretically, the game ball will not enter the big prize opening 54 (because no over-winning will occur), so during the jackpot start demonstration period, the big prize will not be won. No winning effect (over winning effect) is executed. Even during the period of the jackpot start demonstration period, it is possible to enter the ball into the general prize hole 64, but even if the ball enters the general prize hole 64, the general prize hole winning performance ( Bonus winning effect) will not be executed, and if the ball is entered during the jackpot start demonstration period, no matter what timing the ball is entered (especially, even if the ball is entered at the end of the jackpot start demonstration period), the entry The general prize-winning performance (bonus prize-winning performance) corresponding to the ball will not be performed in the first round game after the jackpot start demonstration, and furthermore, the prize balls (number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning balls will It is not an accumulation target in the display of the number of accumulated prize balls.

(Firing handle detection)
A game by the gaming machine PM is executed on the premise that the player rotates the shooting handle 12 to shoot the game ball toward the game area PA. The shooting handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 12 . This touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance due to the player touching the shooting handle 12 . When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the firing handle 12, it outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 300 to permit the energization of the firing solenoid. In addition, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits an effect control command (handle state effect command) to the effect control board 200 . Thereby, the effect control board 200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 12 (whether or not the firing handle 12 is being operated).

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. Even when the touch sensor does not detect that the player touches the shooting handle 12 (when the shooting of the game ball is stopped), the performance control means 220 wins the game ball shot before that. When a game ball (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) exceeding the prescribed count number is detected by entering the hole 54 (when an over-win occurs), an over-win effect is executed. It's like Similarly, even if it is not detected that the player is touching the shooting handle 12 (when the shooting of the game ball is stopped), the effect control means 220 determines that the game ball shot before that is a general winning prize. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 by entering the hole 64 (when a bonus winning occurs), a bonus winning effect is executed. That is, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the over winning timing and the bonus winning timing. Therefore, even if the shooting of the game ball by the player is stopped by closing the big winning hole 54 (end of the round game), over winning or bonus winning occurs within the interval period. Sometimes, an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect occurs, and there is a dissatisfaction that no winning effect is performed even though the game ball actually enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64. It is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust.

(Game start preparation production)
In the present embodiment, when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state (non-special game state), a standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect) is triggered by the continuation of the game interruption state for a predetermined time or longer. is executed. ``The game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer'' means, for example, that a period in which no special symbol operation reserve ball exists continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, or a period in which no special symbol fluctuation display is performed is a predetermined period of time. It means that a game ball does not enter or pass through a specific winning hole for a predetermined period of time or more, or that a game ball is not shot for a predetermined period of time or more. The end condition of this standby demonstration effect is when the game interruption state is canceled (when the game is started or resumed), for example, the player touches the firing handle 12 (operating the firing handle 12). ) is detected by the touch sensor, or when the ball enters the first starting hole 51 or the second starting hole 52, which is a specific winning hole, and the game ball passes through the operation gate 53. , and entering the general prize winning openings 61 to 64 are not applicable (Even if a game ball passes through the operation gate 53 or enters the general prize winning openings 61 to 64, the standby demonstration effect does not end). Also, during the standby demonstration effect, the volume is zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than in the state where the standby demo effect is not performed (the state during the game), A volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demonstration effect is not terminated even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in the situation where the game is interrupted, there is no need to perform more than necessary, so the sound is muted or the volume is reduced, but even in that state, the standby demonstration effect is maintained (when the game is interrupted). After the standby demonstration effect is completed (while the game is in progress, that is, while the symbols are changing), the sound volume related to the effect can be visualized and adjusted even during the standby demo effect.

FIG. 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. During the execution of the standby demonstration effect, the effect control means 220 is triggered by the detection of the contact of the player by the touch sensor (triggered by receiving the steering wheel state effect command from the main control board 100). Execution of the effect is ended, and execution of the game start preparation effect (fire detection effect) is started. The game start preparation effect is, for example, displaying the characters "Welcome" on the screen or outputting the voice "Welcome" from the speaker 11 to give a feeling that the game has started or resumed (a game welcome effect ). This game start preparation effect is an effect performed immediately after the standby demonstration effect is finished, and is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state) like the standby demonstration effect.

In the present embodiment, in a game state (non-special game state) in which a game start preparation effect can be performed, an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect is not executed, and a game in which an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect can be performed. In the state (special game state), no game start preparation effect is performed. That is, the game start preparation effect and the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect are not performed in the same game state, and of course they are not performed redundantly at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is restored)
In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs during execution of a special game, a power recovery notification effect for notifying that the power has recovered from the power failure is executed at the time of recovery from the power failure. In this power-off/return notification effect, for example, an image indicating that the power has been restored (power-return notification image) is displayed, and a sound indicating that the power has been restored is output from the speaker 11 (power-return notification sound). is. The image indicating that the power has been restored is referred to as a power restoration notification image, a power interruption restoration image, or a power interruption restoration screen. This is called interruption/recovery sound. In this embodiment, the execution time of the power return effect (the output time of the power return notification sound) is longer than the maximum time of one round game (long open round game) of 29 seconds. seconds”. For example, if a power failure occurs in the middle of a predetermined round game and the power is restored in the middle of the predetermined round game (when the predetermined round game is resumed in the middle), at least during the remaining time of the round game Since the power-off recovery sound is output, it is possible for the player to surely recognize that the round game has been restarted. Here, when the power-off recovery sound and the jackpot sound are competing, the power-off recovery sound is prioritized over the jackpot sound (for example, the power-off recovery sound is output at a higher level than the jackpot sound). or stop the output of the effect sound during the big hit). In addition, when the power-off recovery sound is output, even if over-winning occurs in the round game after restarting, the power-off recovery sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound (for example, the power-off recovery sound is given priority over the over-winning sound). Alternatively, the return sound may be output at a high sound level, or the output of the over-winning sound may be stopped. In addition, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is longer than the output time of the sound indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification sound) so that it can be recognized that the jackpot is in progress. It is desirable to have a short configuration. For example, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is set to 15 seconds, and the output time of the sound indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification sound) is 30 seconds. Seconds are preferred. In addition, when the image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image) is displayed, the effect during the jackpot will not be displayed, so the cumulative number of winning balls display, highlight display, over winning image and bonus winning image will not be displayed. It is never displayed. In addition, when the power is restored, the effect information related to the accumulated prize ball value held before the power is erased, so an image indicating that the power has been restored when the power is restored When the display of the notification image) ends and the effect during the big hit is displayed, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls will start again from zero (“0”), and the display condition for highlighting (reaching a specific value Since the condition until the power is turned off) will be reset, the situation where the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power is turned off reaches a specific value when the next ball enters the big prize hole 54 (for example, 10000 Even if it is 9999 in front), during the big hit after the power is turned off and the power is restored, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls is zero, so in this situation, the player goes to the big winning hole 54. Even if there is one incoming ball, it will not be highlighted. In addition, when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored at the time of power failure restoration (power restoration notification image) ends and the effect during the jackpot is displayed, the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) While is displayed, if a ball enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64, the prize ball corresponding to the entering ball will be paid out, but an image indicating that the power has been restored ( During the display of the power return notification image), the display of the over-winning image, the display of the bonus winning image, the display of the accumulated number of winning balls, the count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect, general winning mouth count-up effect) etc. are not performed, At that time, (1) even when the display of the image indicating that the power supply has been restored (power supply restoration notification image) is finished and the effect during the big hit is resumed, the display of the accumulated number of winning balls may start from zero. (2) When the display of the image indicating that the power supply has been restored (power supply restoration notification image) is completed and the effect during the jackpot is resumed, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls is changed to the image indicating that the power supply has been restored (power supply During the display of the return notification image), the cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed by adding the value of the prize balls paid out corresponding to the balls entering the special prize opening 54 or the general prize winning opening 64. In addition, the count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect, general winning mouth count-up effect) is being executed before the power is turned off, and the count-up effect has not ended yet, and the prize balls corresponding to the count-up effect is in progress and has not yet been completed (for example, in the middle of the count-up effect and payout of 300 prize balls). The rest of the count-up effect executed before the occurrence of interruption is not performed, but prize balls that have not yet been paid out are paid out. Note that the recovery from power loss (power recovery) described above is recovery from power loss without RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch), and recovery from power loss with RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch). In some cases, the normal game state (low-probability low-base state) is entered, and the decorative symbols are returned to a state in which the combination of "331" is stopped and displayed.

(Right shot notification image)
During execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17, a right-handed display area 731 on the screen prompts the player to hit right (to shoot a game ball aiming at the right area PA2). A hitting notification image is displayed. In addition, in the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen, an over winning image is displayed with the occurrence of over winning as a trigger. The right-handed display area 731 and the first winning display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Also, during the execution of the special game, a bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize winning display area 732B of the screen, triggered by the occurrence of the bonus winning. The hitting to right display area 731 and the second prize winning display area 732B are provided as different display areas, respectively, and the hitting to right notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Therefore, when over winning or bonus winning occurs during the execution of the special game, the over winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the right-handed notification image, and the information of one side does not hide the information of the other side. there is

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the volume adjustment screen of this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the player simultaneously operates the left and right keys of the cross key during execution of a special game, volume adjustment images showing multiple stages of volume levels are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen. be done. The volume adjustment image indicates the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the volume level is adjusted to the third level corresponding to the current volume level. By operating the left key or right key by the player, it is possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as BGM and sound effects output from the speaker 11 . Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is being displayed, operating the right key raises the volume level, and operating the left key lowers the volume level.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the special game is being executed, more specifically, the over-winning effect is being executed (the over-winning sound is being output) or the bonus winning effect is being executed (bonus The volume of the speaker 11 can be adjusted by the player operating the left and right keys regardless of whether the winning sound is being output. Therefore, the volume is adjusted by the player during execution of the over winning effect (over winning sound is being output) or during the bonus winning effect being executed (over winning sound is being output). In this case, the adjusted volume level changes in real time as the volume level of the over-winning sound or the bonus-winning sound currently being output. In other words, the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound is changed by the volume adjustment operation performed by the player, so that the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound does not differ before and after the volume adjustment operation. It becomes possible to Note that the audio image display area 736 and the first prize winning display area 732A are provided as different display areas, respectively, and the audio adjustment image and the over winning image are displayed separately in a non-overlapping positional relationship. Similarly, the audio image display area 736 and the second prize winning display area 732B are provided as different display areas, respectively, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a non-overlapping positional relationship. Therefore, when over winning or bonus winning occurs during execution of a special game, the over winning image or bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and one information does not hide the other information. . When the highlighted display and the volume adjustment screen are displayed at the same time, they are superimposed and displayed, but the display priority of the volume adjustment screen is higher, and when they are superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighted display. (some or all of the highlighting is hidden in the volume control screen).

≪Conditions for Excessive Winning Error in General Winning Gate≫
“Error occurrence condition” is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, and effect An error notification effect is performed by the control board 200 .

In the following, as one of the multiple types of error occurrence conditions, the excessive winning error occurrence conditions of the general winning openings 61 to 64 will be described. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the conditions for generating excess winning errors for the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating excessive winning errors for the general winning opening 64 are set to different conditions.

The condition for occurrence of excessive winning errors in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the number of game balls entering the general winning openings 61 to 63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning opening switch 611). is a condition that is satisfied when reaches the first specified number. The first specified number is set to, for example, "30". In other words, when 30 game balls enter the general winning openings 61-63 in 30 seconds, the condition for occurrence of an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61-63 is established.

The condition for occurrence of an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 is that the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) is the second specified number. This is a condition that is satisfied when The second prescribed number is set to, for example, "60". That is, when 60 game balls enter the general winning hole 64 in 30 seconds, the excessive winning error generation condition of the general winning hole 64 is established.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, the conditions for occurrence of excess winning errors for the general winning ports 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of game state currently being executed. For example, if the game state (normal game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, the general winning openings 61 to 63 have a relative frequency of entering balls per unit time than the general winning opening 64. Therefore, the threshold for establishing the excess winning error conditions for the general winning openings 61 to 63 is set to be higher than the excessive winning error generating condition for the general winning opening 64.例文帳に追加In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 under a predetermined condition (predetermined ball entry frequency), the excessive winning error condition is not established, but the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. If a prize is won under a predetermined condition (predetermined ball-entering frequency), an excessive winning error occurs. On the other hand, if the game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject, the general winning hole 64 is more likely to enter the ball frequency per unit time than the general winning holes 61 to 63 is set to be relatively high, the threshold for establishing the excess winning error condition for the general winning opening 64 is set to be higher than the excessive winning error generating condition for the general winning openings 61 to 63. ing. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 under specific conditions (specific ball entry frequency), the excessive winning error does not occur, but the game ball is specified to the general winning holes 61-64. If the ball is entered under the conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excessive winning error will occur.

In addition, even if the conditions for generating excessive winning errors in the general winning ports 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating excessive winning errors in the general winning ports 64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning errors in the general winning ports 61 to 63 are canceled. It is preferable to set the condition and the excessive winning error cancellation condition of the right general winning opening 64 to the same condition. The error release condition is, for example, the condition that the error notification effect ends (for example, 30 seconds after the error notification screen is displayed/the error notification sound starts), and the ON output of the outer end signal related to the excessive winning error is The condition for stopping (the condition for outputting off, for example, when 300 seconds have passed since the start of output), the power supply being turned off once and then the power being restored, and the like are applicable.

≪Duplicate execution of over-winning performance and bonus winning performance ≫
FIG. 31 is a time chart for explaining overlapping execution of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In the present embodiment, when the over winning and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed in duplicate. Duplicate execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over-winning effect overlaps with the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus winning effect, and the execution period of both effects overlap, and a case where part of the execution period of both effects overlaps. In the illustrated example, the execution period of the over winning effect and the execution period of the bonus winning effect partially overlap. It should be noted that when the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the first winning display area 732A where the over winning image is displayed.
Since the second prize winning display area 732B in which the bonus winning image is displayed is provided as a separate and independent display area, the over winning image and the bonus winning image are not superimposed on each other. there is On the other hand, the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound may be output in duplicate, or only one of them may be output. If only one is output, priority may be given to the earlier winning (that is, the earlier winning is the winning to the special winning opening 54, and the later winning is the winning to the general winning opening 64). priority is given to the over-winning sound, and if the previous winning is to the general winning gate 64 and the later winning is to the big winning gate 54, the bonus winning sound is given priority), Priority may be given to the winning (that is, if the previous winning is a winning to the special winning opening 54 and the subsequent winning is a winning to the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning sound is prioritized and the previous winning is is a winning to the general winning opening 64 and the subsequent winning is a winning to the big winning opening 54, priority is given to the over winning sound). If priority is given to the earlier winning, for example, if there is a later winning while the winning sound relating to the earlier winning is being output, the winning sound relating to the earlier winning is output and then the winning sound relating to the later winning is output. The output may be started, or the winning sound related to the subsequent winning may not be output at all. When priority is given to later winnings, for example, if there is a later winning while the winning sound related to the earlier winning is being output, the winning sound related to the earlier winning is interrupted at the time of the later winning, and then You may make it start outputting the prize-winning sound concerning prize-winning.

As a modification of the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winnings occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning image and the bonus winning image may not be displayed in duplicate. In other words, when over-winning and bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, even if the display period (or display timing) of the over-winning image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus-winning image do not overlap, good. In this case, there are cases where the display periods of both images do not entirely overlap, and cases where the display periods of both images do not partially overlap.

If the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed overlapped, the one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that wins earlier in terms of time (the one whose entry of the game ball is detected first) is displayed. may be configured to preferentially display the winning images. On the other hand, if the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in an overlapping manner, the one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that won later in time (the game ball won later) It may be configured such that the winning image of the detected player) is preferentially displayed.

(Multiple over winnings)
FIG. 32 is a time chart when over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. In this embodiment, when multiple over-wins occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), over-wins are produced for the first over-wins (winning of the 11th game ball). However, it is configured so that the over winning effect is not performed for the second and subsequent over winning (winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls). In other words, when multiple over-wins occur within a predetermined period, only the execution of the first over-win effect is allowed, and the execution of the over-win effect after the second time is restricted (regulated). ). However, the payout of prize balls due to over winning is performed twice, and the big winning opening count-up performance due to over winning is also performed twice (performed twice without interrupting the first big winning opening count up performance). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus prize effect is performed for each bonus prize, and a prize based on the bonus prize is generated. The balls are put out twice, and the general winning opening count-up performance by the bonus prize is also performed twice (performed twice without interrupting the first general winning opening count-up performance). In other words, when a plurality of bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period of time, execution of all the bonus prize effects is allowed. As a modification, when multiple over-wins occur within a predetermined period, an over-win effect is performed for the first over-win (winning of the 11th game ball), and the second and subsequent over-wins are performed. Over winning (winning of game balls after the 12th game ball)
On the other hand, if there is a second over-winning effect during the execution of the first over-winning effect, (1) after the first over-winning effect is completed (After completion), the execution of the second over-winning effect is started, or (2) even if the first over-winning effect is in progress, it is interrupted by the second over-winning effect, and then 2 It may be configured to start the execution of the over winning effect for the first time. In that case, regardless of (1) or (2), the prize ball payout due to the over winning is performed twice, and the big winning opening count-up effect due to the over winning is performed twice (the first big winning opening count It is preferable that the up effect is performed twice without interruption). Furthermore, if multiple bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period of time, the bonus prize effect will be performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize effect will be performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, if there is a second or later bonus prize during the execution of the first bonus prize effect, (3) after the first bonus prize effect is completed (completed), the second or (4) even if the first bonus prize-winning effect is in progress, it is interrupted by the second bonus-winning effect, and then the execution of the second bonus-winning effect is started. may be configured as follows. In that case, regardless of (3) or (4), the prize ball payout due to the bonus winning will be performed twice, and the general winning opening count-up effect due to the bonus winning will also be performed twice (the first general winning opening count It is preferable that the up effect is performed twice without interruption).

≪External information signal≫
In this embodiment, the external information signal (outer end signal) that the external information terminal board 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine includes, for example, a winning ball signal, a jackpot signal, a consecutive game signal, and a pattern determination signal. , door frame open signal, security signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball passing time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included.

Here, the external devices installed outside the game machine PM include data displays, hall computers, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display serves as useful judgment material for the player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of the gaming arcade, and determines the status of each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via the data display or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

(Ball signal)
The winning ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the gaming machine. That is, in this embodiment, every time 10 prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). In this embodiment, a prize ball number counter for counting the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided. Every time it is detected, "1" is added to the winning ball number counter. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the external information terminal board 600 outputs the prize ball signal. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (that is, counting starts from the initial value "0").

FIG. 33 is a time chart of winning ball signals when a game ball enters the general winning hole 64. FIG. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on one game ball entering the general winning hole 64 is "three". Therefore, when the entry of a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. be. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range from "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), The value of the prize ball number counter after addition never reaches a predetermined number, and no prize ball signal is output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range from "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), after addition When the value of the winning ball number counter reaches a predetermined number once, the winning ball signal is output once. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (when the general winning opening normal winning effect is executed once), the winning ball signal is output even once. There are cases where the prize ball signal is output once, and there are cases where the prize ball signal is output once. In the above description, of the plurality of general prize winning ports 61 to 64, the general prize winning port 64 has been taken as an example, but the same can be said for the general prize winning ports 61 to 63.

FIG. 34 is a time chart of a winning ball signal when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54. FIG. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) provided based on one game ball entering the big winning hole 54 is "15". Therefore, when the entry of game balls is detected by the big winning opening switch 541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. . At this time, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball counter after addition is predetermined. By reaching the number once, the prize ball signal is output once. On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (equivalent to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball counter after addition is a predetermined number. is reached twice, the prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entry of one game ball into the large winning opening 54 is the trigger (the large winning opening normal winning effect or the large winning opening over winning effect is executed once). There are a case where the ball signal is output once and a case where the winning ball signal is output twice.

<Relationship with other hit productions>
Next, the relationship between the winning-related effects (large winning opening winning effects, general winning opening winning effects) and other effects during the jackpot will be described. In the following, as other effects during the big hit, (C) holding consecutive suggestion effect, (D) promotion effect, and (E) special effect will be exemplified.

≪C. Suggestion production of holding group≫
The reservation consecutive suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the reservation is established during execution of the special game (there is a big hit reservation). As mentioned above, "suspended ball" is a special A big win is expected to occur in one or more succeeding operation-reserving balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the permission of judging the suitability of a symbol to the end of a special game executed with the big win as a trigger. It means that the operation retention ball (also referred to as “jackpot retention”) is included. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game state at the time of the occurrence of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the special game is finished is also the specific game. When the state (high base state) is reached, that is, when the continuous game is continuing, if there is a big hit pending in the pending, the pending continuous suggesting effect is executed in the special game currently being executed. Conversely, if the game state at the time of the occurrence of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the normal game state (low base state), even if there is a big hit pending in the pending, the current The holding consecutive suggestion performance is not executed in the special game being executed. In addition, it is preferable that the special game currently being executed is based on the success/failure determination result related to the second special symbol, and it is preferable that the jackpot suspension in the suspension is also the suspension related to the second special symbol. .

In this embodiment, the execution timing of the holding consecutive suggestion effect is set during the jackpot end demonstration period, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14 . Whether or not the holding consecutive suggestion performance can be executed is determined at the start of execution of the special game, and is determined by a lottery when the holding consecutive suggestion performance execution condition is satisfied at the start of the special game execution. As a modified example, in the event that a player wins an execution lottery triggered by the fact that the conditions for execution of a holding consecutive suggestion effect are satisfied immediately before or at the start of the jackpot ending demonstration, the holding consecutive suggesting effect may be executed. good.

The condition for execution of the holding series suggestion effect is that the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and one or more special symbols are activated within the ball. contains a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) with a jackpot pending. In other words, even if there is a big hit pending in the operation pending ball of the special pattern, if the big hit type related to the big win pending is not a high-profit big win (4R specific big win or 4R normal big win), the big win is held. Continuous suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are a plurality of jackpots held in the operation reserve ball of the special pattern, the jackpot type related to the previous jackpot reserve is a low-profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the later jackpot reserve is a high-profit jackpot. , the holding consecutive suggestion effect is not executed in the special game currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the holding continuous suggestive effect is executed during execution of the special game, a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is displayed within a predetermined number of times (four rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it definite that the game will occur, but it is also definite that the special game next to the special game in which the holding consecutive suggestion performance is executed is not a low-profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). In addition, in this embodiment, the "special figure 2 priority digestion method" that preferentially digests the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol over the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol is adopted. The target operation retention ball is limited to the operation retention ball of the second special symbol.

The holding consecutive suggestion effect is a effect that is executed during the jackpot end demonstration period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. Examples of special images include effect images composed of still images, effect images composed of moving images, and effect images composed of both still images and moving images.

In this embodiment, the holding consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). That is, the holding consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only in the longevity jackpot effect as the effect pattern during the big win. On the other hand, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance can be executed in any of the super long winning performance, the Kotobuki big winning A performance, the Kotobuki big winning B performance, the happy winning A performance and the happy winning B performance as the performance pattern during the big win.

In this embodiment, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during execution of the pending consecutive suggestion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the pending consecutive suggestion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the holding consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demonstration period, whereas the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demonstration period, but are executed during the interval period. It is from. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the holding continuation suggestion performance and the over winning performance are not executed redundantly, and the holding continuation suggestion performance and the bonus winning performance are not redundantly executed. The effect and the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect are executed independently. As a modified example, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be executed during the round game. The bonus winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the display priority of the holding consecutive suggestion effect is higher (the display of the over winning image or the bonus winning image is displayed in the back, or display), and if a special sound effect is generated during the production of suggesting a holding group, this special sound effect will be output with priority (reduce the volume of the over-winning sound and the bonus winning sound, or output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the holding consecutive suggestion effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Retained renso is a reward with a high degree of profit for the player compared to over winning and bonus winning, so the execution time of the retained renso effect is set relatively long to prevent the player from overlooking it. I try not to

In the present embodiment, the pending inner resou production is executed only as a "truthful rendition" that definitely notifies the establishment of the reserving inner resou production. You may include "fake production" that has not been established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions for the performance of the reserve inside Renso production, it is a condition that the preceding operation reserve ball is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) jackpot reserve, but it is limited to this. Instead, the preceding actuation pending ball may be a jackpot pending other than a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), ie, a jackpot hit corresponding to a low-profit jackpot (4R jackpot).

Further, by changing the display mode of the cumulative number of winning balls display from the normal display mode (for example, white display) to the special display mode (gold display), it may be suggested that the pending game is established. Further, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of the emphasized effect (highlighted display) performed when the value of the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that the reservation is established by the display mode of the emphasized effect.

≪D. promotion performance≫
Promotion performance means that when a big hit occurs in the variable display of special symbols, the profit mode related to the big win (for convenience, it will be referred to as a "provisional profit mode") before or at the start of the special game is suggested or notified. After that, during execution of the special game, there is an effect suggesting whether or not the actual profit mode related to the big win is higher in profit degree than the provisional profit mode. In other words, by suggesting whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (correct profit mode) or false (high profit mode), the jackpot is won through the series of processes. This is an effect to show whether or not the profit mode of the is promoted (changed).

The types of promotion effects are roughly divided into round promotion effects and variable promotion effects. The round promotion effect is in a state where the specified number of rounds (provisional specified number of rounds) of the special game suggested or notified when the big hit occurs is uncertain whether it is the true number of rounds or the number of false rounds, and after that provisional number of rounds is also an effect that suggests the possibility that the round game will continue. This round promotion effect includes one that simply suggests a round promotion, and one that suggests not only a round promotion but also the true prescribed number of rounds or the number of long open rounds. The variable promotion effect is an uncertain state whether the jackpot type (temporary jackpot type) suggested or notified when the jackpot occurs is a true jackpot type or a false jackpot type (uncertain state whether it is a specific jackpot) ), it is an effect that suggests the possibility of shifting to a variable probability game state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, when a promotion effect (a round promotion effect, a variable probability promotion effect) occurs during execution of a special game, it is certain that the promotion will succeed.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 16, the probability variation promotion effect is when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in the normal game state, or the second special symbol " When the 4R specific jackpot" is won, it is executed when the "joy jackpot B performance" is selected as the jackpot middle performance pattern. The execution timing of this variable probability promotion performance is set during the jackpot end demonstration period. In this variable promotion production, the movable accessory 24 is dropped and moved to overlap with the screen, and then the movable accessory 24 is moved upward again to display the title "Kotobuki big hit" on the exposed screen. By doing so, it is the content of the performance that makes it look as if it has been promoted from the ``joy jackpot performance'' to the ``Kotobuki jackpot performance'' (the jackpot type is promoted from the 4R normal jackpot to the 4R specific jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 14, the round promotion effect is, when the second special symbol "16 specific jackpot" is won in the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state, the "Kotobuki jackpot B effect" is performed as the jackpot medium effect pattern. ” is selected. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. This round promotion effect displays the characters "Final Round" (fake display) on the screen once to make it appear that the round game currently being executed is the final round game, and then this model By displaying a cut-in image of the message "It can't be that way!" (the jackpot type is promoted from the 4R specific jackpot to the 16R specific jackpot).

In this embodiment, the round promotion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is the "16R special game (high profit special game)", but the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are currently being executed. The special game of (16R special game (high profit special game)" or "4R special game (low profit special game)" can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed while the variable probability promotion effect is being executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the variable probability promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the probability variable promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the variable probability promotion performance and the over winning performance are not executed redundantly, and the variable probability promotion performance and the bonus winning performance are not redundantly executed, and the variable probability promotion performance and the over winning performance are not executed. The winning effect or the bonus winning effect is executed independently. As a modification, the variable probability promotion effect may be executed during the round game, in which case the variable probability promotion effect and the over winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and the variable probability promotion effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed. And may be executed repeatedly, and if configured in such a way, the display priority is higher for the probability variation promotion effect (display the display of the over-winning image or the bonus winning image on the back, or hide it) , Also, if a special sound effect occurs during the variable promotion production, this special sound effect is preferentially output (reduce the volume of the over-winning sound and bonus winning sound, or do not output) you can

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the round promotion effect, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be repeatedly executed. That is, since the round promotion effect is executed from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round, if over winning or bonus winning occurs within the interval period, the execution period of the round promotion effect ( Execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect can overlap. In addition, the display priority of the round promotion effect is higher (the display of the over winning image and the bonus winning image is displayed on the back or hidden), and a special sound effect is generated during the round promotion effect. In this case, the dedicated sound effect may be preferentially output (the volume of the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound may be reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the variable probability promotion effect is set to the start of the jackpot end demonstration. It is set to "20 seconds" from time to end time. On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are each set to "0.5 second". Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Also, the execution time of the variable probability promotion effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

«E. Special performance≫
The special effect is a highly rare effect that is executed when a predetermined consecutive villa condition is satisfied. The ``predetermined consecutive conditions'' means that the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment), and at least the specified number of times (20th time in this embodiment) is the highest jackpot type. This is a condition that is met when a profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) is achieved. This special effect appears during execution of a special game (16R special game) triggered by the occurrence of a specified number of times (20th) big win. However, this special effect ends with the final (16th round) round game, and does not include the subsequent end demo period (however, even if it includes the final interval period, the final interval period is may not be included). In addition, this special effect is composed of the effect content (special movie) that sequentially displays the highly rare premium characters of this model one by one.

In addition to the prescribed number of consecutive villas, the predetermined condition for the consecutive villas is, for example, that the accumulated number of 16R specific big wins in the continuous villa state reaches a prescribed number of times (the 16R specific big hit of the second special symbol Continuity), or that the total number of acquired rounds or the cumulative number of winning balls in the continuous state reach a predetermined number, etc. may be added as conditions. Here, as described above, "Renso (continuous state)" refers to the game state in the non-special game state, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state. It refers to a state in which a specific game state continues without returning to a non-specific game state (starting from the time of the first hit, and thereafter, a state in which big wins in the specific game state occur continuously). "Specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is increased compared to the normal game state, and in a broad sense, the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support A game state in which any one of the functions is in operation. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state means a game state in which at least the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game.

In this embodiment, the special effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game).

In the present embodiment, even if an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect occurs during execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. The reason for this is that when a special effect competes with an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect, it is better to give priority to the execution of a rare special effect (premium character display that can only be seen in the special effect). This is because the player will be satisfied with the result.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, if an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect occurs during execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may be performed in duplicate. When the special effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect are performed in duplicate, the priority of the display of the special effect (layer priority) is higher than the priority of the over-winning effect or bonus winning effect priority) is preferably set higher. However, while the special effect is a effect that is displayed in a large size on the entire screen, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are effects that are displayed in a small size toward the edge of the screen, so the priority of the display of the special effect The priority of the display of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect (
layer priority) may be set higher.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the special effect is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the jackpot start demonstration to the end of the final round game (16th round). On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are each set to "0.5 second". Therefore, the execution time of the special effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

In addition, if a power failure occurs during the execution of a special game (for example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power failure, etc.), if over winning or bonus winning occurs after the power failure is restored , the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is executed after the power is restored. This is because the decision to execute the over-winning effect or the bonus-winning effect is triggered by the over-winning or the bonus-winning, that is, by the event after the power is turned off and restored. On the other hand, the effect control command for power-off recovery transmitted from the main control board 100 after power-off recovery does not include data for recovery of the holding consecutive suggestion effect, promotion effect and special effect. Since the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200 is not backed up by the power supply, if the power is cut off during execution of the special game, even if the execution condition of each effect is satisfied or the execution opportunity arrives at the time of the power cut, the special game is executed. With regard to the pending continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect that determine whether or not to execute at the start of the game, after the power is restored, there will be no data regarding whether or not these effects can be executed. is not executed in Note that the recovery from power loss (power recovery) described above is recovery from power loss without RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch), and recovery from power loss with RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch). In some cases, the normal game state (low-probability low-base state) is entered, and the decorative symbols are returned to a state in which the combination of "331" is stopped and displayed.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 35 to 48. FIG. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

《Main processing on the main control side》
35 and 36 are flow charts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. FIG. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program starts and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero-cleared in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether or not information indicating normal power-off is stored (S6).

Here, if the power-off normal information is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described later. Sum becomes "0". In this manner, it is determined at power-on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before power-off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, etc., a request is made for an effect control command ("effect initial command") to the effect control board 200 (S11).

Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, the power-on normal information setting, the initial setting of various errors, and the communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was turned on correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the power-off occurrence information is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes are transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power failure is read, and the power failure recovery process relating to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request is made for an effect control command ("power-off return command") when the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are restored from power-off (S15). This power-off recovery command includes information on inspection of communication lines, operation status of special symbols, number of probability fluctuations, number of times of time saving, number of easy-to-enter states, variation pattern selection status, and error status. Command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request process, the information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power off is read, and the effect control command including the information on the number of operation pending balls is requested ( S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power was turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is opened) (S17). Further, a return setting is performed to return the special electric accessory 542 to the state before power-off (for example, the state in which the big winning opening 54 is open) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability variation flag is read, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol at the time of power failure is set (S19). In addition, the probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (flag indicating that the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 ("55H") is set (S22).

Next, in order to determine whether a power failure has occurred, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred (S23). If power failure has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the above-described interrupt prohibition processing (S21) is returned to, and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals. Repeat the process up to If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off processing described below.

Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), clear word 2 ("AAH") is first set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not power-on normal information (S27: No), power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resultant value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting for the RAM 103 is performed (S32), and the processing is looped until the power is turned off.

《Main control side timer interrupt processing》
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 at regular intervals (for example, 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the main control side main process described above.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operating conditions are set (S51).

Next, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by sequentially writing clear word 1 and clear word 2 to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout period. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before timeout. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, as various switches connected to the main control board 100, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read. That is, the first start switch 511, the second start switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning switch 541, the general winning switches 611 and 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor , radio wave sensor, etc., determine their states, and store the detected information.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number are updated. As for the normal symbol variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the result of the subtraction is less than 0, the result of the subtraction is set to a predetermined value (for example, 5
0000) is added.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0". Also, when the number of the counter reaches one cycle, the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0".

Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction processing, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the pachinko game machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are decremented by each interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) related to the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like. A specified variable time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and is subtracted as the time elapses. It should be noted that, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when one of the special symbols is fluctuatingly displayed, if a small winning game with the other special symbol is executed, during execution of the small winning game, one The timing of the variable display of special symbols is interrupted.

Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting opening 51 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting opening 51 is set as the determination result.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning opening switch 541, and the general winning opening switches 611, 641 in the input process (S53) Based on this, the game ball is inspected for passing through the switches. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , and requests transmission of an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch. The details of the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize based on the detection result of the above winning monitoring process. Received data from is monitored to check communication with the payout control board 400 .

Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation reservation ball information. , Updating the number of operation pending balls up to a maximum of 4, and storing random numbers related to normal symbol lottery.

Next, a normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, a series of processes relating to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 are performed, so that depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, normal symbol fluctuation process, normal symbol stop symbol display process , Normal electric accessories in operation processing, ordinary electric accessories operation end demonstration processing, etc. are executed. In addition, in the process during normal design fluctuation, the display pattern number data of the normal design is created (updated) in order to display the normal design in a variable display or a fixed display.

Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol is satisfied, the number of normal symbol operation reserved balls is digested by one, and the normal symbol is processed. Judgment of suitability, judgment of pattern, judgment of variation pattern, setting of variation time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, a start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 51 and the second starting opening 52 is monitored, and if there is a winning of the game ball, the number of reserved balls is updated, and the special symbol lottery is performed. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbols stored, etc. are performed in order.

Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420), a special symbol variation process (S430), which will be described in detail later. ), special symbol stop symbol display process (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", as the operation process related to the special electric role product 542, the operation start and operation end setting of the special electric role product 542, the large The opening time and number of openings of the winning opening 54 are updated, the probability variation function is set to start operation, the variation time reduction function is set to start operation, the variation pattern selection state is set, and the like are executed in order.

Next, a special winning opening effective period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the big winning opening 54 are set as a result of this determination.

Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is a first special symbol or a second special symbol operation reserved ball, the number of retained balls is digested by one, a command request for the number of symbols to be stored, and a judgment of whether the special symbol is appropriate or not. , determination of special symbols, determination of probability variation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric role product, setting of demonstration production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , determines whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command ("error effect specifying command") including the error information is generated in order to request an error display to the effect control board 200. - 特許庁

Next, an entering ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball passing time abnormality is set, and a production control command ("error Effect designation command"), and a security signal output request for output to an external terminal.

Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 operates continuously (regular number of rounds), the number of operation pending balls of normal symbols and special symbols, etc. is created. In addition, display data for displaying the error state information detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, LED output processing is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error display, etc. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. are displayed on the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the normal symbol display device 75, the special symbol suspension lamps 73 and 74, and the normal symbol suspension. It outputs to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., and also initializes the display on these various display devices.

Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this firing control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a firing permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to allow the shooting of game balls. do. On the other hand, when an abnormality in communication with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a signal for prohibiting shooting is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit shooting of game balls.

Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate each electric role product 542, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric role product control process (S66) acquired Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read out of the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect control command is read out. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200 .

Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output process, game information relating to the gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600 . The external information signals include, for example, prize ball signal, door frame open signal, magnetic sensor abnormality signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball passing time abnormality, etc.) signal, jackpot signal, consecutive game signal, There is a pattern confirmation signal and the like.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main-control-side timer interrupt processing is terminated, the main-control-side main processing is resumed, and the main-control-side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects power failure (supply voltage drop based on a predetermined threshold value) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power failure confirmation flag. do. Then, after returning to the original process, the aforementioned power-off process (S26 to S32) is executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, a first start opening switch input process is executed (S101). In the first starter switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starter switch 511 has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting hole switch 511 is input, the first starting hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, it generates a first starting entry winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step.

Subsequently, a second starting opening switch input process is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting hole switch 521 is input, the second starting hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, it generates a second starting entry winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step.

Next, an operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 has been input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate winning data is stored. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Subsequently, a special winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the big winning slot switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the big winning slot switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the big winning slot switch 541 is input, the big winning slot winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the big winning slot 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , a large winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the big winning opening switch 541, the processing proceeds directly to the next step.

Subsequently, a left general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input. When the detection signal from the left general winning slot switch 611 is input, the left general winning slot winning data indicating that the game ball has entered one of the general winning slots 61 to 63 is stored as the winning data of the main information storage means 180. While temporarily storing in the storage area, a left general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storing area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the left general winning port switch 611, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

Subsequently, a right general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the right general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input. When the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input, the right general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the right general winning port switch 641, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

≪Special symbol game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. is applicable.

(Starting gate monitoring control process)
First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls with the first special symbol activated is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the special symbol as the lottery random number relating to the first special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the winning order (S203). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter (S204), and the winning check of the first start port 51 is finished.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not winning of the game to the second starting port 52 has been detected (S205). When the winning to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). When the number of balls with the second special symbol activated is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the special symbol as the lottery random number relating to the second special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the winning order (S207). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is finished.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of activated balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether the number of activated balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added at S204 or S208 (S209). If there is an update of the number of pending balls in operation (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of pending balls in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and stored in the main information storage means. 180 is stored in the command storage area (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the advance determination timing (S211). If it is the pre-determining timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading determination information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of the start-up winning, a special symbol hit random from the hit random number buffer (holding n storage area or register) Numerical values are read out, and preliminary judgment is made (S212). Then, the pre-judgment command including the information of the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Also, a special per-symbol random number value is read from the per-symbol random number buffer, and symbol prior determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern pre-determination command including the information of this pre-determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), the later-described special symbol variation start monitoring process is performed for the special symbol side that satisfies the variation start condition among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. In addition, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, as described above, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed.

First, it is determined whether it is during a big hit or a small hit (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (in fluctuation standby)" It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls in operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special Considering that the symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, after setting the address of the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (the addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S304) , the second special symbol side special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310). That is, in the present embodiment, if there is an operation-reserving ball with the second special symbol, the operation-reserving ball with the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation-reserving ball with the first special symbol. ready to be digested. The details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). . Here, if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (hereinafter After setting the addresses of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area used in the process (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) on the side of the first special symbol.

When the fluctuation start conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not met (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309), the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in the above S304 or S308 is referred to, and the current variation start is determined. The target special symbol side processing will be executed, but since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, the first special symbol side It will be explained collectively without distinguishing whether it is a process or a process on the second special symbol side.

First, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation pending balls on the side of the special symbol that is the object of this fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Next, access the special symbol reserved storage area on the side of the special symbol that is the target of this fluctuation start, and the special symbol per random number stored in the first reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area), special symbol per The symbol random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are read in order, and these random values are used for special symbol validity determination processing (S320), symbol determination processing (S330), and variation pattern selection processing (S423), which will be described later. It is transferred to the special symbol suitability determination area, special symbol symbol determination area, special symbol variation pattern determination area, and special symbol variation addition pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, to update the reservation storage area, the reservation ball information stored in the reservation 2 storage area to the reservation 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reservation storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol suitability determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol suitability determination process (S320), first, a special symbol suitability lottery table is acquired. At this time, when the game state is a special pattern probability variable state, a high probability win-fail lottery table is acquired, and when the game state is a normal state, a low probability win-fail lottery table is acquired. Next, the random number per special symbol is read out from the special symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 . Then, with reference to the special symbol success/fail lottery table, the special symbol success/failure determination is executed based on the special symbol per random number value. Also, a value (big win data “55H”, small win data “33H”, loss data “00H”) corresponding to the win/loss determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 .

Subsequently, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the design determination process (S330), the stop design of the special design and the character effect number (fluctuation addition design information) are determined according to the result of the success/failure determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) of the special symbols determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180.例文帳に追加In addition, the character effect number is the type of the determined stop pattern (design group) and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special design and the normal design / It is determined based on the combination with 4 patterns of probability variation off of normal pattern). Incidentally, if the result of the hit/fail determination is no, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a loss (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

If the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is a big win (S342: YES), after the big win game is completed based on the type of symbol group (big win type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big win. The probability variation frequency is determined as the number of times the special symbol probability variation function operates (S345). Also, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times the special symbol variation time shortening function operates after the jackpot game is finished is the number of times of variation time shortening. is determined (S346). Furthermore, based on the type of pattern group (jackpot type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of electric support functions is determined as the number of times the electric chewing support function is activated after the jackpot game ends ( S347). The determination result (probability variation frequency, variation time reduction frequency, power support frequency) is stored in the time saving frequency storage area and the power support frequency storage area of the main information storage means 180 . Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the jackpot game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game or after the small win game is set (S349). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, the demonstration performance time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big win game or small win game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol validity determination area and the special symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the special symbol validity determination process (S320) and the symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status of the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (waiting)" to "01H (variation start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product 542 is not in operation, that is, whether or not the special electric role product game status is "00H (hit waiting state)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol Addresses of various tables and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in subsequent processes Addresses of various tables to be used and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above S403 or S404, special The process on the symbol side is executed, but since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, is it the process on the first special symbol side? , It will be explained collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the second special symbol side. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), a branch process (S411 to S414) is executed for shifting to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status of the special symbol side to be subject to this change is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol variation start processing (S420). The details of this special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (fluctuating)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol fluctuation processing (S430). The details of this special symbol fluctuation process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol display)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol stop symbol display process (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol variation start process)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the results of the lottery and the selection state of variation patterns (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value (S423).

Next, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, the fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, a communication inspection command, a variation additional pattern information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, and a design designation command are sequentially generated in order to start the design variation performance in the performance display device 70, and stored in the main information storage means. 180 command storage area.

Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (fluctuation start)" to "02H (fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol fluctuation)
Next, the processing during special symbol fluctuation (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

First, in order to perform variable display of special symbols, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), the display pattern number data of the special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbols in a variable or fixed manner.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the special symbol fluctuation time has ended (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a variation stop command is generated for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbols, and this command is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the fixed display time (S435). It should be noted that the "determined display time" is the time during which the stop symbol is definitely stopped and displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (fluctuation)" to "03H (stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display process)
Next, the processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying the stopped symbol)" to "00H (waiting)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data "55H" (S443). If the success/failure determination data is the jackpot data (S443: YES), stop the operation of the special symbol probability variation function (S444), stop the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function (S445), and operate the electric chew support function. stop (S446), and so on. Specifically, the variable probability flag is set to "00H (OFF)", and the probability variation counter, the variation time reduction counter, and the easy-to-ball state counter are set to "00H" and cleared to zero.

Next, as a special game start demonstration setting process, the start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (jackpot start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Also, the special electric role product game status is changed from "00H (hit waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the contents of the success/failure determination flag (S450).

On the other hand, when the success/failure determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451). If the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), skip S454 and proceed to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). When the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation (S455: YES), 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variation time reduction number counter is zero (step S457). When the variable time reduction frequency counter is zero (S457: YES), the operation of the special symbol variable time reduction function is stopped (S458), assuming that the number of times the special symbol time saving state has ended has been reached. If the post-subtraction fluctuation time reduction counter is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chewing support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chewing support function is in operation (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol of this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number counter is zero (step S461). If the electric support number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of ending times of the easy-ball-entering state has been reached. When the electric support number counter after the subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180, it is determined whether the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset end count, and the end count When it has reached, it switches to the variation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Then, to generate a production control command (game state designation command) containing the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in the above S451~S464, the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S465). Incidentally, on the side of the effect control board 200, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of this game state designation command.

(Special electric accessories control process)
Next, the special electric accessary product control process (S66) will be described. 47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric role product game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). If the special electric role product 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the operation of the special electric role product 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric role product 542 is the timing of starting the operation of the special electric role product 542 in each round game.

When it is time to start the operation of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this command is stored in the main information storage means 180. store in the area (S504). On the side of the effect control board 200, based on the information of this round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds), a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed. Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during the operation of the special electric role product 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 54 by a specified count number (maximum number of winning prizes) (S506), and the operation time of the special electric role product 542 It is determined whether or not the (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, when the game balls enter the big winning hole 54 by a prescribed count number (maximum winning number) (S506: YES) or when the operation time of the special electric accessory 542 has passed (S507: YES), a special The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by one (S510).

On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous operation of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demonstration display time is set as special game hit end demonstration setting processing. At the same time, an effect control command (jackpot end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the variation time reduction frequency information set in S346 is stored in the variation time reduction frequency counter (S512). In addition, the information on the number of times of power support set in S347 is stored in the power support number counter (S513).

Subsequently, referring to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the conditional device is an operation based on a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514).
If the condition device is operated by a specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation frequency (operating time data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation frequency counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is stored. start the operation of the probability variation function (S515). On the other hand, if the condition device is not activated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-activated data "00H" is stored in the probability variation number counter, and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable time reduction frequency information stored in the time reduction frequency counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (S516). When it is the variable time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the special symbol variable time shortening function is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the variable time reduction function actuation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is electric chew support function activation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the electric chewing support function activation data (S518: YES), the electric chewing support function is started to operate (S519-S521). That is, the operation start of the normal symbol probability variation function (S519), the operation start of the normal symbol variation time reduction function (S520), and the operation start of the normal electric accessory 522 open extension function (S521) are executed in this order. On the other hand, if it is not electric chewing support function activation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Next, it switches to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game set in S512 to S522 described above and the variation pattern selection state information is generated, and stored in the main information storage means 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of this game state designation command. Then, the special electric role product game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (S524).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. The processing on the production control board 200 side includes reset start processing (including production control side main processing) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after turning on the power, and production control side timer interrupt that is started at regular intervals. Processing, reception interrupt processing of the effect control command started due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the lamp started with the arrival of the predetermined generation time specified in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern It includes an effect interrupt process and an image control command transmission interrupt process that is activated at regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when multiple interrupt processes occur. In this example, "reset start processing by power reset: top priority", "reset start processing by various abnormalities: top priority" → "effect control command reception interrupt processing: level 7" → "WDT (runaway detection) The priority levels are ranked in the order of reset start process: level 3"→"image control command transmission interrupt process: level 2"→"effect control side timer interrupt process: level 1". It should be noted that the "reset start processing due to various abnormalities" is, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an illegal area or an illegal method, DMA (Direct Memory Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the multiple types of interrupt processing described above are exemplified, but actually there are other types of interrupt processing.

In the effect control side main process, basically, the process proceeds after setting to either a state of prohibition of all interrupts or prohibition of interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. On top of that, when the effect control side main process is in an interrupt permitted state, each interrupt process is started in such a manner as to interrupt the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) while the interrupt process is being executed, in principle, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, While the interrupt request is permitted during execution, the interrupt request is prohibited if the interrupt process has a lower priority level than the interrupt process being executed or has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process proceeds while other interrupts of the same or lower priority level are prohibited. Then, from each interrupt process to the effect control side main process, it returns in a state where all interrupts are permitted. In addition, the priority (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is prescribed|regulated by the register setting of the production|presentation control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<Reset start processing>
First, reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing reset start processing of the effect control board 200. FIG. This reset start process is started by any one of reset when power is turned on, reset caused by various abnormalities, and reset caused by WDT (runaway detection), and after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , the program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). All interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as basic hardware settings, an initial value is set in an internal register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Furthermore, the memory area in RAM203 of production control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by 0 clearing. Also, the sub-main CPU 201 develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203 as appropriate.

Subsequently, interruptions other than reception interruption processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, a process of setting the type of error that should be valid for the model among the various errors set in advance common to each model is performed (S606). Further, a light-off request is made in order to put all the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80) into the light-off state (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, an effect control side main process is executed as a main process of the game effect (S609). Details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that, when the transition to the effect control side main processing in the S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main processing to the reset start processing, but if by any chance returns to this processing due to the occurrence of a program bug or the like , it transitions to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation.

《Production control side main processing》
Next, the effect control side main processing (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, the address for starting to check whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 in the effect control side main processing (leading address where the program is developed)
(S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Then, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting). It is executed for the purpose of confirming the location information required for Incidentally, at the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart it (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written in the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, thereby starting the watchdog timer. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Subsequently, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input/output process S912 in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is monitored each time an interrupt occurs, and monitoring is performed multiple times (for example, four times). , if all input port states are "1", the signal level is "1 (H level)"; if all are "0", the signal level is "0 (L level)"; otherwise, the signal level is Do not change (this establishes the input signal).

Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Furthermore, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated in a cycle of 16ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error presentation is terminated.

Subsequently, effect button monitoring control processing is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button announcement effect is incorporated during the fluctuation fluctuation of the pattern, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within a predetermined operation valid time, and information on the input state of the effect button 15 is obtained. hold.

Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the content of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the variation process of the decorative symbols is selected in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Also, an image control command for designating this notice effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 . At this time, when the character object announcement effect pattern is selected as the announcement effect pattern, a character object request is generated, and the driving pattern of the movable object 24 is specified in the subsequent device management processing (S619). . In addition, in this example, all of the multiple types of notice effects (prediction effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop processing efficiency is improved. In order to do so, it is configured to draw lots across a plurality of main loop processes, divided for each occurrence time of the notice effect (for example, fluctuation start stage, ready-to-win occurrence stage, fluctuation stop stage). At that time, for the notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the decorative pattern fluctuation, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation (immediately transmit the image control command). It is supposed to be done.

Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) for various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, multiple types of pattern data (lamp pattern, driving pattern) stored in the ROM 203 ), the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, role announcement effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when the effect display device 70 draws at approximately 60 frames per second (=approximately 60 fps). Similarly, in the driving pattern data of the movable accessory 24, driving data associated with each interrupt period (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, and the target device starts operating. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamp LP is extinguished, or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , to end control of the target device.

Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is read, and the read effect control command is read. To execute the effect control processing corresponding to the type of. The details of this command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, during the current loop processing, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) has been executed (S621). If the command has just been analyzed (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, if command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, effect lottery random number update processing is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In this embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead notice lottery random number, a decoration pattern random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing (S622) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). If the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to effect state transition processing (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether or not a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a pattern storage number command and a pre-determination command. If this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to hold information management processing (S634). In this pending information management process (S634), the pattern storage number command or the preliminary determination command is read out from the sub-main information storage means 260, and prefetch determination is executed based on the information of the preliminary determination result. A process for updating the display number and the display mode (display color, etc.) of the pending images displayed on the display unit 710 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation performance content determination process (S636). In this variation performance content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation performance of the decorative symbols is executed, and the received symbol variation related command stops varying. If it is a command, a process for terminating the variable performance of decorative symbols is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the big hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the big-win effect-related commands include a big-win start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a big-win end demonstration effect command. When the big hit effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to a small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small-hit production related commands include a small-hit start demonstration production command and a small-hit end demonstration production command. When the small hit production related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit production content determination process (S640). In this small-hit performance content determination process (S640), processing for executing a small-hit start demonstration performance and a small-hit end demonstration performance is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to winning a prize is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the commands related to the winning opening include the first starting opening winning command, the second starting opening winning command, the operating gate winning command, the large winning opening winning command, the left general winning opening winning command, and the right general winning opening winning command. And so on. When this winning mouth winning related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning effect content determination process (S642). The details of this winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S643). If this error effect designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to error effect content determination processing (S644). In this error effect content determination process (S644), an error effect designation command is read out from the sub-information storage means 280, and the error state is notified by image display on the liquid crystal display device 70, lighting of the effect lamp LP, sound from the speaker 11, and the like. Determine the error rendering pattern for

In addition, when the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S63
9: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO) does nothing and terminates the command analysis process.

(Processing for determining contents of winning effect)
Next, the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning effect content determination process (S642).

First, a first start opening prize effect control process is executed (S701). In this first starting opening winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the first starting opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, a first start opening winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the first start opening 51 is executed on condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, a second start opening winning effect control process is executed (S702). In this second starting opening winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the second starting opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, a second start opening winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the second start opening 52 is executed on condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, an operation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this operating gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not an operating gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If the operating gate winning command is stored, Under the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, an operating gate winning performance for notifying that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is executed.

Subsequently, a big winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S704). In this big winning mouth winning effect control process (S704), it is determined whether or not a big winning mouth winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the big winning mouth winning command is stored. If so, on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, a big winning opening winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 54 is executed.

Subsequently, left general winning opening winning effect control processing is executed (S705). In this left general winning opening winning effect control processing (S705), it is determined whether or not a left general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the left general winning opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, a left general winning hole winning performance for informing that a game ball has entered one of the general winning holes 61 to 63 is executed. .

Subsequently, right general winning opening winning effect control processing is executed (S706). In this right general winning opening winning effect control process (S706), it is determined whether or not a right general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the right general winning opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, a right general prize winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the general winning port 64 is executed on condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

<<Interrupt processing for receiving production control commands>>
Next, reception interruption processing of the production control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing of the effect control command. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It's like The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will also be referred to as the "first command", and the EVENT data will also be referred to as the "second command".

First, when an interrupt occurs based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command has been determined (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in succession. This is because there is a possibility that the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, the timing of obtaining the effect lottery random number is set at the time of receiving the effect control command, because the effect control command is sent at physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Therefore, by using this as a trigger, it is possible to prevent periodicity from appearing in the acquisition timing. By making the acquisition timing of the effect lottery random numbers irregular in this way, inconveniences such as unnaturally repeated selection of the same effect are less likely to occur even in various kinds of effect lotteries.

On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) and the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is obtained (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the production control command reception interrupt processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the original processing before the interruption.

《Production control side timer interrupt processing》
Next, the effect control side timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-described effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as effect control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, port input/output processing is executed (S912). In this port input/output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I/O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. FIG. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched at each interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, a production timer update process is executed (S914). In this production timer update process, the values of various production timers used for production operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The production timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern, a timer for managing the timing of occurrence of the advance notice production, and the like. This performance timer manages the time schedule in the variable performance pattern, and time management such as the driving timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the performance lamp LP is performed on the time axis. Incidentally, the effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, button control timer update processing is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated for each interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). It should be noted that the valid operation time is the time during which the operation input of the production button 15 is valid.

Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a cycle period of 16ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S919) is executed. In this example, of the task counter values (“0” to “15”), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values separated by 8 ms from each other) are used for runaway monitoring. task, and another value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, realizing synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units, and outputs the data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300. - 特許庁As a result, the image control board 300 executes a predetermined reset process when the sub-sub CPU 301 is reset. Note that the toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level/L level are alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, error management timer processing is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after setting all interrupts to a permitted state and restoring the contents of the saved register, the effect control side timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the original processing before the occurrence of the interrupt is performed.

<<Transmission interrupt processing for image control commands>>
Next, the image control command transmission interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing. This image control command transmission interrupt process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

In this image control command transmission interrupt processing, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer, and if the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area indicated by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted at S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the image control command transmission interruption process is ended, and the original process before the interruption is resumed.

As described above, the main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 in excess of the specified count number during execution of a special game, an over winning effect is executed, and an over winning is achieved. By clearly notifying the player of what has happened, the player's sense of satisfaction and exhilaration in being able to enjoy a special profit that could not be obtained under normal circumstances can be heightened, and as a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced. It is possible to improve the performance.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 during execution of a special game, a big winning hole winning effect (over winning effect) is performed, and a game ball enters the general winning hole 64. By performing a general prize winning performance (bonus winning performance) with the entry of a ball as an opportunity, there is a tension between the big winning mouth winning performance and the general winning mouth winning performance performed during the execution of the special game. Thus, the monotony of the performance during the big win can be eliminated, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during execution of a special game, the general winning hole winning effect (bonus winning effect) is performed, so that the big winning hole 54 is opened. It is possible to prevent the player from being only interested in advancing the game aiming at it, so that the player can enjoy the fun of aiming at the general prize winning opening 64, and the player can actively play the game. It can be expected to increase the chances of hitting the ball into the general prize-winning hole 64, heighten the gambling spirit of the player, and make the game more interesting, resulting in the amusement of the game. can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect in relation to the jackpot end demonstration period and the interval period, the timing of performing the big winning mouth count-up effect and the large winning mouth count-up effect Regardless of the number of consecutive times of the winning mouth count-up effect, etc., the large winning mouth count-up effect can be completed appropriately without delaying more than necessary, so that the division between the round game before and after, and the special game and the like. It is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding the current game situation by clearly separating the change display after the end of the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes. In particular, by configuring the total execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect for the prescribed count number to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, a plurality of Even if the large winning opening count-up effect is continuously performed a plurality of times based on the game balls entering the big winning opening continuously, the big winning opening count-up effect will not be performed during the jackpot end demonstration period. will be completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the period of the big win end demonstration period and until the variable display after the special game ends, and the special game ends and the variable display of the first rotation starts. It is possible to clarify the separation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the conditions for executing the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect are met during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the previous large winning opening count-up effect is executed. By starting the execution of the big winning mouth count-up performance after the end, it is possible to prevent the processing of the count performance from becoming complicated, and the break between the next two big winning mouth count-up performances can be set. By making it clear, the count-up display of the accumulated number of prize balls does not become difficult for the player to see, and the player feels satisfied with the state that the number of accumulated prize balls increases one after another at a good tempo on the screen. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value due to the occurrence of an over-winning, and an emphatic effect is performed, or when an over-winning occurs in a situation where an emphatic effect is being performed. By executing this emphasized effect and the over-winning effect redundantly, there is an irregular timing in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific number, and an irregular timing in which an over-winning occurs. Since it is possible to clearly notify the player by the appearance of both effects that it is a rare special situation where It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over winning or a bonus winning occurs in a situation where a specific error with a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs. By limiting the execution of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect, the occurrence of a serious error in the game machine is not overlooked. On the other hand, if an over-win or a bonus win occurs in a situation where an unspecified error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, an over-win effect And even if the execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted, no particular harm will occur, and if the over winning effect is hindered by the error notification effect, the player's willingness to play may be reduced. I am planning to run In this way, by properly informing the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of the over-winning according to the type of the error that has occurred in the gaming machine, the player's desire to play the game is prevented without excessively inhibiting the occurrence of the over-winning effect. can be maintained, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the continuous game continues, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed not only during the execution of the special game but also in the electric power support state after the special game is finished. To improve the operation rate of a game machine by expecting a player to proceed with a game while expecting further extension of the cumulative number of winning balls in a game, further increasing the player's desire for the occurrence of a big win. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, when the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 arranged in the right side area PA2, the bonus winning effect is executed, while the left side area PA1 is executed. By configuring so that the bonus prize winning effect is not executed even if the game ball enters the general prize winning holes 61 to 63 arranged in the above, the bonus prize winning effect occurs recklessly, and the bonus prize winning effect is rather monotonous. To further enhance the joy of winning a prize in a general prize winning port 64 incidentally generated as a result of hitting a game ball aiming at winning a prize in the special prize winning port 54 while preventing the game ball from becoming a rut (getting into a rut). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when over winning and bonus winning occur substantially simultaneously during the execution of the special game, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are performed in duplicate, so that the player can enter the big winning port 54. Since the player can be clearly notified of both the over winning and the bonus winning that occur incidentally as a result of playing the game aiming at the entry of the game ball, the interest of the special game can be further enhanced. It is possible to prevent the performance during the big win from becoming monotonous, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while limiting the execution of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the interval period immediately after the final round game. By permitting , one of the winning effects (over winning effect or bonus winning effect) occurs in an interruptive manner in spite of the notification that the special game will end during the execution of the jackpot ending demonstration. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game performance from being lacking a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period of time during the special game, execution of the bonus prize effect is permitted a plurality of times, while a predetermined number of bonus prizes during the special game are allowed. If multiple over-wins occur within the period, only the over-wins effect corresponding to the first over-wins among the multiple over-wins is executed, so that the over-wins effect is unreasonable. It is possible to prevent the over-winning effect from becoming monotonous (rutted), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the winning ball signal can be output once when one game ball enters the general winning hole 64, but one game ball enters the big winning hole 54. By configuring so that the prize ball signal can be output twice, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed by the data display. The information can be notified to the player and used as information for judging the selection of the game machine or as reference information for the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls is notified by numerical information (for example, "1000pt"). It may be configured to notify by

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the count-up effects for the cumulative number of winning balls in the consecutive game (large winning opening count-up effects, general winning opening count-up effects) have been exemplified and explained, but the configuration is not limited to this. Instead, even if the above characteristic configuration is applied to the count-up effect (big prize mouth count-up effect, general prize mouth count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls (the number of prize balls during the jackpot) during execution of one big win game. Similar effects can be obtained.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly the different parts will be described. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment will be described in order. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment adopts a small hit RUSH in which a "small hit" frequently occurs as a result of the success/failure determination of the special symbol when the game state is the latent probability variable game state. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described later.

The propriety determination of the special symbol in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol success/failure lottery table of the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) where the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, and (B) is the gaming state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating ). In this special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol per random value and the result of success/failure determination (big win, small win, loss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 56, in the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, if the game state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not operating, the random number value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". If it corresponds to the above, it will be a big hit, and if the game state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating, the special symbol random number value will be a big hit if it falls within the range of "0 to 818". becomes. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbols is activated, the winning probability of the big win varies from the low probability "1/320" to the high probability "1/80". In this way, the winning probability of the big win varies depending on the game state, but the winning probability of the big win is designed to be equal between the determination of whether the first special symbol is right or wrong and the determination of whether the second special symbol is right or wrong. Here, even if the result of the hit/fail judgment does not correspond to the big hit, the hit/fail judgment of the second special symbol wins the small hit with a relatively high probability of "1/1.1". The winning probability of the small hit is designed to be the same winning probability regardless of the game state (low probability state, high probability state). In this second embodiment, a small hit is set only for the judgment of the second special symbol. It may also be configured so that the winning judgment of the second special symbol wins a small hit with a higher probability.

In the second embodiment, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit, and during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the big hit),
When the judgment of whether the other special symbol is successful is performed, it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the judgment of the other special symbol, and only a small hit or a loss is derived. When the result of the judgment of whether or not the other special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the result of the judgment of whether or not it is a big hit is forcibly replaced with a deviation from the big hit. In other words, in the above special symbol success/fail lottery table, when the game state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In the case, the result of the applicable or not determination is forced to lose (replaced from the big hit), and when the game state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating, the special symbol hit disorder When the numerical value falls within the range of "0 to 818", the result of the applicable/non-applicability determination is forcibly lost (the jackpot is replaced with the lost). As a modification thereof, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol success/failure lottery table, a table for big hit non-lottery that does not include a big hit determination value (random number range) as a result of the special symbol success/failure determination is prepared. During the variable display of the special symbol jackpot, the table dedicated to the non-jackpot lottery process is referred to instead of the above-mentioned special symbol win/fail lottery table, and a small win lottery is performed in which the result of the win/fail judgment is only a small win or a loss. method may be adopted. In addition, in this modified example, as long as it is a specification in which a small hit is not set as a result of the success/failure determination, a method of immediately determining a loss may be adopted without performing the success/failure determination.

Subsequently, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is "big win", the special symbol big win symbol table shown in FIG.

FIG. 57(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, a symbol group, a jackpot type, a specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and an opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in each round are provided for the symbol random number per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is distributed to a 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), a 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), a 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) have a prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game of 4 rounds, and a big win in one round game. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

FIG. 57(B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the pattern group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in each round are provided for the symbol random number per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) have four rounds as the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in one round game ) is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Of the various types of jackpots, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot is a trigger for execution of a long-open round game in which the jackpot 54 is opened for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers execution of a short opening round game in which the jackpot 54 is opened for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the long opening round game is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set so that a specified number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls can be entered into the big winning opening 54 or can be easily entered. It is a game. A short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the big winning hole 54 is set such that a prescribed number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls cannot be entered into the big winning hole 54 or difficult to enter.

In addition, although not shown, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, select one small winning pattern (symbol group) from a plurality of types of small winning patterns (symbol group), and select the second special pattern. At the end of the variable display of the 2 special symbols, the selected small winning symbols (symbol group) are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the opening and closing pattern (opening time, number of times of opening) of the big winning opening 54 in the small winning game may differ according to the type of the small winning symbol.

Next, the game state of the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of game states and effect modes in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, as the game state of a plurality of types, "normal game state", "time-saving game state", "probability game state", and "variable probability game state" are set. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", 2) The gaming state in which the probability variation function of special symbols and the variation time reduction function of special symbols are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "latent probability gaming state (latency probability variable gaming state)" or "latency probability variable state". (3) The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a “time saving state” or “time saving game state”, (4 ) The state in which all functions are not activated is called a "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable gaming state", the "latent certainty gaming state" and the "shortening gaming state" are all advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal gaming state". In addition, each game state is a combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) “High probability high base state” for variable probability game state, (2) “High probability low base state” for latent probability game state, (3) “Low probability high base state” for time saving game state, (4) Normal game state can also be expressed as a "low-probability low-base state". Here, with respect to the special symbol variation time shortening function, at least the variation time of the special symbol which is the subject of the game in the game state should be shortened, out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, it can be said that the special symbol variation time reduction function is operating because the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state (normal game state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game. , In the game state (time reduction game state, latent certainty game state, probability variation game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, the variation time of the second special symbol should be shortened.

FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state to be shifted to after the end of the big win game is set for each big win type (type of symbol group). In the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is (A) the big win type (type of symbol group) and (B) the game at the time of winning the big win. It is set according to the state. In addition, the number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols) is the number of probability fluctuations that the probability fluctuation function of special symbols operates (the number of times of probability fluctuations) and the fluctuation time that the fluctuation time reduction function of special symbols operates. It is set based on the number of times of shortening (number of times of time saving operation) and the number of times of electric support that the electric chewing support function operates (number of times of electric support operation). In addition, "ST" is a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the probability of a big hit is set to a high probability up to the specified number of variable display times. In other words, the probability variable state (probability variable gaming state) is maintained until the specified number of variable display times, but if the jackpot does not occur within the specified number of variable display times, the number of times division probability variable machine that shifts to the normal state (normal game state) It is called "ST machine". In this sense, the specified variable display count is hereinafter also referred to as "specified ST count" or "ST count".

In the case of winning "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" in the first special pattern, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed. A potential game state is set as the game state. When shifting to the hidden game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of electric support times "0 times" are set. This latent definite game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the latent sure game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When ``4R specific big win 2 (symbol group C)'' is won in the first special pattern, the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the big win game is finished regardless of the game state when the big win is won. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of electric support times "100 times" are set. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

When the ``4R normal jackpot (pattern group D)'' is won in the first special pattern, the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "70 times", and the number of electric support times "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified number of times (70 times). When the time-saving game state is terminated by the number of variable display times of special symbols reaching a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" is won in the second special pattern, the game state at the time of jackpot winning. Depending on, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different. Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state, the probability variable game. In the case of the state or the latent sure game state, the latent sure game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of electric support times "100 times" are set, and after the end of the big hit game, the latent certainty game In the case of shifting to the state, the number of probability fluctuations "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "0 times" are set. Therefore, the variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Similarly, the latent sure game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). The number of variable display times of special symbols is the specified number of ST times (100
times), when the latent sure game state ends, the normal game state is entered from the next special symbol fluctuation display.

When ``4R specific jackpot 2 (pattern group H)'' is won in the second special pattern, a probability variable game state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of electric support times "100 times" are set. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

When a ``2R normal jackpot (pattern group I)'' is won in the second special pattern, a time-saving game state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "70 times", and power supply frequency "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified number of times (70 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

As described above, the occurrence of a big hit can trigger the transition to the game state, but the occurrence of a small hit does not trigger the transition to the game state. That is, if the result of the success or failure determination of the special symbol is a small hit, the final fluctuation display that is the end condition of the game state (for example, the 100th rotation fluctuation display of the probability variation game state and the latent probability game state, time saving game The game state at the time of winning the small win is continued as it is, except for the 70th rotation change display of the state, and the transition control of the game state is not performed with the winning of the small win as a trigger. That is, if the game state before the occurrence of the small win is the normal game state, the game state during the small win game and after the small win game will also be the normal game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small win is the time-saving game state, The game state during and after the small winning game also becomes the time-saving game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small winning is the probability variable gaming state, the game state during the small winning game and after the small winning game also becomes the probability variable gaming state. , If the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is the hidden game state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the hidden game state.

Next, the effect mode of the second embodiment will be explained. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, as a plurality of production modes, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variable mode are set, and depending on the game state (or variation pattern selection state) etc. Then, one of a plurality of production modes is set alternatively, and a variable production corresponding to the set production mode is executed.

Basically, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal mode" is set, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving mode" is set, and the game state is the latent game state. When the "probability mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the "probability variation mode" is set. However, when moving to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal game state (time-saving game state, latent certain game state, probability variable game state), a predetermined number of fluctuation display immediately after the game state shifts to the normal game state , the special effect mode is set, and the normal effect mode is set when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is finished. The predetermined number of times is "four times" as the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. This means that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". In other words, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the predetermined number of times, it means that the total number of times of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbols has reached "4 times". In addition, as a modification thereof, only the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times), or only the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times). As a trigger, the special mode may be ended (or the normal mode may be entered). Then, when one of the production modes is set, as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in the production mode, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a decorative pattern is displayed on the back of the screen) A background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Subsequently, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbols of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a comparison table of special symbol variation times in the second embodiment. In addition, in the second embodiment, illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table is omitted, but in reality, as in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation time (variation pattern) Selection is made with reference to the variation pattern table.

In (A) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol is written when the game state is the normal game state. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a loss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a small hit or a loss, and is set to "30 to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit. ing. In other words, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a very long variation time (1000 seconds) compared to other variation times, except when the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit.

In (B) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol when the game state is the time-saving game state, the variable probability game state, or the latent certain game state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a loss, and is set to "30 to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" if the result of the success/failure determination is a loss, and is set to "0.5 seconds" if the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit. , and if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, it is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds".

Subsequently, the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows a normal symbol success or failure lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric accessary product release pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), the hit probability of normal symbols is set to "1/1.02" when the electric chew support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is not operating, and the electric chew support It is set to "1/1.01" when the function (probability variation function of normal symbols) is operating. Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, it is a specification that a hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the determination of whether the normal symbols are correct.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 second" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is not operating, and the electric chew support It is set to "0.2 seconds" when the function (normal symbol variation time reduction function) is in operation. In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set to be extremely short. It should be noted that the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 seconds" regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected. The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is, as shown in FIG. It is set to "Open → Closed for 2 seconds → Open for 1 second", and if the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating, it is set to "Open for 5.9 seconds". That is, as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, the total opening time is "3 seconds" because the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, and the total opening time is 5.9 seconds in the high base state. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Subsequently, simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol are performed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel (specs called so-called parallel machines). In other words, by independently digesting the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol and the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol, the winning lottery and the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively etc. in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed for a long time, the other special symbol is variably displayed in parallel with the variable display of the one special symbol. is carried out, during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol will not be delayed. In the following, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variation display of the big hit is called "big hit variation display", and the variation display of the small hit is called "small hit variation display". is referred to as "off-variation display".

(Variation interruption processing)
Here, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one of the special symbols is the big hit variation display, the small hit variation display or the losing variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display. , in a situation in which the variable display of one special symbol and the small hit variable display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the variable display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the small hit game ends ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). It should be noted that the suspension of variable display is used to mean temporary suspension of variable display (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small winning game of the other special symbol ends, the measurement of the variation time relating to the variation display of the one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the variation time before the restart and the measurement time of the variation time after the restart. When the summed time reaches a predetermined fluctuation time (fluctuation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends.

(fluctuation forced stop processing)
On the other hand, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit variation display and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display or a losing variation display, one In a situation where the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display or loss variation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, the small hit variation display or loss variation display of the other special symbol ends. Before, when the big hit fluctuation display of one special symbol is completed, the prescribed fluctuation time (fluctuation time according to the design value) in which the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the loss fluctuation display of the other special symbol is preset Even before reaching , at the end of the big win variation display of one special pattern, the small win variation display or the losing variation display of the other special pattern is forcibly terminated in conjunction with or synchronizing with it. In addition, when forcibly ending the small hit fluctuation display of the other special pattern, the pattern (confirmed display pattern) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit fluctuation display shall be replaced with a design that is out of the small hit pattern. . That is, the small-hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the loss fluctuation display (resulting in the cancellation of the small-hit game). Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special game (big hit game) in one special pattern and a special game (small hit game) in the other special pattern compete with each other. In addition, when the variation display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is other than the big hit variation display. Change display (that is, lose change display or small hit change display, and if the hit/fail random number corresponding to the big hit in the win/fail judgment process is forced to replace the hit/fail judgment result with a loss, and make a loss change display) is desirable. In addition, when the variation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to vary after that is not displayed. If it is a random number, the success/failure determination result may be forcibly replaced with a loss, and a loss fluctuation display may be performed).

≪Playability of small hit RUSH≫
Next, the playability of small hit RUSH (probability mode) will be described. In the small hit RUSH (latency mode), when the game ball is entered into the second start port 52, the small hit is frequently generated in the judgment of whether the second special symbol is successful, and until the big hit is won, the small hit is performed. It is a game property aiming at generating a winning game continuously and intensively.

When the game state is the latent game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.02) in the determination of whether the normal symbol is correct. In this hidden game state (low base state), when winning the winning judgment of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if the right-hand shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. In addition, in this hidden game state, the probability of winning a small win in the determination of whether the second special symbol is successful is set to be extremely high (approximately 1/1.1), and furthermore, the probability of winning a small win is set at a very high probability (about 1/1.1). Since the fluctuation time of the 2 special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will frequently occur based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 .

At this time, while the normal electric accessary 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit, the second special symbol is finished in a very short time, and the small winning game is immediately started. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs a two-second closing operation immediately after performing a one-second opening operation (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small winning game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is closed while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the closing operation for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small winning game, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is placed obliquely below the big winning prize. By flowing down toward the opening 54, the ball can be entered into the big winning opening 54. - 特許庁Therefore, when the game state is the latent probability variable game state, the game ball is entered into the second start port 52 and the second special pattern is displayed with high frequency, until the next big hit occurs. It becomes a game characteristic of executing a small winning game at high frequency. As a result, about 2 to 3 game balls enter the big winning hole 54 every time a small winning game is executed, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously obtained each time, thereby allowing the player to win. It is possible to proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, the winning probability of the small hit is extremely high in the judgment of whether the second special symbol is successful, and the fluctuation time of the small win is set to be extremely short. Small winning games tend to occur frequently. However, the game property of the small hit RUSH is limited only to the hidden game state, and for game states other than the hidden game state, the following measures are taken to suppress the increase in possession balls due to the small hit game. It is

Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.01) in the judgment of the success or failure of the normal symbol. be. In this game state (high base state), when winning the winning judgment of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-hand shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. . In addition, even in this time-saving game state or variable probability game state, the probability of winning a small hit in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1), and a small win is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that a small hit will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. expensive.

Here, while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit, the second special symbol The variable display ends in a very short time, and the small winning game is immediately started. At this time, while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second start port 52 is in the open state), when the small hit game is executed, it flows down the right area PA2. A game ball to be played is very likely to enter the open normal electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the big winning hole 54 is remarkably reduced. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed (after the second start port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operation gate 53 Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 opens is set to a very short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 second), this immediately opened normal electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522 . That is, during execution of the small winning game, the normal electric role 522 (second starting port 52) is in a state of being almost open, and the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is the normal electric role in the open state. It is very easy to hit the object 522 (the second start hole 52), and it is extremely difficult to hit the big prize hole 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the game state is the time-saving game state or probability variable game state (high base state), the game ball reaches the big winning opening 54 even if small hits occur frequently in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol. The possibility is remarkably low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of payouts through a small winning game.

Further, even when the game state is the normal game state, the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1) in the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is won, but the second special symbol is set to an extremely long period of time (10 minutes or more), even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting hole 52 and plays a game aiming for a small hit, the second special The efficiency of digestion of symbols is very low, and it is not possible to frequently generate small winning games. In addition, in the predetermined number of fluctuation display immediately after shifting to the normal game state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (second special The pattern fluctuation time is not extremely long). In other words, the variable display for a predetermined number of times immediately after shifting to the normal game state (variable display within 4 rotations) is faster than the variable display after the variable display for the predetermined number of times (variable display for the fifth and subsequent rotations). The variation time (average value of variation time) of the second special symbol is shortened, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH (probable probability mode), the accumulated number of prize balls is displayed in the accumulated number of prize balls display area 733 of the screen, and the player can be informed of the number of accumulated prize balls. is configured to During the execution of this small hit RUSH (latency mode), when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning effect is not performed, but the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed (general winning opening count Up effect) is configured to be performed. Also, during the execution of this small winning RUSH (latency mode), when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 in the small winning game performed by the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol becoming a small winning. , it is preferable that the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (large winning opening count-up effect). As a modified example, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during execution of the small hit RUSH (latency mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (general winning hole It may be configured so that the count-up effect) is also not performed.

Also in the second embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in the above-described first embodiment. can be improved.

As a modified example of the second embodiment, the second starting port 52 may be configured as a prize winning port that is always open. That is, in this modification, the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (always open starting ports), and no ordinary electric accessory is mounted. FIG. 63 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, a second start opening 52 is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and a big winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally to the left thereof. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and has a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 52 is a normally open prize-winning port that opens upward, and mainly allows game balls (right-handed game balls) flowing down the right side area PA2 to enter. That is, the second starting port 52 also serves as a general prize winning port 64 in which game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can always enter, and even in the special game state or in the non-special game state, It is configured so that it can always enter the ball. In this modification, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 (general winning hole 64) during the execution of a special game, a bonus winning effect and an addition display of the accumulated number of winning balls (general winning hole count Up production) is performed. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 (general winning hole 64) during the execution of the special game, only the addition display of the accumulated number of winning balls (general winning hole count-up effect) is performed, and a bonus is displayed. It may be configured so that the prize-winning effect is not performed. Also, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 (general winning hole 64) during the execution of the small winning RUSH (probable probability mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed. (General winning mouth count-up effect) may also be configured not to be performed.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly the different parts will be described. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment.

[Main control display device]
FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing the main control display device 27 of the third embodiment. The main control display device 27 is an LED display device whose lighting is controlled by the main control board 100 and is arranged at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 20 . As shown in FIG. 64, the main control display device 27 has a first special symbol table device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, and a normal symbol. Various display means such as a display device 75, a normal symbol reservation lamp 76, a round indicator light 77, a state indicator light 78, a right-handed indicator light 79, and an error indicator light Er are provided.

The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of eight LED segments G to N, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segment, and the blinking of the LED segment stops and is lit. By switching to , the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed. More specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol is a state in which only the LED segments M and N are blinking, and the other LED segments are extinguished. If the result is a loss, only the LED segments M and N are lit and the other LED segments are extinguished. The combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED segments G to N is different (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments G to N are lit, lit, lit, extinguished, extinguished, lit, lit, lit, and extinguished・Turn on, turn off, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on the order of the LED segments G to N.・Lights on, lights off, lights on, lights off, lights on, lights off). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of eight LED segments Q to X, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segment, and the blinking of the LED segment stops and is lit. By switching to , the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed. More specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol is a state in which only the LED segments W and X are blinking, and the other LED segments are extinguished. If the result is a loss, only the LED segments W and X are lit and the other LED segments are extinguished. The combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED segments LED segments Q to X is different (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments Q to X are lit, lit, extinguished, extinguished, lit, lit, lit, lit, and extinguished・Turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off, turn off, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, turn off, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off the lights in the order of LED segments Q to X.・Turn on, turn off, turn off, turn on, turn on, turn off). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The first special symbol holding lamp 73 is composed of two LED segments O and P, and displays the number of operation holding balls (maximum four) of the first special symbol by lighting/flashing/extinguishing display of the LED segments. Similarly, the second special symbol holding lamp 74 is composed of two LED segments Y and Z, and the number of operation holding balls (maximum 4) of the second special symbol is displayed by lighting, blinking, and extinguishing display of the LED segment. do. More specifically, one LED segment indicates 0 for off display, 1 for blinking display, and 2 for lighting display. represents a maximum of four (for example, if the LED segment O is lit display and the LED segment P is lit display, it indicates that the number of pending first special symbols is four, and the LED segment When O is a blinking display and the LED segment P is a non-lighting display, it indicates that the number of reserved first special symbols is one). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of one LED segment C, and performs variable display and fixed display of normal symbols. More specifically, the variable display of normal symbols is a state in which the LED segment C is blinking, and the fixed display of the normal symbols is a state in which the LED segment C is extinguished when the result of the success/failure determination is lost. , and when the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit, the LED segment C is lit. For this LED segment, LE
It may be called a D lamp or simply a lamp.

The normal design reservation lamp 76 is composed of two LED segments A and B, and displays the number of normal design operation reservation balls (up to 4) by lighting/blinking display of the LED segments. More specifically, one LED segment indicates 0 for off display, 1 for blinking display, and 2 for lighting display. (For example, if the LED segment A is lit display and the LED segment B is lit display, it indicates that the number of pending symbols is 4, and the LED segment A is When the blinking display and the LED segment B are in the off display, it indicates that the number of reserved symbols is one (normal). Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The round indicator lamp 77 is composed of a left indicator lamp 67a and a right indicator lamp 67b, and displays the number of times the round game is executed in the special game (regular number of rounds: number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously). The left indicator light 67a is composed of two LED segments, and the right indicator light 67b is composed of seven LED segments, and the number of specified rounds of the special game is displayed by a combination of lighting indications of the respective LED segments (for example, Of the seven LED segments of the right indicator lamp 67b, when only the central LED segment is turned off and the other LED segments are turned on, that is, the upper, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right, and lower LED segments are turned on. If 6 LED segments are lit, the display will be a combination of "0"). For example, when the number "10" is lit on the round indicator lamp 77 (that is, when the left indicator lamp 77a, which is the indicator lamp indicating the second digit of the round number, is lit and displayed in a combination indicating the numerical value "1", and the right indicator lamp 77b, which is an indicator lamp indicating the first digit of the number of rounds, lights up in a combination indicating a numerical value of "0"), the specified number of rounds of the special game is 10 times (10 rounds). It is shown that there is Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The status indicator light 78 is composed of two LED segments D and E, and displays the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function and the operating state of the normal symbol probability variation function by lighting display of the LED segments. . Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The right-handed instruction lamp 79 is composed of one LED segment F, and the lighting display of the LED segment indicates a game state in which a game ball should be shot toward the right side of the game area PA (a game state in which a game ball should be hit to the right). display whether or not there is More specifically, in the case of a game state in which a game ball should be shot aiming at the right side of the game area PA such as a high base state or a special game state (a game state in which a game ball should be hit to the right), the LED segment F lights up and displays. , Low base state (non-special game state), etc. In the case of a game state in which a game ball should be shot aiming at the left side of the game area PA (a game state in which a game ball should be hit left), the LED segment F is extinguished. This LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The error display lamp Er is composed of one LED segment Er, and the state of occurrence of an error in the gaming machine PM (whether or not an error has occurred) is notified by lighting display of the LED segment Er. More specifically, the LED segment Er lights up when an error occurs, and the LED segment Er goes out when no error occurs. However, when a specific error occurs, the LED segment Er may be extinguished (for example, the LED segment Er may be lit when the above-described first error or second error occurs, but the above-described If the third error or an error related to the setting function described later (error that occurs when the setting value is out of range or when the setting change state is terminated without confirming the setting change), the LED segment Er turns off, etc.). This LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

[Award-winning production]
Next, the winning-related effect of the third embodiment will be described. The winning-related effect is an effect executed based on the fact that a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64 during execution of the big win game. This winning-related effect includes a special winning opening winning effect and a general winning opening winning effect, as in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 18, etc.).

<Grand prize winner performance>
The big winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 during execution of the big winning game. As shown in FIG. 18, the big winning mouth winning effect includes a big winning mouth normal winning effect, a big winning mouth over winning effect, and a big winning count up effect. Since the details of the main prize winning effects (large winning gate normal winning effect, big winning over winning effect, and big winning count-up effect) have already been described in detail in the first embodiment, the basic explanation is as follows. omitted. In addition, below, as the execution condition of the large winning mouth over winning effect (over winning effect), game balls exceeding the specified count number during execution of one round game (in this embodiment, game balls after the 11th ) enters the big winning hole 54, and the excess game balls are effectively detected by the big winning hole switch 541 (that is, the occurrence of over winning) is the ``over winning effect execution condition''. Also called Also, as described above, the big winning count-up effect is an effect display in which the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format. The winning hole count-up effect is not limited to displaying the number of prize balls counted up one by one, but may be one in which the number of prize balls is counted up and displayed by a plurality of two or more (for example, one to the big winning hole 54). When the number of winning balls for each entering ball is 15, a count-up display of 15 balls may be performed at once such as 0 → 15, or 0 → 3 → 6 → 9. → 12 pieces → 15 pieces, etc. 15 pieces may be divided by a predetermined number (here, "5"), and a count-up display may be performed for each number), a random number (for example, to the big winning opening 54 If the number of prize balls for one ball is 15, the order is 0 → 23 → 45 → 11 → 64 → 32 → 15, the first 0 and the last 15. Other than that, the number is displayed only to show that the number is changing), and a count-up display may be performed (the same applies to the above-described first and second embodiments). Also, below, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, (b) the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, and (c) the game ball (d) the main control board 100 transmits a large winning opening winning command; (e) the effect control board 200 receives the large winning opening winning command; are used synonymously.

<General prize-winning performance>
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect executed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 as a trigger. As shown in FIG. 18, the general winning opening prize effect includes a general winning opening normal winning effect and a general winning count-up effect. Since the details of the general prize-winning effect (general prize-winning effect, general prize-winning count-up effect) have already been described in the first embodiment, a basic description thereof will be omitted. In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the general winning hole 64, (b) the game ball enters the general winning hole 64, and (c) the game ball Detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, (d) the main control board 100 transmits the right general winning opening winning command, and (e) the effect control board 200 receives the right general winning opening winning command. and are used synonymously.

<Characteristics of prize-winning performances>
Next, the features of the winning-related effects (large winning entrance winning effects, general winning opening winning effects) of the third embodiment will be described. The component elements of the winning-related effect of the third embodiment and the component elements of the winning-related effect of the above-described first embodiment may be combined as appropriate. It is also possible to omit, replace, or change some or all of

≪Emphasis on the number of accumulated prize balls≫
First, the highlighting effect (highlighting display) of the cumulative number of winning balls of the third embodiment will be described. As described above, the emphasizing effect is that the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a predetermined specific value by entering the game balls into the big prize winning port 54 or the general winning prize port 64 during execution of the big win game. It is a production that informs.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of an emphasizing effect. As shown in FIG. 65, the emphasized effect (highlighted display) is an emphasized display image ("2500 points achieved" in the illustrated example) indicating that the value of the accumulated number of prize balls has reached a specific value in the emphasized display area 735 in the center of the screen. ) is displayed. The highlighted display image "2500pts achieved" in the illustrated example is the characters "2500pts" which is a display corresponding to the specific value (2500) achieved by the cumulative number of prize balls, and the display indicating that this specific value has been reached. It is an image that combines the characters of "achievement". This highlighted display image can be displayed separately from the display of the accumulated number of awarded balls (accumulated number of awarded balls display image) displayed in the accumulated number of awarded balls display area 733 of the screen, and this highlighted display image is displayed. During this time, the highlighted display image and the accumulated number of prize balls display (accumulated number of prize balls display image) coexist. In this embodiment, although the details will be described later, since the execution time of the highlighting effect (the display time of the highlighting image) is set to "3 seconds", when the highlighting image appears on the screen, This highlighted display image and the display of the accumulated number of prize balls (accumulated number of prize balls display image) are simultaneously displayed for 3 seconds.

The emphasis effect is executed when a predetermined execution condition (referred to as "emphasis effect execution condition") is satisfied during execution of the jackpot game. This emphasizing effect execution condition is established when the value of the above-mentioned accumulated prize ball number counter reaches a predetermined specific value. This specific value is a numerical value corresponding to a multiple of a predetermined number of prize balls (2500). That is, every time the value of the cumulative winning ball number counter reaches a multiple value (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000, etc.) of the predetermined winning ball number, the emphasizing effect execution condition is satisfied, and the emphasizing effect execution condition is satisfied. Emphasis effect will be performed based on this.

FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table. This emphasis effect pattern table is referred to when selecting an emphasis effect pattern to be displayed on the screen (the display pattern of the emphasized display image). As shown in FIG. 66, this emphasizing effect pattern table associates the value (specific value) of the counter for the number of accumulated winning balls, the determined emphasizing effect pattern, and the display contents thereof. In this embodiment, when the value of the counter for the number of accumulated prize balls reaches "2500", the emphasis effect pattern PK1 is executed in which an enlarged emphasis display image indicating the characters "2500 points achieved" is displayed on the screen, and the accumulated number of prize balls is executed. When the value of the counter reaches "5000", the emphasized effect pattern PK2 is executed in which the emphasized display image indicating the characters "5000 points achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen, and the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "7500". Then, an emphasis effect pattern PK3 is executed in which an enlarged highlighting image showing the characters "7500 points achieved" is displayed on the screen. When the emphasizing effect pattern PK4 in which the emphasizing display image showing the characters is displayed enlarged is executed, and the value of the cumulative winning balls counter reaches "12500", the emphasizing display image showing the characters "12500 points achieved" is displayed enlarged on the screen. is executed, and when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "15000", an emphasized effect pattern PK6 is executed in which an emphasized display image indicating characters "15000 points achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen. be. Note that FIG. 66 shows only the six types of emphasized effect patterns PK1 to PK6, but even after the emphasized effect pattern PK6 is executed, the value of the accumulated prize ball counter is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls ( 17500, 20000, 22500 . . . ), the emphasis effect pattern corresponding to the multiple value is executed. As the emphasis effect pattern, until the value of the cumulative number of prize balls counter reaches the multiple value (97500) of the predetermined number of prize balls, there are emphasized effect patterns corresponding to multiples of 2500. , even if the value of the cumulative winning ball number counter reaches a multiple value of a predetermined winning ball number (for example, 100000, 102500, etc.), the emphasizing effect pattern may not be executed. Furthermore, after the value of the cumulative winning ball counter reaches the multiple value of the predetermined winning ball number (97500), the value of the cumulative winning ball counter is a different value from the multiple value of the predetermined winning ball number (99999). A special emphasizing effect pattern such as "99999 points achieved" is displayed only once, and after that, the value of the accumulated prize ball counter is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 100000 or 102500 etc.) is reached, the emphasis effect pattern may not be executed. By configuring in this way, while reducing the number of types of emphasizing effect patterns (in other words, while configuring so as not to prepare an endless number of types of emphasizing effect patterns), it is expected to win a prize ball in a series of villas, which will be described later. It is possible to make it possible to execute the emphasizing effect without fail until a prize ball that greatly exceeds the value (for example, 10 times) is obtained.

Here, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of types of emphasis effect patterns, two consecutive emphasis effect patterns are configured so as not to be executed redundantly. In other words, of the two consecutive emphasized effect patterns, the execution period or execution timing of one of the emphasized effect patterns (for example, the emphasized effect pattern PK1) and the execution period or execution timing of the other emphasized effect pattern (for example, the emphasized effect pattern PK2) and do not overlap each other (including cases where both execution periods do not overlap entirely and cases where both execution periods do not partially overlap). Here, provisionally, while one of the two consecutive emphasized effect patterns (for example, emphasized effect pattern PK1) is being executed, the other emphasized effect pattern (for example, emphasized effect pattern PK2) satisfies the execution condition ( For example, when the value of the cumulative winning ball counter reaches 5000, even if the execution condition is satisfied, the other emphasizing effect pattern may not be executed so as not to complicate the display contents. As a modified example, if one of two consecutive emphasis effect patterns (for example, emphasis effect pattern PK1) is being executed, the execution condition of the other emphasis effect pattern (for example, emphasis effect pattern PK2) is satisfied. When (for example, the value of the counter for the number of accumulated winning balls reaches 5000), the execution of one emphasizing performance pattern is forcibly terminated and the other emphasizing performance pattern is executed instead so as not to complicate the display contents. may be configured as follows.

Also, the display size of the emphasized display image (emphasized effect display) on the screen may be appropriately changed according to the type of each emphasized effect pattern. In other words, the display size of the emphasized display image (emphasized effect display) may differ according to the type of each emphasized effect pattern. For example, in order to prevent the highlighted display image (enlarged image) from protruding from the screen due to an increase in the number of digits of the accumulated prize balls indicated by the highlighted display image, the digits of the accumulated prize balls that have reached a specific number are displayed. When the number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the size of the highlighted display image may be reduced. As a modification, for the emphasizing effect pattern when the value of the accumulated prize ball number counter reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30000...) of the specific number of prize balls (for example, 10000), other emphasizing effects In order to strengthen the degree of blessing for the player (to make the player feel even more blessed) than the pattern, the display size of the emphasized display image (emphasized effect display) is increased, and the execution time of the emphasized effect is increased. It may be longer (for example, 5 seconds instead of 3 seconds).

≪Special effects for emphasizing production≫
Next, a special effect that accompanies the generation of the emphasis effect will be described. In the present embodiment, when the emphasis effect is executed during execution of the jackpot game, a special effect is applied (addition of the predetermined effect) to the emphasized display image at the start and end of the emphasis effect. Effect display (also simply referred to as "special effect", or simply "additional effect" or "additional display") is performed, and a specific effect sound that audibly notifies the start and end of the emphasized effect Output is done.

Special effect display includes special effect display in which the highlighted display image itself is transformed (scaling, reversing, moving, etc.) or changed (color tone change, brightness change, color/black and white switching, etc.) There is a special effect display in which an image different from the image gives a visual effect to the display of the highlighted image. In this embodiment, as the special effect display, a fade-in display in which the highlighted image gradually appears, a fade-out display in which the highlighted image gradually disappears, and a specific effect image (for example, countless small There is an effect display that displays a star image, a charged image, etc.). Mainly, effect display and fade-in display are executed when the highlighted image appears, and fade-out display is executed when the highlighted image is erased (effect display is not executed when the highlighted image is erased). As a modification of this embodiment, the special effects may be displayed only at the start or end of the emphasizing effect. Also, as a special effect display, a hidden display may be performed in which a blurred image or a mosaic image is superimposed on the front side of the emphasized display image.

A specific sound effect is a specific sound effect that is output at the start and end of the emphasis effect. As the specific sound effects, a specific sound effect A (for example, a sound “Boom”) that is output substantially simultaneously at the start of the emphasized effect and a specific sound effect B (such as “pico”) that is output substantially simultaneously at the end of the emphasized effect are used. There is a voice). As a modification, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may be output at the start of the emphasized effect, and the specific sound effect (specific sound B) may not be output at the end of the emphasized effect. Conversely, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may be output at the end of the emphasized presentation, and the specific sound effect (specific sound A) may not be output at the start of the emphasized presentation. Further, as another modified example, a specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) that is output at the start of the emphasized effect and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) that is output at the end of the emphasized effect are produced by the same voice. may be configured. Note that when the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) output at the start of the emphasized effect and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) output at the end of the emphasized effect are made to be the same sound, both The output level of the sound (sound level) may be the same, or the output level (sound level) of both sounds may be different (for example, the output level of the specific sound effect A may be higher than the output level of the specific sound effect B). Alternatively, the output level of the specific sound effect B may be higher than the output level of the specific sound effect A). It should be noted that it is preferable to configure the specific sound effects A and B to fade out (gradually decrease the volume) toward the end of the output. You can increase your impact. In such a configuration, by fading in (gradually increasing the volume) immediately after the start of output of the specific sound effects A and B, the impact can be further strengthened. In such a configuration, it is more effective to make the fade-out period (e.g. 1 second) longer than the fade-in period (e.g. 0.3 seconds). It is possible to have a gradualness in lowering the volume).

Next, the execution timing of the emphasis effect, the special effect display, and the output of the specific effect sound during execution of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 67 is a time chart showing execution timings of outputting emphasis effect, special effect display, and specific effect sound during execution of the jackpot game.

First, after the big win game is started, at timing T1, the execution period of the big win start demonstration ends, and the display of the cumulative number of winning balls starts to be displayed. Next, at timing T2, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value, execution of the emphasizing effect is started. At the start of the emphasizing effect, a special effect display (effect display in the illustrated example) is performed to apply a special effect to the appearance of the emphasizing image, and a specific effect sound (specific effect sound A) notifying the start of the emphasizing effect is performed. is output. Next, at timing T3, execution of the emphasis effect ends. At the end of this emphasizing effect, a special effect display (fade-out display in the illustrated example) is performed to apply a special effect to the disappearance of the emphasizing effect, and a specific sound effect (specific effect sound B) for notifying the end of the emphasizing effect. is output. Then, at the timing T4, the display of the cumulative number of winning balls is finished, and then the big hit game of this time is finished. As shown in FIG. 67, at the start (timing T1) and the end (timing T4) of the display of the accumulated number of prize balls, the special effect display for applying a special effect to the display of the accumulated number of prize balls is not performed. Also, no special effect sound is output for announcing the start and end of the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. In this time chart, the specific effect sound output period and the special effect display execution period at the timings T2 and T3 are shown as substantially the same period, but the specific effect sound output period is the special effect display execution period. may be longer than By configuring in such a way, the visibility of the emphasized effect (visibility of the display related to the number of winning balls) is not hindered more than necessary by the special effect display, while the specific effect sound that does not affect the visibility is special By continuing the output even after the execution of the effect display is finished, the auditory blessing period for the player becomes long, and the synergistic effect of the visual blessing and the auditory blessing can be further expected. . Also, in this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect at the timing T2 is shown as being shorter than the execution period of the emphasized effect, but it is the same (or substantially the same) as the emphasized effect execution period or is shorter than the emphasized effect execution period. may be long term. In addition, in this time chart, the start timing of the specific sound effect and the start timing of the special effect display at timing T2 are shown as timing earlier than the start timing of the emphasized effect, but the same timing (or substantially the same timing) good too. In addition, in this time chart, the end timing of the specific sound effect and the end timing of the special effect display at timing T3 are indicated as timing after the end timing of the emphasized effect, but the same timing (or substantially the same timing) good too.

≪Execution time of emphasis effect≫
Next, the execution time of the emphasis effect will be explained. FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration.

The execution time of the emphasis effect is the time from the start of the display of the emphasized display image (enlarged display image) of the accumulated number of prize balls to the end thereof. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. Specifically, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (jackpot games) as in the first embodiment, and the execution time of the emphasized effect is set to this value. It is set to "3 seconds" which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. In this embodiment, even if the emphasis effect is executed by any one of the plurality of types of emphasis effect patterns (emphasis effect patterns PK1 to PK6 in the illustrated example of FIG. 66), this emphasis effect is executed. The execution time is set to "3 seconds". As a modification, the execution time of the emphasizing effect may be changed according to the type of emphasizing effect pattern. It may be set so that the execution time is long (or tends to be long). In addition, as described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time (interval period) set after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game has passed until the jackpot game ends. is. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration does not include the interval time (interval period) provided after the end of the final round game. In addition, this interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds", and is not provided only after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game, but between each round game (for example, the first round and It is supplemented that the period during which the big winning opening 54 is closed between the second round and between the fifth and sixth rounds is also an interval time (interval period). The interval time after the end of the final round game is the remaining time ( grace period). On the other hand, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is separated from the final round game in which there is no possibility of effectively detecting the entry of the game ball into the big prize winning port 54 during the execution time. It is set as a preparation period for the game after the game is over.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasizing effect is set to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, so that the accumulated prize balls are displayed just before the end of the final round game. Even when the emphasizing performance is executed in response to the number reaching a specific value, the emphasizing performance is completed before the end of the jackpot end demonstration. As a result, even when the emphasizing performance is executed just before the end of the final round game, the emphasizing performance is performed beyond the end of the big win game and until the variable display after the end of the big win game. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the big win game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation after the end. Also, for example, when the gaming ball enters the big winning opening 54 at the prescribed count number (here, the 10th count) in the final round game of the big hit game, and the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied, In order to satisfy the end condition of the final round game substantially simultaneously with the fulfillment of the emphasized performance execution condition, a 2-second interval period is started after the final round game is finished, and this 2-second interval period. At least a part of the emphasis effect will be executed during this, but for this "at least part", it is possible to check the display related to the number of prize balls such as "2500 points achieved" in the emphasis effect (more Specifically, at the start of execution of the emphasized effect, a special effect display is executed and a display regarding the number of prize balls such as "2500 points achieved" is made, but the specified count number in the final round game of the big hit game is increased. When the emphasis performance is executed in the interval period triggered by the entry of the game ball into the winning hole 54, the special effect is displayed in the interval period and the display regarding the number of prize balls can be visually recognized. In other words, the display of the number of winning balls can be visually recognized before the jackpot end demonstration is started). By constructing in this way, it is possible to confirm which pattern the emphasized performance is (which number of prize balls has been achieved) before the start of the jackpot end demonstration period for executing the performance related to the end of the big win game. It is possible to realize a flow of performance without a sense of incongruity along with the progress of the jackpot game.

In addition, the execution time of the emphasized effect may be set longer than the interval time provided between each round or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration. In addition, when the emphasized effect is not completed by the end of the round game, the emphasized effect is forcibly ended at the end of the round game, at the start of the interval period after the end of the round game, or at the start of the end demonstration. It may be configured to

≪Execution timing of emphasis production, light emission production and character production≫
Next, execution timings of the emphasis effect, the light emission effect, and the character object effect will be described. FIG. 69 is a time chart showing execution timings of an emphasis effect, a light emitting effect, and a character object effect.

During execution of the emphasizing effect, the frame lamp 10 lights up or blinks in a special light emission mode. Examples of the special luminous mode include a mode in which lighting is displayed in a special luminescent color such as rainbow color, or a mode in which the special luminescent color is blinked at a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval). . In addition, as a modification of this special light emission mode, a mode may be employed in which a predetermined light emission color such as blue is blinked at a blinking interval shorter than a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval). Further, the board lamp 25 provided on the game board 20 (center decoration 21) may be configured to perform lighting display or blinking display in a special light emitting mode during execution of the emphasized effect. Further, during execution of the emphatic effect, the frame lamp 10 may be lit or blinked in a special light emission mode, and the board lamp 25 may be lit or blinked in a special light emission mode. In other words, during execution of the emphasizing effect, lighting display or blinking display in the special light emission mode of the frame lamp 10 and lighting display or blinking display in the special light emission mode of the board lamp 25 are performed substantially simultaneously (simultaneously in parallel). (including the case where the light emission periods of both lamps 10 and 25 entirely overlap and the case where the light emission periods of both lamps 10 and 25 partially overlap). Further, even when the emphasis effect is executed, some lamps among the frame lamps 10 may be configured not to be lit or blinked in the special light emission mode. Specifically, the frame lamps 10 are a frame lamp A (for example, a top lamp), a frame lamp B (for example, a side lamp), and a frame lamp C (for example, a spherical dish lamp).
and when the emphasis effect is executed in a situation where these frame lamps A to C are lit or blinked in the normal light emitting mode, the frame lamp is displayed during the execution of this emphasis effect. Some of the lamps A to C are lit or blinked in a special light emission mode (the light emission mode is switched from the normal light emission mode to the special light emission mode), while the other lamps are lit or displayed in the normal light emission mode. It may be configured to blink (maintain the light emission mode in the normal light emission mode). In that case, the lamp mounted on the effect button 15 (the effect button lamp) is lit or blinked in the normal light emission mode regardless of whether or not the emphasis effect is executed (the light emission mode is maintained in the normal light emission mode). to) is preferred. Similarly, even when the emphasizing effect is executed, some of the board lamps 25 may be configured not to be lit or blinked in the special light emission mode. Specifically, when the board lamp 25 is configured to have a board lamp A and a board lamp B, the board lamps A and B are emphasized in a situation where these board lamps A and B are lit or blinked in a normal light emission mode. When the effect is executed, during the execution of this emphasized effect, one of the board lamps A and B is lit or blinked in a special light emission mode (the light emission mode is changed from the normal light emission mode to the special light emission mode). ), while the other lamp may be lit or blinked in the normal light emission mode (maintaining the light emission mode in the normal light emission mode).

Also, during execution of the emphasizing effect, a role product lamp (an LED lamp provided on the movable role product 24), which will be described later, lights up or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode. Examples of the predetermined light emission mode include lighting display in a predetermined light emission color such as blue, or blinking display in the predetermined light emission color and at a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval).

When an error occurs in the gaming machine, the frame lamp 10 and the role lamp (to be described later) are illuminated or blinked in an error light emission mode. An example of this error light emission mode is a mode in which a lighting display or blinking display is performed in a specific light emission color such as red. When the frame lamp 10 or the character object lamp to be described later blinks in a specific luminescent color, it may be blinked at a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval), or may be blinked at a shorter interval than the predetermined blinking interval. It may be displayed blinking at intervals. When an error occurs in the gaming machine in this way, the frame lamp 10 or the character lamp (to be described later) lights up or flashes in an error light emission mode different from the predetermined light emission mode and the special light emission mode. error can be accurately notified.

Further, during execution of the emphasizing effect, an accessory effect is executed in which a specific movable accessory 24 is driven in a predetermined operation mode. The movable accessory 24 is, as shown in FIG. 1, a logo accessory formed in a laterally long rectangular parallelepiped shape using a translucent resin material. On the front side of the movable accessory 24, there is provided a decorative portion in the form of a logo designating the title of the game machine, for example. Inside the movable accessory 24, an accessory lamp is mounted for illuminating the decorative portion formed on the front side. A character lamp is configured by having a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix, for example. Full-color LEDs having light emitting elements capable of emitting R (red), G (green), and B (blue) light are preferably used as the light emitter. The movable accessory 24 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern from the accessory lamp, so that the entire decorative portion on the front side is illuminated.

The role object production of the present embodiment can be executed by combining the production operation of the movable accessory 24 and the light emitting display of the role object lamp. In other words, the role production is configured as a production in which the production operation of the movable accessory 24 (movable role production) and the light emission display of the role lamp (light emission production) can be performed in a composite manner.

The accessory movable effect is an effect in which the movable accessory 24 performs an effect operation according to a predetermined effect operation pattern. In this movable accessory effect, the movable accessory 24 is operated (at a predetermined position) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbols or the execution of the jackpot game, on the premise that the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is completed. (including holding or stopping the For example, the movable accessory 24 is lowered from the initial position to a predetermined movable position, and the movable accessory 24 is moved to a predetermined movable position (for example, the front surface of the screen, which is the position after the lowering operation). position) for a predetermined period of time, and a lifting operation for raising the movable accessory 24 from the predetermined movable position to the initial position.

The role object light emitting effect is an effect in which the role object lamp of the movable role object 24 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. In this embodiment, the light emission patterns (light emission modes) of the role lamp are light emission pattern 1 (white light emission), light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission), light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission), light emission pattern 4 (rainbow light emission, that is, is a gradation light emission of multiple colors), and one light emission pattern is selected from the plurality of light emission patterns 1 to 4 (all of these light emission patterns are flashing modes). It should be noted that, as described above, when the accessory lamp emits light during execution of the emphasizing effect, the light emission pattern 2 is selected. In other words, the predetermined light emission mode of the accessory lamp corresponds to light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission). Here, the light emission pattern of the role lamp is related to the degree of expectation for a big hit. Blue light emission)<light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission)<light emission pattern 4 (rainbow color light emission) are set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases one step at a time. It should be noted that the light emission pattern of this character lamp is merely an example, and one light emission pattern may be configured to emit light in a plurality of colors, or light emission patterns with different blinking times may be prepared. Alternatively, the number of types of light emission patterns may be changed. Further, the frame lamp 10 may be configured so as to adopt the light emission modes of the light emission patterns 1 to 4, like the character lamp. As with the frame lamp 10, the role lamp may also be lit or blinked in a specific color such as red as an error light emission mode when an error occurs in the gaming machine.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, specific execution timings of the emphasis effect, the light emitting effect and the accessory effect during execution of the jackpot game will be described.

First, at timing T1, a jackpot game is started. At this time, the movable accessory 24 is on standby at the initial position, which is the starting point of the action, and the accessory lamp is in a non-light emitting state (extinguishing state). It should be noted that the role lamp may be configured to emit light in the light emission pattern 1 (white light emission) instead of the non-light emission state (in that case, "light emission" in this time chart becomes "blue light emission" and " Note that "non-luminous" is replaced with "white-luminous").

Next, at timing T2, when the accumulated number of prize balls reaches a specific number (for example, 5000), the condition for execution of the emphasized effect is established, and the execution of the emphasized effect is started. Also, at this timing T2, the performance operation of the movable role object 24 is started, and the light emission display of the role object lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) is started. That is, in the present embodiment, the display of the emphasizing effect, the effect operation of the movable role object 24, and the light emitting display of the role object lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started substantially at the same time. Rendering starts synchronously).

Next, at timing T3, execution of the emphasis effect ends. Also, at this timing T3, the performance operation of the movable role object ends, and the light emission display of the role object lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the display of the emphasizing effect, the effect operation of the movable accessory 24, and the light emission display of the role product lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are completed at substantially the same time. ends synchronously).

As described above, in this embodiment, the timing of starting and ending execution of the emphasizing effect, the timing of starting and ending the operation of the movable accessory 24, and the start of light emission of the accessory lamp (or the transition from white light emission to blue light emission). By making the timing of the start of change) and the end of light emission (or the start of change from blue light emission to white light emission) substantially at the same time, these effects become a coherent effect (effect with a sense of unity). The flow of performance becomes easy for the player to understand. In addition, when executing an emphasizing effect, the movable accessory 24 is operated or the accessory lamp is emitted (or changed from white light emission to blue light emission) without ending with only the emphasized display (enlarged display) of the effect display device 70. By changing the number of balls, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of satisfaction and superiority, and to appeal the highlighted accumulated number of prize balls to surrounding players. . The frame lamp 10 also adopts the same configuration as the character lamp (that is, it starts/ends light emission display at each timing like the character lamp, or emits white light at each timing like the character lamp). to blue emission).

As a modification, the execution of the emphasizing effect is started after the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started. may According to this, there is an expectation that the emphasizing effect will be executed after the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started respectively. can be felt by the player, and the player's sense of satisfaction and exhilaration can be heightened with respect to the fact that the emphasizing effect is actually executed. Also, at that time, by starting the performance operation of the movable accessory 24 after the light emission display of the role lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) is started, the light emission of the role product lamp (or From white light emission to blue light emission) → operation of movable accessory 24 → display of emphasis effect, each effect can proceed at a good tempo. Conversely, the light emission display of the role product lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started after the performance operation of the movable accessory 24 is started. Even in such a case, each effect can be progressed at a good tempo, such as the operation of the movable accessory 24 → light emission of the accessory lamp (or change from white light emission to blue light emission) → display of emphasis effect. Note that what is executed prior to the emphasizing effect may be either the action of the movable accessory 24 or the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Others may be executed substantially simultaneously with the emphasis effect. The frame lamp 10 also has the same configuration as the character lamp (that is, it starts/ends light emission display at each timing like the character lamp, or emits white light at each timing like the character lamp). to blue emission).

Also, after the execution of the emphasizing effect is started, the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started. According to this configuration, before the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the luminous display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are performed, the emphasis effect is suddenly started. It is possible to give surprise and unpredictability to the game, and prevent the occurrence of the emphasized performance from being revealed to the player. Incidentally, what is executed after the emphasizing effect may be either the action of the movable accessory 24 or the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Other than that, it may be executed substantially at the same time as the emphasis effect. The frame lamp 10 also has the same configuration as the character lamp (that is, it starts/ends light emission display at each timing like the character lamp, or emits white light at each timing like the character lamp). to blue emission).

Similarly, the execution of the emphasizing effect may be terminated after the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are completed. good. It should be noted that what ends before the emphasis effect may be either the action of the movable accessory 24 or the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Other than that, the emphasis effect may be terminated substantially at the same time. According to this configuration, immediately after the end of the emphasizing effect (without waiting for the end of the action of the movable accessory 24 and the end of the light emission of the accessory lamp), it is possible to shift to the next development of the effect, and the game can be played. It is possible to proceed at a good tempo. In addition, the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may end after the execution of the emphasized effect ends. It should be noted that what ends after the emphasis effect may be either the action of the movable accessory 24 or the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Other than that, it may be ended at substantially the same time as the emphasizing effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the emphasizing effect from being lengthened more than necessary, and it is possible to provide a sharp effect by shifting the respective execution timings (end timings). The frame lamp 10 also adopts the same configuration as the character lamp (that is, it starts/ends light emission display at each timing like the character lamp, or emits white light at each timing like the character lamp). to blue emission).

Also, during the jackpot game, the role lamp and the frame lamp 10 are in a light emitting mode according to the progress of the jackpot game. Specifically, during the jackpot production that progresses during the jackpot game, a moving image (a moving image introducing a character or a moving image in which the characters fight each other) indicating that the jackpot is in progress is reproduced, with lyrics or This is an effect in which a song without lyrics is played. In accordance with the progress of the effect during the big win, the character lamp and the frame lamp 10 are, for example, chronologically lit in white → blinking in white → lighting in yellow → blinking in yellow → lighting in white → . Configured to change and loop. In this way, according to the progress of the effect during the big hit, the predetermined light emission mode is changed. Light emission may be interrupted, and the character object lamp and the frame lamp 10 may be configured to change to blue light emission. In such a configuration, the character object lamp and the frame lamp 10 emit blue light when the emphasis effect ends. and return to light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, when the emphasizing effect is executed while the light emission mode of the character object lamp and the frame lamp 10 is yellow) In this case, this yellow lighting is forcibly terminated and becomes blue light emission, and when the emphasis effect is completed, the blue light emission ends and returns to yellow lighting, or the blue light emission time elapses. By crossing over the switching timing of the light emission mode, it returns to yellow blinking instead of yellow lighting). It should be noted that the blue light emission start timing of the character object lamp and the frame lamp 10 in the case of such a configuration may be substantially at the same time as the execution start timing of the emphasizing effect, or it may be after or before the execution start timing. It may be substantially at the same time as the movement start timing of the object 24, may be after, or may be earlier. In addition, when the character object lamp and the frame lamp 10 are configured in this manner, the end timing of the blue light emission may be substantially at the same time as the execution end timing of the emphasizing effect, or may be after or before the execution end timing. It may be substantially at the same time as the end of the movement of the object 24, or may be after or before (it should be supplemented that the above-mentioned effects to be applied differ depending on the timing).

Further, many lamps are provided in addition to the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10. - 特許庁As part of this, for example, the starter lamp attached to the first starter 51 (usually lit or extinguished in white, but the hold caused by winning the first starter 51 is expected to be a big hit. If the hold is high, a lamp that lights up in one of the luminous modes of blue → green → red → rainbow color in order of the degree of expectation of a big hit), and a production button lamp attached to the production button (white if the operation is not valid) A lamp that lights up or goes out during the operation valid time, but lights up in blue when the operation is valid). The starter lamp and the effect button lamp also emit white light (white light) during the big win game (during the big win effect), but unlike the character lamp and the frame lamp 10, even if the emphasis effect is executed. , white light emission (white lighting) is maintained so that the player does not misunderstand that the first start port 51 has won a prize or misunderstand that the operation is valid. In addition, when an error occurs in the game machine, regardless of whether the character lamp, the frame lamp 10, the start lamp, or the effect button lamp, the light emission mode up to that point (the execution of the emphasized effect Even if it is a corresponding light emission mode or a light emission mode corresponding to the effect during the big hit), as an error light emission mode, it is configured to always perform lighting display or blinking display in a specific light emission color such as red.

≪Relationship between character production during fluctuation and character production during jackpot≫
In the present embodiment, as the various character effects, in addition to a character effect (also referred to as "first character effect") in which the above-mentioned specific movable character (movable character 24) performs a predetermined action and emits light, Also, there is prepared a role performance (also referred to as a “second role performance”) in which a predetermined movable role (a movable role other than the movable role 24) performs a predetermined action and emits light. Although the detailed illustration of this predetermined movable accessory is omitted, for example, a door accessory (left and right door members) provided at the central opening of the center decoration 21 is exemplified. The door accessories (left and right door members) are configured to reciprocate in the left and right direction between an initial position (open position) and a movable position (closed position) in front of the screen of the effect display device 70 . When the door accessory (left and right door members) is in the initial position (open position), the door accessory (left and right door members) is hidden behind the game board 20, and the screen of the effect display device 70 ( Almost the entire display area) becomes visible. On the other hand, when the door accessories (left and right door members) are in the movable position (closed position), the door accessories (left and right door members) overlap in front of the screen of the effect display device 70 (the left and right door members are adjacent to each other). and completed state), and the screen (display area) of the effect display device 70 becomes invisible or only a part of the display area becomes visible (at least the visible display area becomes smaller than the state in the initial position). ). Note that this door accessory (left and right door members) is similar to the above-described movable accessory (logo accessory) 24, and the role lamp (illuminator) for causing the door member (left and right door members) to emit light. ). In the present embodiment, the second accessory effect can be executed not only during the execution of the jackpot game (during the display of the highlighted display image), but also during the variable display of the symbols. In other words, the second accessory effect is roughly divided into a variable accessory effect performed during execution of the variable display of the symbols and a jackpot mid-jackpot effect performed during execution of the big win game. In the following description, the term "variable accessory production" means a role production in which a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) performs a predetermined operation and emits light during execution of the variable display of the symbols, and is a jackpot medium accessory. The effect means a role effect in which a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) performs a predetermined operation and emits light during execution of the jackpot game. In addition, the light emission of the character lamp in the variable character production means that the character lamp of the predetermined movable character (door character) emits light during the execution of the variable display of the pattern, and Light emission of the accessory lamp in the effect means that the accessory lamp of the predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) emits light during execution of the jackpot game.

For example, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it suggests that the SP reach develops from N reach to SP reach (for example, during N reach It is configured to determine that it will develop into SP reach by executing the variable character production during the change), and the scene of the winning branch after the development of SP reach (the final result of SP reach indicates a big hit) (For example, at the end of the SP reach, the jackpot is confirmed by executing the variable role production at the end of the SP reach, and at the end of the SP reach This is performed when the possibility of deviation is extremely high due to the non-execution of the during-variable character production). On the other hand, during the jackpot performance, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game at the time of the first hit, the ally character makes a preemptive attack in a battle production with the enemy character (probable variable promotion incitement production). When executing a variable promotion effect or when a big hit occurs (when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed), the temporary number of rounds notified is the number of false rounds, and the number of true rounds (temporary number of rounds) during the execution of the big hit game It is also performed when the round is promoted by notifying the number of times greater than that, that is, when executing the round promotion effect.

In the present embodiment, the number of executions of the variable character performance performed during one variation display and the number of times of execution of the big winning character performance performed during one big win game are configured to be different. It is More specifically, the variable accessory effect may occur only once or multiple times during execution of the variable display (naturally, it may not occur even once). The case where it occurs only once means that, in the above example, before the SP reach development of the variable display, the first variable performance that suggests that the SP reach is developed is performed, and then the change is performed. A case is exemplified in which the second variable character production is not executed because the deviation is confirmed in the display. In addition, the case where it occurs multiple times is explained in the above example. A case is exemplified in which the second variable performance for notifying the winning of the jackpot is performed in the scene of the win-lose branch after the development of the SP reach. It should be noted that during the execution of the variable display, the performance during variable performance may be performed three times or more.

On the other hand, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot middle accessory presentation does not occur a plurality of times, but always occurs only once (naturally, it may not occur even once). In other words, when explaining in the above example, during the execution of the jackpot game, during the jackpot production performed during the probability variation promotion (during the execution of the probability variation promotion production), and during the round promotion (during the execution of the round promotion production) Only one of the jackpot mid-game performances can be performed. Here, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game, during the execution of the variable probability promotion effect, the emphasis effect and the character effect (first character effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs are not executed, During execution of the round promotion performance, the emphasizing performance and the character performance (first character performance) performed when the emphasizing performance occurs are not executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the big win game, after the execution of the variable probability promotion performance is completed or before the execution of the variable probability promotion performance is started, it is performed when the emphasized performance and the emphasized performance are generated during the same big win game. It is configured to be able to execute a role performance (first role performance). Similarly, during the execution of the jackpot game, after the execution of the round promotion effect is completed or before the execution of the round promotion effect is started, it is performed when the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect occur during the same jackpot game. It is configured to be able to execute a role production (first role production). In any case, it is preferable that the promotion effect (variable probability promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the emphasized effect and the character effect (first character effect) performed when the emphasized effect occurs ( (Including the case where the execution periods of both effects do not entirely overlap and the case where the execution periods of both effects do not partially overlap). It should be noted that, as a modification of the present embodiment, the promotion effect (probability variation promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the emphasis effect are overlapped, but the promotion effect (probability variation promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the occurrence of the emphasis effect Structured so that the role production (first role production) that is performed at the same time is not executed (including the case where the execution periods of both productions do not overlap in their entirety and the case where the execution periods of both productions do not partially overlap). may be In addition, as a further modification, during the execution of the jackpot game, a role production (first role production) that is performed when the emphasis production occurs, a role production (second role production) that is performed at the time of the probability change promotion (second role production), and It may be configured such that only one of the character production (second character production) that is performed at the time of promotion to the round is performed. In other words, the emphasis effect, the variable probability promotion effect, and the round promotion effect are configured so as not to be executed simultaneously during one big win game. In other words, the emphasis effect may not be executed in the jackpot game in which the variable probability promotion effect is executed, and the emphasis effect may not be executed in the big win game in which the round promotion effect is executed. In addition, you may comprise so that only either may be mounted about probability variation promotion production and round promotion production. In addition, like the probability variable promotion production and the round promotion production, general productions that make it look like a low-profit big-hit game and finally inform that it is actually a high-profit big-hit game are called "promotion production". In addition, as a further modification, during the execution of the jackpot game, during the execution of the above-mentioned holding consecutive suggestion production (reservation inside the reservation production), the emphasis production and the role production (first role) performed at the time of occurrence of the emphasis production On the other hand, after the execution of the suspension continuation suggestion performance (suspension internal renso performance) is completed, or the execution of the suspension continuation suggestion performance (suspension internal renso performance) is started. It may be configured to be able to execute the performance (first role performance) that is performed when the emphasis performance and the emphasis performance occur during the same jackpot game, as long as it is before the game. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is preferable that the suspension consecutive suggestion effect (reservation inner continuous resort effect) and the emphasized effect and the character effect (first character effect) performed when the emphasized effect occurs are not performed in duplicate. (Including the case where the entire execution periods of both effects do not overlap and the case where part of the execution periods of both effects do not overlap). In the case of such a configuration, the suspension continuation suggestion effect (suspension inner renso effect) and the emphasis effect are performed in duplicate, but it is performed when the suspension continuation suggestion effect (suspension inner renso effect) and the emphasis effect occur. Even if it is configured so that the role production (first role production) does not overlap (including the case where the entire execution period of both productions does not overlap and the case where part of the execution period of both productions does not overlap) good.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, the number of executions of the variable role production performed during the execution of the variation display of the big win (big hit variation display) (one big hit variation during the variable performance that can be executed during the change) and the number of executions of the jackpot during the performance performed during the execution of the big hit game after the stop of the variable display (the middle jackpot performance that can be executed during one big hit game There are times when the number of times is different from the object production). In this way, during the execution of the variable display, by being configured so that the variable character presentation can be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give surprise and unexpectedness to the player, It is possible to increase the player's interest in the occurrence of (fluctuating accessory presentation). In addition, when the variable accessory presentation is executed during the execution of the variation display of the big win and the jackpot accessory presentation is executed during the execution of the big win game performed after the end of the variation display of the big win. The light emission of the character lamp in the medium role production is more likely to be a specific mode of light emission (rainbow color emission) than the light emission of the role lamp in the middle role production, or the role in the variable role production The type of light emission of the lamp includes light emission other than the specific light emission (including blue light emission in addition to rainbow light emission), while the light emission of the role lamp during the jackpot production is only the specific light emission. (with iridescence only). More specifically, the light emission color of the role lamp in the jackpot medium role production is only rainbow color even when either the emphasis production or promotion production is performed, but before the development of SP reach (after establishment of reach) Before the development of SP reach), the light emission color of the variable character production that suggests that N reach will develop to SP reach is blue, and the scene of the winning branch after the development of SP reach (the final result of SP reach indicates a big hit The luminous color of the variable character production that informs the jackpot winning in the branch scene of whether the content is the content or the content indicating the loss is configured to be rainbow colors. In the present embodiment, the number of executions of the variable character presentation performed during execution of the big hit variation display and the number of executions of the jackpot medium role presentation performed during the execution of the big win game after the stop of the big win variation display. are different times, but it is not limited to this. The number of executions of the jackpot middle accessory presentation performed during the execution of the jackpot game (which is different from the jackpot variation display and performed after the jackpot variation display is stopped) may be different. That is, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the big win variation display and the big win game triggered by the same single big win, the number of executions of the varying character performance during the execution of one big win variation display. , and the number of executions of the jackpot middle accessory presentation performed during execution of one jackpot game may be different. In addition, in the present embodiment, the luminous color of the role lamp in the variable role production performed during the execution of the big win variation display, and the jackpot medium role performed during the execution of the big win game after the stop of the big win variation display. Although it has been illustrated that the light emission color of the character lamp in the object production may be different, it is not limited to this. The emission color of the role lamp and the role lamp in the jackpot middle role performance performed during execution of a certain big win game (a big win game performed after the stop of the big win variation display different from the certain big win variation display). It is good also as what can become a luminescent color different from a luminescent color. That is, irrespective of whether or not there is a relationship between the big hit variation display and the big win game that are triggered by the same one big win, the role in the variable character production that is performed during the execution of the one big win variation display is performed. The luminescence color of the object lamp and the luminescence color of the character lamp in the middle-big-win character performance performed during execution of one big-win game may be different.

Here, the execution time of the variable character performance and the big-hit character performance will be described. FIG. 70(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the during-fluctuation character performance, and FIG. 70(B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the big-hit middle role performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the operation time TD1 of the door character in the variable character effect is different from the operation time TD2 of the door character in the big hit character effect. Here, the operation times TD1 and TD2 of the door accessory are basically defined as follows: the door accessory (left and right door members) starts moving from the initial position as the starting point of operation, and then returns to the initial position and operates. is the time to finish In addition, the operation times TD1 and TD2 include not only the movement time when the door accessory is actually moving, but also the holding time (after movement) when the door accessory is stopped and held at a predetermined movable position. position holding time) is also included. In this embodiment, the holding time (post-movement position holding time) refers to a state in which the door accessories are integrated (the door accessories are It is time to hold the completed state). In this embodiment, the holding time (position holding time after movement) of the door role in the jackpot middle role production is longer than the holding time (position holding time after movement) of the door role in the fluctuating role production. By changing the time, the operation times TD1 and TD2 are different. In other words, when the execution time TD1 of the variable character effect and the execution time TD2 of the big hit character effect are compared, the closing direction in which the door character (left and right door members) moves from the initial position to the movable position in the closing direction. The movement time is equal to the opening direction movement time in which the door accessories (left and right door members) move from the movable position to the initial position in the opening direction, but the door accessories (left and right door members) are moved to the predetermined position. Since the holding time held at the movable position (post-movement position holding time) is different, the operating time TD2 of the movable role in the medium jackpot production is longer than the operating time TD1 of the movable role in the variable role production. is configured to last longer. According to this configuration, when the variable accessory presentation is executed during the execution of the variation display of the big win and the jackpot accessory presentation is executed during the execution of the big win game performed after the end of the variation display of the big win. In other words, even if the performance is performed a plurality of times between the start of the variable display of the big win and the end of the big win game, the operation times of the door accessories (left and right door members) are different. Even if the operation order of (the left and right door members) is the same, it is possible to give different impressions to the player, and to further enrich the variation of the performance of the character. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance performed during the execution of the big hit variation display, and the operation time TD1 of the door role during the execution of the big win game after the stop of the big win variation display. Although it has been exemplified that the operation time TD2 of the door role in the role production is different, it is not limited to this. The operation time TD1 of the object and the operation of the door role in the jackpot middle role performance performed during execution of a certain jackpot game (jackpot game performed after stopping the jackpot variation display different from the certain jackpot variation display). The time TD2 may be different. That is, irrespective of whether or not there is a relationship between the big win variation display and the big win game triggered by the same one big win, the door in the during-variation performance that is performed during the execution of one big win variation display. The operation time TD1 of the accessory may be different from the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the middle jackpot performance performed during execution of one big win game. According to this, in the same way as the above effect, even in the role production (second role production) using the same door role, different impressions can be given to the player. Variations can be made even more abundant. In addition, regarding the operation time TD1 of the door role in the variable character production, it is suggested that the SP reach develops from N reach to SP reach before the development of SP reach (after the establishment of reach to before the development of SP reach). Rather than operating time, in the scene of the win-loss branch after the development of the SP reach (the scene of the branch where the final result of the SP reach shows the content indicating the big hit or the content indicating the loss), the variable during the jackpot winning. By constructing the operation time of the performance to be longer, it is possible to further enrich variations of the character performance within one big win variation (within one big win variation display). Here, as a modification, the operating time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance may be longer than the operating time TD2 of the door role in the big hit medium role performance. With such a configuration, even during the jackpot game, which is a limited execution period (the end of the execution period may be hastened depending on the state of the ball entering the big winning opening 54), the execution period To further arouse a player's sense of expectation by making it possible to complete a jackpot mid-accessory performance as much as possible and to make the execution time of the variable-time accessory performance executed during a predetermined variable time longer. can be done.

As a modification, a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) or a specific movable accessory (movable accessory 24
) is held at a predetermined movable position, the movable accessory may be transformed into another form or combined with other movable accessories to form a complete body. In addition, by differentiating the closing direction movement time and opening direction movement time of the door character in the variable character production from the closing direction movement time and opening direction movement time of the door character in the big hit medium character production, the fluctuation The operating time TD1 of the door role in the middle role performance may be different from the operating time TD2 of the door role in the big win middle role performance. Further, as described above, the operation time TD2 of the door character in the middle role production of the big hit may be shorter than the operation time TD1 of the door character in the middle role production of the variable. However, the operating time TD1 of the door role in the variable role performance and the operating time TD2 of the door role in the big win medium role performance may be configured to be the same time. In addition, when the variable character production is executed multiple times during the variable display of the pattern, as described above, for example, the execution time of the variable character production performed before the SP reach development is longer than the SP reach development time. It may be configured so that the execution time of the variable character production (variable character production that informs the confirmation of the big hit) performed in the scene of the win-lose branch is longer, or conversely, the SP reach development The execution time of the variable character production (variable character production that informs the confirmation of the big hit) that is performed in the scene of the win-loss branch after the SP reach development is longer than the execution time of the variable character production that is performed before. It may be configured to be a short time. In addition, the movement pattern of the door character (operation distance, movement order, movement speed, etc.) in the variable character production and the movement pattern of the door character (operation distance, movement order, movement speed, etc.) in the jackpot medium character production can be different.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light emission mode of the character lamp during the variable character production is configured to be different from the light emission mode of the character lamp during the big hit character production. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(A), during the execution of the variable character production (for example, the variable character production before SP reach development), the character lamp emits a predetermined light color (blue). to emit light. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(B), during execution of the big-hit character effect, the character object lamp emits light in a specific emission color (rainbow color). In this way, by differentiating the luminescence color of the character lamp between the variable character effect and the big win character effect, the player's interest in the door character is increased from the start of the variable display to the end of the big win game. It is possible to attract not only the action but also the light emission color of the character lamp, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the character performance. Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 70, the role lamp of the door role may be configured to emit white light instead of the non-light emitting state (in that case, the "non-light emitting state" in this time chart may be Note that "light emitting" is replaced with "white light emitting").

In addition, in the performance of the variable character at the time of the hit-drop branch after the SP reach development, the character lamp of the door character may be configured to emit light in a specific luminous color (rainbow color). According to this, even if the variable character effect is performed twice during one variation display, the luminous colors of the character lamps are different, so even if the door character moves the same, the player will not be able to Different impressions can be given to the player, and variations of the performance of the character can be further enriched.

≪Limitation of execution of emphasis effect and over winning effect ≫
Next, the execution restriction when the conditions for execution of the emphasized effect and the over-winning effect are satisfied will be described. FIG. 71(A) is a time chart when the execution of the emphasized effect is restricted, and FIG. 71(B) is a time chart when the execution of the over winning effect is restricted.

As described above, the emphasizing effect can be executed by satisfying the emphasizing effect execution condition during execution of the big win game, and the over winning effect is over winning during the execution of the big win game (one round game). It can be executed when the performance execution condition is satisfied, but even if the emphasized performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition are satisfied, if the special performance described later is being executed or is scheduled to be executed, Execution of the special effect and/or the over winning effect is restricted. That is, when the special effect is being executed when the emphasized effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied, or when the emphasized effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied, the special effect is executed. is scheduled (if it is determined to be executed in a special effect execution lottery), even if the emphasized effect execution condition and / over winning effect execution condition are satisfied, the emphasized effect and / or Execution of the over winning effect is restricted (stopped). Note that the time chart in FIG. 71 shows the case where the emphasized effect execution condition is satisfied during execution of the special effect and the case where the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied. If the execution condition for the emphasis effect is satisfied during the middle), or if the execution condition for the over winning effect is satisfied, if the timing to start executing the special effect arrives while the emphasis effect or over winning effect is being executed, it is being executed. It is configured to stop the emphasis effect and the over winning effect on the way. As a modified example, when the emphasizing effect execution condition is satisfied before the special effect is executed (while the special effect is not being executed), or when the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied, the emphasizing effect and the over winning effect are executed. If the execution start timing of the special effect arrives during execution, unlike the case where the condition for executing the emphasized effect is satisfied during the execution of the special effect or the condition for executing the over winning effect is satisfied, the emphasized effect being executed Alternatively, the over winning effect may be executed to the end without being interrupted in the middle. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the emphasized effect or the over-winning effect ends in the middle.

Here, the special effect of the present embodiment is a predetermined effect that can be performed during execution of a special game (big win game or small win game), for example, the following effects are exemplified.

(1) Suspension continuation suggestive effect As described above, the suspension continuation suggestion effect (also referred to as the suspension continuance suggestion effect) is a performance that suggests that the suspension continuum is occurring. It should be noted that "reservation within the reservation" is a special symbol related to this preceding operation reservation ball when the result of the judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding operation reservation ball is a big hit. A big win is expected to occur in one or more succeeding operation-reserving balls present at a predetermined timing from the permission of judging whether a symbol is right or wrong to the end of a big win game executed with the big win as a trigger. It means that the operation retention ball (also referred to as “jackpot retention”) is included. Here, the reason why the execution of the emphatic effect and the over winning effect is restricted when the holding continuation suggesting effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that if the emphasizing effect or the over winning effect is executed in duplicate with the holding continuation suggesting effect, This is because the notification contents of both effects become difficult for the player to recognize, and there is a possibility that the effect of both effects is reduced. In addition, for the player, the fact that the next big hit is guaranteed (the occurrence of a pending game) is more important than the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value or that an over-winning has occurred. This is more useful information, and since it is possible to grasp that the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value by checking the display of the cumulative number of winning balls, execution of the holding consecutive suggestion effect rather than the execution of the emphatic effect or the over winning effect This is because the interest in the game increases when priority is given to .

(2) Promotion effect The promotion effect is the profit mode related to the jackpot before or at the start of the jackpot game when a big hit occurs in the variable display of special symbols (for convenience, it will be referred to as a "temporary profit mode"). After suggesting or notifying that the actual profit mode related to the big win is higher than the provisional profit mode during execution of the big win game. In other words, by suggesting whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (correct profit mode) or false (high profit mode), the jackpot is won through the series of processes. (As described above, it is a production that makes it look like a low-profit jackpot game and finally informs that it is actually a high-profit jackpot game). The types of promotion effects include variable promotion effects and round promotion effects. In addition, since the content of the probability variation promotion effect and the round promotion effect has been described above, redundant explanation is omitted. Here, the reason why the execution of the emphasis effect and the over-winning effect is restricted when the promotion effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that if the emphasis effect or the over-winning effect is executed in duplicate with the promotion effect, both effects are notified. This is because the content becomes difficult for the player to recognize, and on the contrary, there is a possibility that the effects of both effects are lowered. In addition, for the player, it is more important that the profit status of the jackpot is promoted (elevated to a variable jackpot or the roundup of the jackpot game is more important than the cumulative number of prize balls reaching a specific number or the occurrence of over-winning). ) is more useful information, and it can be understood by checking the display of the cumulative number of winning balls that the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value. This is because the interest in the game increases when priority is given to execution.

(3) Low-profit big-hit middle production If the big-hit production performed during the big-hit game is a so-called low-profit big-hit middle-hit production, the emphasized production execution condition and/or over during the execution of the low-profit big-hit production. Even if the winning effect execution conditions are satisfied, the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect are not executed. In addition, "low profit jackpot" means, for example, a jackpot type (low round jackpot) set to a relatively small number of rounds, or opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning mouth of each round A jackpot type (short open jackpot) set for a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), and after the jackpot game ends, the normal game state (low probability low base state) or time reduction game state (low probability high base state). It corresponds to the jackpot type (normal jackpot) that is the trigger to do. The reason for restricting the execution of the emphasized effect and the over winning effect when the effect during the low-profit jackpot is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that when such a low-profit jackpot is won, the emphasized effect and the over winning effect in the big win game To arouse a player's sense of satisfaction and a sense of superiority even when a winning performance is executed (even when a congratulatory performance is executed due to the cumulative number of winning balls reaching a specific value or over winning). This is because a sufficient performance effect cannot be expected. It should be noted that when the short-open jackpot is won, the number of accumulated prize balls is not displayed during the execution of the short-time round game. Even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls counter reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls, or an over-winning occurs, the emphasis effect or over-winning effect that accompanies the display of the number of accumulated prize balls will not be performed. It is no longer running.

The types of jackpots are roughly divided into high-profit jackpots in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low-profit jackpots in which the degree of advantage for the player is set relatively low. While the emphasis performance is executed when the conditions for executing the emphasis performance are satisfied during the execution of the performance during the big win performed when winning the low-profit jackpot, the emphasis performance is executed during the performance during the big win performed when the low-profit big win is won. It may be configured not to execute the emphasizing effect when the condition is satisfied.

(4) Big win end demonstration effect In this embodiment, the emphasis effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of the big win end demonstration effect, and the emphasis effect is executed during the execution of the big win end demonstration effect. The emphasizing effect and/or the over winning effect are never executed when the condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as described above, the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54 is not effectively detected within the execution time of the big win end demonstration effect, and the big win end demonstration effect is executed. The emphasis effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are not satisfied within the time. That is, in the present embodiment, it is designed so that the game ball entering the big winning opening 54 during the execution of the final round game will not be detected after the big winning end demonstration is started beyond the interval period. (That is, the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 54 in the final round game is always detected during the execution of the final round game or within the interval period immediately after that. structure), the emphasized effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of this jackpot ending demonstration effect, and the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect are repeatedly executed. never In addition, by any chance, due to some reason (for example, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified count number stays in front of the winning detection sensor inside the big winning opening 54), before the start of the jackpot end demonstration The ball entered the big prize opening 54 (at this point, the ball did not pass through the entrance detection sensor inside the big prize opening 54 and the ball was not detected), but the ball passed through the entrance detection sensor inside the big prize opening 54 during the jackpot end demonstration. Even in such a case, no prize ball is generated by the passage, and the emphasized effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are not satisfied during execution of the jackpot ending demonstration effect.

In addition, when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 just before the end of the final round game (especially when the game ball exceeds the specified count number enters), this big winning hole 54 Since the entry of the game ball is designed to be effectively detected until the end of the final round game or the interval period, the emphasis effect execution condition and the / Or if the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect is started with the establishment of the execution condition as a trigger. In that case, the emphasized effect can be continued beyond the final round game and the interval period even during the execution of the jackpot end demo effect, but as described above, the execution time of the emphasized effect (3 seconds) is Since it is set to a shorter time than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo effect, until the end of the jackpot end demo effect (until the start of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game) The emphasized effect is completed (the over winning effect may also be configured in the same way as the emphasized effect). In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, for example, the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 just before the end of the final round game to satisfy the emphasized effect execution condition and / or the over winning effect execution condition, If the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect triggered by the fulfillment of the emphasized effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are not completed by the end of the interval period, the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect The winning effect is forcibly ended when the jackpot end demo effect (jackpot end demo period) starts (even if the execution time of the emphasis effect and/or over winning effect remains at the start of the jackpot end demo effect, it is forced to end). Further, as a further modification, the execution time of the emphasis effect and/or the over winning effect is set to be shorter than the interval time (interval period), and the emphasis that is started at least by the end of the final round game The effect and/or the over-winning effect may be configured not to be executed beyond the interval period (that is, the emphasized effect and/or the over-winning effect and the jackpot end demonstration effect may not be executed in duplicate. ).

(5) First round production in small winning game As a modification of this embodiment, a so-called 1 type 2 mixed type game machine (generally model also called a small win V) is applied, even if the emphasized effect execution condition and / or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied during the execution of the first round (first round effect) of the small win game It may be configured not to execute the effect and/or the over winning effect.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the model called this small hit V has a first type of game property that executes a big hit game by stopping and displaying the variable display result of the special symbol with the big hit symbol, and the variable display result of the special symbol. A second type of game property in which a game ball entering the big winning port 54, which is in an open state by stopping and displaying a small winning symbol, passes through a specific region (V region) to execute a big winning game. equip. Therefore, when the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 passes through the specific area during execution of the small winning game, the right to develop into the big winning game is granted after the small winning game is finished. there is As a result, the first round of the small winning game is an important round game that urges the player to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 54 and pass through the specific area (referred to as "V winning"). Become. Therefore, in the first round of this small winning game, for example, characters such as "Aim for V prize!" Execution of a V prize instruction performance for displaying a message image indicating and instructing entry of a game ball into a specific area is prioritized. In other words, even if the emphasizing effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect are satisfied by the ball entering in the first round of the small winning game, the emphasizing effect and/or the over winning effect are not executed. However, in the second and subsequent rounds that are executed by passing through the specific area (V area) in the first round and becoming a big hit game, by satisfying the emphasized effect execution condition and / or the over winning effect, It is configured such that an emphasis effect and/or an over-winning effect is executed.

Also, in the first round of this small winning game, when the game ball passes through the specific area and a V winning occurs, the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 after the V winning in this first round. (For example, when the first ball entering the big winning hole 54 results in a V prize, the second and subsequent balls entering the big winning hole 54) are given a special effect (round number suggesting effect). In this special performance, the display mode (display color) of the specific object image is changed each time the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, and the development destination jackpot is won according to the display mode (display color) after the change. It may be configured to suggest the number of game rounds. More specifically, the special effect (performance suggesting the number of rounds) is that when a V win occurs, the characters "Congratulations!" Until the specified number of counts is reached), the character color of "Congratulations!" (Examples of the number of rounds include four rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, and 10 rounds. Here, if the color is rainbow, the largest number of rounds is determined). Even in that case, priority is given to the execution of the special effect (round number suggesting effect) that is performed after the V prize, and even if the emphasized effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied, the emphasized effect and/or over It is preferable to limit the execution of the winning effect.

In the above-described embodiment, if the emphasizing effect execution condition and/or the over winning effect execution condition are satisfied while the special effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the emphasizing effect and/or the over winning effect is restricted. In addition to this, if a special effect is executed during the execution of the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect, the execution of the special effect is triggered, The execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over winning effect may be forcibly terminated or suspended. When the execution of the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect is temporarily interrupted by the start of the execution of the special effect, the execution of the emphasized effect and/or the over winning effect is resumed when the execution of the special effect ends. It is preferable to

≪Power off recovery during jackpot type display≫
Next, a description will be given of a case where the power supply is interrupted while the first specific effect (jackpot type display) indicating the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed is being performed during the execution of the jackpot game. . FIG. 72 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during execution of the jackpot type display.

In this embodiment, during execution of the jackpot start demonstration, the screen of the effect display device 70 displays a jackpot type display (super longevity jackpot display, Kotobuki jackpot display, happy jackpot display) that suggests the jackpot type that triggers the execution of the jackpot game. display) is performed to suggest or inform the player how many rounds the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed is. Specifically, the “super longevity big win display” is a display in which the characters “super longevity big win!!!” During the execution of the starting demonstration, the characters "Kotobuki big win!" are displayed and the background is displayed in red. The background is displayed in blue. When the super longevity jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display during execution of the jackpot game (jackpot start demo), it is suggested or notified that the jackpot game currently being executed is a 16-round game (superlife jackpot ), and when Kotobuki jackpot display or Ki jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display, it is suggested or notified that the jackpot game currently being executed is a 4-round jackpot game. (It is suggested or announced that you have won the Kotobuki jackpot or Ki jackpot). When power failure occurs during execution of this jackpot game (jackpot start demo) and the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is restarted by recovery from the power cut, the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is interrupted by the power cut. The jackpot type display that had been on is not restored, and after the jackpot game (jackpot start demonstration) is restarted, a power failure recovery image (power off) showing the words "recovering" return screen) is displayed. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when a power outage occurs during the execution of the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) and the power cut is restored and the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is restarted, the main control The restoration of the display by the effect display device 70 is earlier than the restoration of the display by the display device 27 (round display to be described later) (that is, after the power is restored, the effect display After the display of the device 70 is restored, the display of the main control display device 27 is restored, that is, the lighting display of the round indicator lamp 77 is restored after the display of the effect display device 70 is restored). When the power failure is restored and the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is restarted, the jackpot type display is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 when the display by the effect display device 70 is restored. A power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) is displayed. This power-off recovery image is continuously displayed until the end of the big win game (end of the final round or end of the big win end demonstration). In this way, when the power interruption is restored and the big win game is restarted, the notification of the recovery from the power interruption is prioritized over the execution of the jackpot type display interrupted by the power interruption, thereby making it possible for the player. It is possible to quickly inform that the power supply is restored and the big win game can be restarted. Furthermore, after the recovery from the power cut, by prioritizing the notification of the recovery from the power cut rather than the execution of the round display interrupted by the power cut, the power cut returns to the player and the jackpot game is played. It is possible to quickly notify that the operation can be restarted. It should be noted that the aforementioned recovery from power interruption (power recovery) is recovery from power interruption without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820), and recovery from power interruption without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820) In the case of return, the game state is shifted to the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), and the decorative symbols are returned to the state in which the combination of "331" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as a modification, a power failure occurs during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration, and after the power failure recovery image is displayed as the power failure is restored, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the power failure recovery image is displayed. 5 seconds after it is displayed), or with the end of the jackpot start demonstration, return to the normal jackpot production (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity jackpot production, Kotobuki jackpot production, and joy jackpot production). (That is, the normal round effect may be resumed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or from the start of the first round). In addition, a round production screen corresponding to the type of the jackpot production (super longevity jackpot production, Kotobuki jackpot production, and joy jackpot production) is displayed. A big hit round screen (for example, a production screen in which five characters are displayed on a rainbow background), and a Kotobuki big hit round screen in the case of a Kotobuki big hit production (for example, two characters on a red background) A performance screen on which a character introduction is displayed), and in the case of a happy jackpot performance, a happy jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen on which a character introduction for one person is displayed on a blue background) is displayed. ing. Further, as another modified example, a power failure occurs during execution of the jackpot start demonstration, and after the power failure recovery image is displayed as the power failure is restored, a predetermined time elapses (for example, power failure 5 seconds after the return image is displayed), or when the jackpot start demonstration ends, the screen returns to the special jackpot middle screen after power failure recovery (special round screen after power failure recovery). (That is, the normal round effect may be resumed after the lapse of a predetermined period of time or at the start of the first round). It should be noted that the recovery from power loss described above (power recovery) is recovery from power loss without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820), and recovery from power loss with RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820). In the case of return, the game state is shifted to the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), and the decorative symbols are returned to the state in which the combination of "331" is stopped and displayed.

≪Recovery from power failure during round display≫
Next, a description will be given of a case where the power is cut off while the second specific effect (round display) indicating the number of rounds of the round game currently being executed is being performed while the jackpot game is being executed. FIG. 73 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during round display.

In the present embodiment, during execution of the round game of the jackpot game, a round display is performed on the screen of the effect display device 70 to suggest or inform what round the round game is currently being executed, The number of rounds of the round game currently being executed is suggested or reported to the player. This round display corresponds to the display content of the round display area 730 described above, but it is not displayed during the jackpot start demo and jackpot end demo, but is displayed during the round game even during the jackpot game. (Although it may be displayed during the interval period, in such a configuration, it is preferable to display the round corresponding to the certain round game in the interval period after the end of the certain round game). Further, during execution of the jackpot game, the main control display device 27 lights up a round indicator lamp 77 for notifying the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed. The lighting display of the round indicator lamp 77 is configured to be lit and displayed during the jackpot start demonstration, the jackpot end demonstration, and the interval period in addition to the round game during the jackpot game. At this time, in the present embodiment, when a power cut occurs during execution of a jackpot game (round game), and the jackpot game (round game) is restarted by returning the power cut, the main control display device 27, the restoration of the display by the effect display device 70 is earlier than the restoration of the display by the effect display device 70. After the display of the control display device 27 is restored, that is, the display of the effect display device 70 is restored, the lighting display of the round indicator lamp 77 is restored). Then, when the power cut is restored and the jackpot game (round game) is restarted, when the display by the effect display device 70 is restored, the round display is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70, and the aforementioned power-off recovery is performed. An image (power-off recovery screen) is displayed. This power-off recovery image is continuously displayed until the end of the big win game (end of the final round game or end of the big win end demo). In other words, after the recovery from the power cut, by prioritizing the notification of the recovery from the power cut rather than the execution of the round display interrupted by the power cut, the player can resume the jackpot game after the power cut is restored. It is possible to quickly notify that something has happened. It should be noted that the recovery from power loss described above (power recovery) is recovery from power loss without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820), and recovery from power loss with RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820). In the case of return, the normal game state (low-probability, low-base state) is entered, the decorative symbols are returned to the state in which the combination of "331" is stopped, and the round indicator lamp 77 is turned off. is returned.

On the other hand, on the main control display device 27, after the power is restored, the round indicator lamp 77 is lit and displayed, and the specified number of rounds of the restarted big win game is displayed. Therefore, when the power is restored, the player can first check the power failure recovery image on the effect display device 70 and then check the round indicator lamp 77 on the main control display device 27. . In this manner, the display of the effect display device 70 is restored first, and the player is quickly notified that the power is being restored from the power-off, so that the player can be relieved. Subsequently, the display of the main control display device 27 is restored, and the round indicator lamp 77 is illuminated to display the type of the jackpot game that was interrupted due to the power failure (regular round illuminated by the round indicator lamp 77). It is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of security by informing the player that he or she can obtain a profit for a few minutes. It should be noted that the aforementioned recovery from power failure (recovery of power supply) is recovery from power failure without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820).
0 operation), the normal game state (low-probability, low-base state) is entered, and the decorative symbols are returned to a state in which a combination of "331" is stopped and displayed. , and the round indicator lamp 77 is returned to extinguished display.

In addition, as described above, when the jackpot game is restarted due to the restoration of the power supply, the number of accumulated prize balls is not displayed during execution of the restarted jackpot game, and the game balls enter the jackpot 54. Even if the ball is played, the update of the accumulated number of prize balls display, the count-up effect, the emphasized effect (enlarged display), etc. are not executed. Also, even if game balls in excess of the prescribed number into the big winning opening 54 (over winning) occur during execution of the restarted big winning game, the over winning effect is not executed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general prize winning opening 64 during execution of the restarted jackpot game, updating of the display of the number of accumulated prize balls, count-up effect, and bonus winning effect are not executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the power interruption recovery image is continuously displayed on the effect display device 70 until the jackpot game is finished after the jackpot game is restarted due to the restoration of the power interruption, and the jackpot type is displayed. The display, the round display, the cumulative number of winning balls display, the special winning presentation (over winning presentation), and the general winning presentation (bonus winning presentation) are not executed. As a modified example, when the jackpot game is restarted due to the restoration of the power supply, the display (updated display) of the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed, and the emphasis effect is performed even if the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied. It may be configured so that it will not be broken. In addition, when the jackpot game is restarted due to the restoration of the power supply, the display (update display) of the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed, but the over winning effect is not performed even if the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied. It may be configured as It should be noted that the recovery from power loss described above (power recovery) is recovery from power loss without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820), and recovery from power loss with RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820). In the case of return, the game state is shifted to the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), and the decorative symbols are returned to the state in which the combination of "331" is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that, as a modified example, a power failure occurs during execution of a certain round game, and after the power failure recovery image is displayed as the power failure is restored, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the power failure recovery image 5 seconds after the is displayed), or triggered by the end of the certain round game, normal jackpot production (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity jackpot production, Kotobuki jackpot production, and joy jackpot production ) (that is, when a predetermined time elapses, or, for example, when the power is turned off during the 3rd round round game and the power is turned off and the power is restored, the 4th round round game is started) (You may return to the normal round production from ). In addition, as described above, the round production screen corresponding to the type of the production during the jackpot (super longevity jackpot production, Kotobuki jackpot production, joyful jackpot production) is displayed, that is, when the production pattern during the jackpot is the super longevity jackpot production In the case of a super longevity jackpot round screen (for example, a production screen in which five characters are displayed on a rainbow background), in the case of a longevity jackpot production, a longevity jackpot round screen (for example, on a red background A performance screen in which character introductions for two characters are displayed), and in the case of a joyful winning performance, a joyful winning round screen (for example, a performance screen in which a character introduction for one person is displayed on a blue background) is displayed. It is configured as follows. In this case, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during execution of the jackpot game after the round game is restarted, but the number of accumulated prize balls is not displayed before the power is turned off, but is started from "0". The accumulated winning balls counter is also cleared to "0" and the game is started. However, even if the game ball starts from "0", when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is updated, the count-up effect, the emphasized effect (enlarged display), etc. When the number of game balls entering the big winning port 54 exceeding the prescribed number (over winning) occurs during execution of the big winning game, the over winning performance is executed, and similarly, the restarted big winning game is executed. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during this period, updating of the display of the number of accumulated winning balls, count-up effect, and bonus winning effect are executed. It should be noted that the recovery from power loss described above (power recovery) is recovery from power loss without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820), and recovery from power loss with RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820). In the case of return, the game state is shifted to the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), and the decorative symbols are returned to the state in which the combination of "331" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as another modification, after a power failure occurs during execution of the round game and the power failure recovery image is displayed along with the recovery of the power failure, a predetermined time elapses (for example, power failure recovery 5 seconds after the image is displayed) or when the round game ends, return to the dedicated jackpot screen after power failure recovery (dedicated round screen after power failure recovery) It may be configured (that is, if a predetermined time has elapsed, or, for example, if the power is turned off during the 3rd round round game and the power is turned off and restored, the normal round production will be performed from the start of the 4th round round game. may be returned), in the case of such a configuration, the number of accumulated winning balls is not displayed during execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 54. Even if it does, update of the display of the accumulated number of prize balls, count-up effect, emphasized effect (enlarged display), etc. are not executed, and furthermore, during execution of the restarted big win game, the prescribed number to the big winning hole 54 is exceeded. Even if the game ball enters the game ball (over winning), the over winning effect is not executed, and similarly, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during execution of the restarted jackpot game, accumulation is made. The update of the number of prize balls display, the count-up effect, and the bonus winning effect are not executed. It should be noted that the recovery from power loss described above (power recovery) is recovery from power loss without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820), and recovery from power loss with RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820). In the case of return, the game state is shifted to the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), and the decorative symbols are returned to the state in which the combination of "331" is stopped and displayed.

As described above, the main effects achieved in the third embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the third embodiment, when the emphasized effect display appears and/or disappears when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value, a special effect display that applies a predetermined special effect is performed. Since the degree of emphasis by this emphatic effect display can be dramatically improved, it is possible to further impress the player that the number of accumulated winning balls has reached a specific value, and the emphatic effect display is possible. By clarifying the start and end of (that is, by clarifying the front and back of the division when the emphasis display during the jackpot game is one division of the series), the game during the series is sharpened. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, it is possible to increase the rarity of the emphasized effect display by preventing a plurality of display patterns of the emphasized effect display from overlapping at the same time. Further, the execution time of the emphasis effect display is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, thereby emphasizing based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 54 just before the end of the final round game. Even when the performance execution condition is established and the emphasized performance display is performed, the emphasized performance display is completed within the big win end demonstration period, so the big win game ends when the emphasized performance display exceeds the big win end demonstration period. It is not performed until the later variable display (the end of the big win game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation can be clearly separated), and the player misunderstands the current game situation. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, when executing a highly rare production (special production) or an important production (special production) for the player during execution of the jackpot game, the cumulative number of prize balls is set to a specific value. By restricting the execution of the emphasized effect display even if the condition for executing the emphasized effect is satisfied with reaching to, the execution of the special effect with high priority can be reliably secured, and the game against the occurrence of the special effect Since it is possible to prevent the expectation and interest of the player from being lowered, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, when executing a highly rare effect (special effect) or an important effect (special effect) for the player during the execution of the jackpot game, the special prize opening 54 is specified. By restricting the execution of the over-winning performance even if game balls exceeding the count number are entered, the execution of the special performance with a high priority can be ensured, and the game against the occurrence of the special performance can be ensured. Since it is possible to prevent the expectation and interest of the player from being lowered, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, when a power failure occurs during execution of a big win game, priority is given to restoring the effect display device 70, which is the area most watched by the player when the power failure is restored, and the power failure is restored. The player is quickly notified that the jackpot game that has been interrupted due to power failure can be resumed, and when the display of the main control display device 27 is restored, information indicating the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed. By displaying it, the player can clearly distinguish the type of jackpot game currently being executed (the number of winning rounds), thus complicating the various notifications and effect displays performed when the power is restored. In addition, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the jackpot game restarted by the restoration of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine and the interest of the game. .

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment and/or the third embodiment described above. are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted, and mainly different parts will be explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment and/or the third embodiment, except for special cases.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described in order. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a setting function that enables setting of winning probability of winning/failure determination of special symbols, and a performance information display function that displays game performance information.

<Board composition>
First, the board configuration of the gaming machine 20 of the fourth embodiment will be briefly described. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the first embodiment), the game balls flowing down the left area PA1 are mainly the first starting port 51 arranged below the center decoration 21, the general A ball can be entered into any one of the winning openings 61-63. On the other hand, a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any one of the operating gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54, which are mainly arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. is. A game ball entering each winning hole is discharged to the back side of the game board 20 while the winning of the game ball is detected by each winning hole switch. In addition, an out port 29 is provided at the lower end of the game area PA for discharging the game balls that have flowed down without entering the winning holes to the back side of the game board 20 . In this embodiment, the number of game balls launched into the game area PA and provided for the game, that is, the number of balls entered into each winning opening or out opening 29 of the game area PA and discharged to the back side of the game board 10 The number of game balls (played balls) is counted by a played ball detection switch 891 which will be described later. Among the game areas PA provided with various prize-winning openings, the method of shooting the game ball so as to flow down to the left side area PA1 is called "left hitting", and the game ball flows down to the right side area PA2. The hitting method of shooting a game ball so as to cause it to move is called "right hitting".

<Electrical Configuration of Game Machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. In this fourth embodiment, the main control board 100 includes a setting key switch 810 and a RAM clear switch 82, which will be described later in detail.
0, a performance display monitor 830 and the like are mounted. The main control board 100 also includes a played ball detection switch 891 for detecting a game ball ejected from the game area PA, and a frame opening switch for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1. 892 and the like are electrically connected. The played ball detection switch 891 and frame open switch 892 output respective detection signals to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104 . Also in this fourth embodiment, the main control display device 27 (see FIG. 64) includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second Various display means such as a special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, a normal symbol reservation lamp 76, a round indicator lamp 77, a state indicator lamp 78, a right hand indicator lamp 79, and an error indicator lamp Er are provided. Other configurations are basically the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

<Major functional configuration of game machines>
Next, various functions of the gaming machine (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200) of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is a functional block diagram extracted and shown. As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the main control board 100 of the fourth embodiment is provided with power-on transition mode control means 175 and performance information management means 176, which are different from the first embodiment. ing.

The power-on transition mode control means 175 controls four modes (a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM clear mode, and a game mode, which will be described later) that shift according to a selection operation performed when the gaming machine is powered on. As shown in FIG. 76, the power-on control means 175 includes setting change processing means 175A, setting confirmation processing means 175B, and RAM clear processing means 175C. The setting change processing means 175A executes setting change processing when the setting change mode is selected when the game machine is powered on. The setting confirmation processing means 175B executes setting confirmation processing when the setting confirmation mode is selected when the game machine is powered on. The RAM clear processing means 175C executes RAM clear processing when the RAM clear mode is selected when the game machine is powered on. Note that these setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RAM clear processing are executed in the main control side main processing (see FIG. 35) that is performed when the game machine is powered on. On the other hand, when a game mode (a mode that enables a game) is selected when the game machine is powered on, each means 110 to 190 provided on the main control board 100 performs processing related to the progress of the game (power off). (including time processing) are executed. That is, in the present embodiment, each means 110 to 190 provided on the main control board 100 performs processing of the game mode (processing related to the progress of the game (power It becomes game mode processing means for executing )) including processing at the time of disconnection. In addition, the game mode in the present embodiment is a state that allows a series of games such as special symbol/normal symbol success determination processing, variable display processing, and special game execution processing (state that allows the game to be executed) ). Therefore, at least the processing performed after the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 37) is activated is included in the processing within the game mode. The contents of the transition modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) when the power is turned on will be described later.

The performance information management unit 176 executes processing related to measurement and display of game performance information as processing for managing game performance information. As shown in FIG. 76, the performance information management means 176 comprises performance information measurement control means 176A and performance information display control means 176B. The performance information measurement control means 176A executes processing for measuring game performance information. The performance information display control means 176B executes processing for displaying game performance information. The process of measuring and displaying the game performance information is repeatedly executed at a predetermined interrupt cycle (4 ms) in the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). However, part of the process of measuring and displaying the game performance information may be executed in the main control side main process (see FIG. 35) that is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The contents of the game performance information measurement and display will be described later.

Next, the main control board unit 100U of the fourth embodiment will be explained. 77 is a front view showing the main control board unit 100U of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing the performance display monitor 830 mounted on the main control board 100. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 77, the main control board unit 100U includes a main control board 100 and a main control board case 100A that houses the main control board 100. As shown in FIG.

The main control board case 100A includes a bottom case 100B that covers the solder surface side of the main control board 100, and a top case 100C that covers the component mounting surface side of the main control board 100 such as electronic and electrical components. A so-called caulking mechanism 100D is provided at the end of the bottom case 100B and the bottom case 100B in which the top case 100C is attached to the bottom case 100B and aligned in the front-rear direction. Both the bottom case 100B and the top case 100C are formed by molding means such as injection molding using a colorless and transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate). configured to be visible.

The main control board 100 is configured by using a rectangular printed wiring board as a board, and on the component mounting surface side, a main control microcomputer 110 (see FIG. 74), a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN5, a setting key switch 810, a RAM clear A switch 820, a performance display monitor 830, and the like are provided. The main control board 100 is screwed and fixed to the inner surface of the main control board case 100A (top case 100B) using a plurality of screws.

The setting key switch 810 is a key switch mechanism that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by rotating a setting change key (dedicated key managed by a game clerk or the like) inserted into a keyhole.

The RAM clear switch 820 is an operation button that is operated to clear the RAM when the game machine is powered on, as described in the first embodiment. This RAM clear switch 820 is an operation switch that can be pressed, and is in an ON state when operated, and is in an OFF state when not operated. Although details will be described later, this RAM clear switch 820 can set (change) the set value of the probability of winning a big win (probability of winning a big win in the judgment of special symbols) in cooperation with the setting key switch. Also serves as a setting change switch. Although the RAM clear switch 820 is mounted on the main control board 100 in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 820 may be mounted on the power supply board 500 as in the first embodiment.

The setting key switch 810 and the RAM clear switch 820 are covered by a small door 100E which is swingably provided on the top case 100C. 810 and RAM clear switch 820 can be exposed (that is, they can be operated).

As shown in FIG. 78, the performance display monitor 830 comprises four-digit display sections 831-834. Specifically, the performance display monitor 830 includes a first display section 831, a second display section 832, a third display section 833, and a fourth display section 834 in order from left to right. The display portions 831 to 834 of each digit are composed of seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 arranged in a figure-of-eight shape and one LED segment SG8 formed in a dot point shape. In this way, the display portions 831 to 834 of each digit are each composed of eight LED segments S
It is configured with G1 to SG8. Therefore, the display units 501 to 504 of each digit can display information such as numbers 0 to 9, characters, and symbols by selectively lighting the eight LED segments SG1 to SG8. . In the following, in order to distinguish between the LED segments SG1 to SG8, the seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 forming the so-called 7 segments are also referred to as "7 segments SG1 to SG7", and one dot point forming the The LED segment SG8 is also called "dot segment SG8". In this embodiment, the four display portions 831 to 834 are controlled by dynamic lighting control for each interrupt (every 4 ms), first display portion 831→second display portion 832→third display portion 833→fourth display portion 834→ The object to be lit is sequentially switched from the first display portion 831 to . You can make it look like Each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

Although the details will be described later, the upper two-digit display units 831 and 832 of the performance display monitor 830 are identification display units ( identification segment) 830a. The lower two-digit display units 833 and 834 of the performance display monitor 830 constitute a ratio display unit (ratio segment) 830b that displays a numerical value (base value) indicating game performance information. Also, in this embodiment, the set value of the jackpot probability (in this embodiment, the set value is set in six steps from “1” to “6”) is displayed on the fourth display section 834 . Various information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 in this manner can be visually recognized from the outside through the transparent main control board case 100A. As a modification of the present embodiment, instead of displaying the set value of the probability of a big hit on the performance information display monitor 830, a dedicated display device for displaying the set value may be provided.

Next, basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

<Setting value>
First, the setting value of the jackpot probability will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the winning probability (jackpot probability) that the result of judging whether a special symbol is a big hit is determined by six levels of set values. In this embodiment, there are six levels of set values, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Below, when the setting value is 1, "setting value 1", when the setting value is 2, "setting value 2", when the setting value is 3, "setting value 3", and when the setting value is 4 The case where the setting value is 5 is also called "setting value 4", the case where the setting value is 5 is called "setting value 5", and the case where the setting value is 6 is also called "setting value 6". In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, only one type of set value may be set to determine the winning probability (jackpot probability) that the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the special symbol is a big hit (that is, one set value (set value A gaming machine with a one-step setting having only 1) may be adopted). As a result, in this one-stage setting game machine, only "1" is displayed as the current set value in the setting confirmation mode, and processing (for example, set value Even if the operation to change is performed, the setting value is not changed from "1" to another numerical value such as "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → ...) By doing so, it is possible to design a gaming machine having substantially the same software and hardware configuration as a gaming machine equipped with a setting change function (a gaming machine having multiple levels of set values).

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability for each setting value increases by one step in the order of setting value 1<setting value 2<setting value 3<setting value 4<setting value 5<setting value 6. FIG. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state, the jackpot probability when the setting value is 1 is "1/320", the jackpot probability when the setting value is 2 is "1/301", and the setting value is 3 The jackpot probability at one time is "1/280", the jackpot probability at set value 4 is "1/260", the jackpot probability at set value 5 is "1/240", and the set value is 6. The jackpot probability of is "1/220". Further, when the game state is a high probability state, the jackpot probability is "1/102" when the set value is 1, the jackpot probability is "1/95" when the set value is 2, and the jackpot probability is "1/95" when the set value is 3. The jackpot probability is "1/89", the jackpot probability when the set value is 4 is "1/82", the jackpot probability when the set value is 5 is "1/76", and the set value is 6. The probability is "1/70". In each setting value 1 to 6, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to be the same ratio (in this embodiment, the low probability The denominator of the jackpot probability in the state and the denominator of the jackpot probability in the high probability state are rounded to the first decimal place). In other words, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (change rate of the jackpot probability) is the same regardless of which set value 1 to 6 is selected. It should be noted that the set values of the six stages are displayed on the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 as described above.

<Judgement of special symbols>
Next, the propriety determination of the special design of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol success/failure lottery table of the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, a special symbol success/failure lottery table corresponding to each set value 1 to 6 is provided, a special symbol success/failure lottery table corresponding to the currently set value is selected, and special symbol success/failure determination processing is performed. is set to run. Here, FIG. 80(A) is a special symbol success/failure lottery table corresponding to the setting value 1, FIG. 80(B) is a special symbol success/failure lottery table corresponding to the setting value 2, and FIG. 80(C) corresponds to the setting value 3. special symbol success or failure lottery table, FIG. 80(D) is a special symbol success or failure lottery table corresponding to set value 4, FIG. 80(E) is a special symbol success or failure lottery table corresponding to set value 5, FIG. It is a special symbol success/failure lottery table corresponding to value 6.

As in the first embodiment, each special symbol success/fail lottery table is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, and the special symbol probability variation function is activated. It includes a table that is referenced in the game state (high probability state). Also, in each special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol per random number value and the result of the success/failure determination of the special symbol (big hit, loss) are associated with each other. In addition, in FIG. 80, the jackpot probability is added as a reference value.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), when the set value is 1, in the low probability state, a big hit occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in the high probability state, the special symbol. If the winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 643", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/320", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/102".

As shown in FIG. 80(B), when the set value is 2, in the low probability state, a big hit occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 217", and in the high probability state, the special symbol. If the winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 686", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is "1/301", and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is "1/95".

As shown in FIG. 80(C), when the set value is 3, in the low probability state, a big hit occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 233", and in the high probability state, the special symbol. If the winning random number value falls within the range of "0 to 735", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/280", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/89".

As shown in FIG. 80(D), when the set value is 4, in a low probability state, a big hit occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 251", and in a high probability state, a special symbol. If the winning random number value falls within the range of "0 to 791", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is "1/260", and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is "1/82".

As shown in FIG. 80(E), when the set value is 5, in the low probability state, a big hit occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 272", and in the high probability state, the special symbol. If the winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 857", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is "1/240", and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is "1/76".

As shown in FIG. 80(F), when the set value is 6, in a low probability state, a big hit occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 297", and in a high probability state, a special symbol. If the winning random number falls within the range of "0 to 935", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/220" and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/7".

<Jack type>
Next, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is "big win", the special symbol big win symbol table shown in FIG. 81 is referenced to determine the big win type (big win symbol, symbol group). In addition, as described above, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means a special after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the operation of the probability variation function of the symbol. Although the details will be described later, when a specific jackpot is won, the probability variation function of special symbols is activated after the jackpot game ends, and the number of times the special symbols are varied and displayed is the specified number of ST times after the jackpot game ends. (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). In addition, even if you win either the "specific jackpot" or the "normal jackpot", after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function will be activated, and the calculation will start after the jackpot game is over. It continues until the number of fluctuation display times of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times). In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol start operating at the same time and end at the same time, so the "variation time reduction number" and the "electric support number" are the same. (Therefore, in FIG. 81, "number of fluctuation time reductions" and "electric sapo operation number of times" are described in the same column).

FIG. 81(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for special symbol per symbol random number, symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electric support frequency), regulation round of big hit game The number and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in each round are associated with each other. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, two kinds of jackpot types (symbol groups), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B), are set.

When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is large. It is set to a long open time of “29 seconds”, which allows the possibility that the number of game balls entering the prize winning opening 54 will reach a prescribed number (regular count number: 10). Also, if you win the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of fluctuation time reduction "100 times", the electric The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the variable probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state is terminated by the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaching the specified ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is large. It is set to a long open time of “29 seconds”, which allows the possibility that the number of game balls entering the prize winning opening 54 will reach a prescribed number (regular count number: 10). In addition, when winning the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" in the first special pattern, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number "100 times", the electric The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this predetermined number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state is terminated by the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaching a predetermined number (100 times), the game state is shifted to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

FIG. 81(B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, for special symbol per symbol random number, symbol group (stop symbol), big hit type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electric support frequency), regulation round of big hit game The number and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in each round are associated with each other. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, 8R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) are set as two types of jackpot types (symbol groups).

When the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is "8 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is large. It is set to a long open time of “29 seconds”, which allows the possibility that the number of game balls entering the prize winning opening 54 will reach a prescribed number (regular count number: 10). Also, if you win the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time reduction number "100 times", the electric The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the variable probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state is terminated by the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaching the specified ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is large. It is set to a long opening time of “29 seconds”, which allows the possibility that the number of game balls entering the prize winning opening 54 will reach a prescribed number (regular count number: 10). Also, if you win the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" in the second special pattern, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time reduction number "100 times", the electric The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this predetermined number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state is terminated by the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaching a predetermined number (100 times), the game state is shifted to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

Here, whether or not the number of variable display times of the special symbols has reached the specified number of ST times or the predetermined number of times is determined by the total number of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. A determination is made based on whether or not a predetermined number of times has been reached. It should be noted that, as a modification, the number of times of fluctuation display of the special symbol, which is the subject of the game, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is specified ST
The determination may be made based on the number of times or whether or not a predetermined number of times has been reached.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 79, the normal symbol game of the fourth embodiment (normal symbol winning probability, opening time of normal electric accessory 522, etc.) is the normal symbol game of the first embodiment (normal symbol winning probability, opening time of the normal electric accessories 522, etc.), so the explanation is omitted.

<Number of prize balls>
Next, the number of prize balls in the fourth embodiment will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the number of prize balls set in each winning hole (the number of unit prize balls paid out based on the winning of one game ball) is "4 The second starting port 52 is set to "1", the general winning ports 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the big winning port 54 is set to "15". Note that the unit number of prize balls is not limited to the one illustrated in the fourth embodiment, and other unit number of prize balls may be applied.

<Transition mode at power on>
Next, the transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between operations at power-on and transition modes. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, there are four transition modes that can be transitioned when the game machine is turned on (when power is restored): setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, and game mode. is provided. That is, in this embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation shown in FIG. 82 at the same time as turning on the power of the game machine, it is possible to select the transition mode to be shifted to at the time of turning on the power.

As shown in FIG. 82, the operations performed when the game machine is turned on include the operation of the setting key switch 810, the operation of the RAM clear switch 820, the opening/closing operation of the front frame 2, the operation of the power switch, and the like. Whether or not the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 is determined based on the detection information of the frame opening switch 892 described above. The frame open switch 892 is turned ON when the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1, and turned OFF when the front frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1. In this embodiment, when shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the open state of the front frame 2 is detected by the frame opening switch 892). ON state), but in the case of shifting to the RAM clear mode or the game mode when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is set to the front frame 2 is not a condition. That is, in the case of shifting to the RAM clear mode or the game mode when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state where the frame open switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2) Even when the front frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is in the OFF state when the front frame 2 is closed), a predetermined operation (described later) is performed when the power is turned on. It is possible to migrate by doing. As a modification, even when the power is switched on to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state in which the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the open state of the front frame 2) is detected), that is, the state in which the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame open switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2) However, even when the front frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 detects the closed state of the front frame 2 and is in the OFF state), a predetermined operation (described later) must be performed when the power is turned on. It may be configured so that it can be migrated with In addition, the effect display device 70 is configured to display a power-off recovery image in any mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode).

In the setting change mode, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (an ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned ON, and the RAM This is a mode that shifts to when the power is turned on with the clear switch 820 turned on (when the power switch is turned on). When shifting to this setting change mode, FIG.
As shown in 3(A), the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 first displays the current set value that was set before the power was turned on (at the time of the most recent power-off). That is, when shifting to the setting change mode, first of all, it is possible to confirm the current setting value (the setting value that was already set before shifting to the setting change mode). As a modification, a predetermined setting value (for example, "1") may always be displayed regardless of the setting value already set before shifting to the setting change mode. Also, during execution of this setting change mode, the setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 820 . Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed, the display of the set values changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6"→"1"→ . . is switched in that order. At this time, when the setting key switch 810 is turned off while the desired setting value is being displayed, the setting value (desired setting value) is determined and the setting change mode ends. When the setting change mode ends, the game mode is changed to a game mode in which a game can be played, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information. When the setting change mode ends and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 switches from the set value information to the performance information, all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time. An initial display (all flashing display) is performed (details will be described later). As a modification, in the state where the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned ON, and In addition to when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 820 turned on (when the power switch is turned on), the state where the front frame 2 is opened from the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is set to the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 is turned on. While the display of the effect display device 70 is restored (especially for one second after the display is restored), specifically, while the power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) is being displayed (especially, Even if the setting key switch 810 is switched from OFF to ON during the first 1 second of the 3 seconds during which the power-off restoration image is displayed, the setting change mode may be entered. With such a configuration, even if an operation to shift to the RAM clear mode is erroneously performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. . Even in the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above, it is possible to detect that the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2). Even if it is not a condition, that is, when the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the front frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 2 is closed (the frame open switch 892 detects the closed state of the front frame 2 and is in the OFF state), it may be configured to be able to shift by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

In the setting confirmation mode, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (an ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned ON, and the RAM This is a mode that is shifted to when the power is turned on with the clear switch 820 turned off (when the power switch is turned on). 83(B), the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 displays the current set value set before the power is turned on (when the power is turned off). displayed with As a result, when shifting to the setting change mode, the current set value can be confirmed. The reason why the setting value is displayed with dots in the setting confirmation mode is to distinguish it from the display of the setting value (display without dots) when shifting to the setting change mode described above. When the setting key switch 810 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode ends. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the game mode shifts to a playable game mode, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information. When the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 switches from the set value information to the performance information with the termination of the setting confirmation mode as a trigger, all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time. initial display (all flashing display) is performed (details will be described later). As a modification, in the state where the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned ON, and In addition to when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 820 turned off (when the power switch is turned on), the state where the front frame 2 is opened from the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is set to the front frame 2), the setting key switch 810 is turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 is turned off. While the display of the effect display device 70 is restored (especially for one second after the display is restored), specifically, while the power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) is being displayed (especially, Even if the setting key switch 810 is switched from OFF to ON during the first 1 second of the 3 seconds during which the power-off restoration image is displayed, the setting confirmation mode may be entered. With such a configuration, even if an operation to shift to the game mode is erroneously performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. Even in the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above, it is possible to detect that the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2). Even if it is not a condition, that is, when the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the front frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 2 is closed (the frame open switch 892 detects the closed state of the front frame 2 and is in the OFF state), it may be configured to be able to shift by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

The RAM clear mode is a mode in which the setting key switch 810 is turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed (turned on) and the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on). is. When the RAM clear mode is entered, a predetermined storage area of the RAM 103 mounted on the main control microcomputer 110 is initialized (so-called RAM clear processing is performed). This RAM clear mode automatically ends after the RAM clear processing is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, the game mode shifts to a playable game mode, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information. When the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 switches from the set value information to the performance information with the termination of the RAM clear mode as a trigger, all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time. initial display (all flashing display) is performed (details will be described later).

The game mode is a mode that shifts when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch 810 turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 turned off. This game mode is shifted after restoring the backup data stored in the RAM 103 at the occurrence of the last power failure. In addition, when shifting to the game mode after the setting change mode, the shift is made after the setting change is completed and the backup data stored in the RAM 103 is erased. After confirmation is completed and the backup data stored in the RAM 103 are restored, the mode is shifted to the game mode after the RAM clear mode, after the backup data stored in the RAM 103 are erased. When the game mode is shifted to the game mode, a game becomes possible, and an initial display (all blinking display) is performed in which all the display portions 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time (details will be described later).

≪Processing in setting change mode≫
Next, the processing during the setting change mode when the power is turned on will be described.

(Notification contents during setting change)
First, when the transition mode at the time of power-on is the setting change mode, the contents of the notification by the performance display monitor 830, the main control display device 27, the external information terminal board 600, the speaker 11, the frame lamp 10, and the effect display device 70 will be explained. do. FIG. 84(A) is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting change mode.

When the power is turned on and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 displays the set value of the probability of a big hit. As described above, during execution of this setting change mode, the display of the setting value changes from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5" each time the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed. →"6"→"1"→... In this setting change mode, the numerical value indicating the setting value (for example, the number "1" when the setting value is "1") is lit and displayed in the 7 segments SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display section 834. , the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display section 834 is not illuminated (the dot segment SG8 is extinguished).

Further, when the setting change mode is entered, the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device 27 is illuminated. This lighting display of the error indicator Er continues from the start of the setting change mode to the end of the setting change mode. The other indicator lamps 71 to 79 of the main control display device 27 are extinguished from the time the setting change mode is started to the end. As a modification thereof, all the other indicator lamps 71 to 79 or part of the indicator lamps may be illuminated or blinked. In that case, it is preferable to cause all of the LED segments forming each indicator lamp to be lit or blinked. As another modification, all the indicator lamps of the main control display device 27 including the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device 27 may be turned off.

Also, when shifting to the setting change mode, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board 600 to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine. The output of the security signal is started when the setting change mode is started, and is stopped after a predetermined time (128 ms) has passed since the setting change mode is ended.

When the setting change mode is entered, the speaker 11 outputs a voice saying "the setting value is being changed". The voice saying "The setting value is being changed" is repeatedly output from the start of the setting change mode to the end of the setting change mode.

Further, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the screen of the effect display device 70 displays a setting changing image showing characters "setting changing". The display of the image during setting change is continuously performed from the start of the setting change mode to the end thereof.

(Distribution of prize balls during setting change)
Subsequently, prize ball payout when the transition mode at power-on is the setting change mode will be described. First, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the payout of all prize balls is regulated until the setting change mode is terminated, and no prize balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34.例文帳に追加In other words, during execution of the setting change mode, the payout of prize balls that is performed based on the entry of game balls into each of the winning openings including the big winning opening 54 and the general winning opening 64 is regulated. In the present embodiment, it is when the setting change mode ends and the game mode is started that the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the setting change mode ends, the RAM clear mode may start instead of the game mode (the game mode may start when the RAM clear mode ends).

Here, a description will be given of the processing in the case where the power is cut off while the prize balls are being paid out, and the setting change mode is entered when the power is restored. Specifically, when a power failure occurs while prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit 34, information on the number of remaining prize balls that have not yet been paid out is backed up in the storage area of the RAM 103. The power is cut off with the Here, when a normal power-on operation (an operation to turn on the power without turning on the RAM clear switch 820) is performed when power is restored, information on the number of unpaid balls is stored in the storage area of the RAM 103. is stored, the unpaid prize balls are paid out after the power is restored. On the other hand, at the time of recovery from power failure, if an operation to shift to the setting change mode (an operation to turn on the setting key switch 810 and the RAM clear switch 820 to turn on the power) is performed, Since the stored information related to the game is erased, the information on the number of unpaid prize balls that was backed up when the power is turned off is also erased, so that the unpaid prize balls will not be paid out when the power is restored. Become. The information on the number of unpaid balls backed up when the power is turned off is not deleted when the setting change mode is started, but is deleted when the setting change mode ends.

Also, if the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if the game ball enters one of the winning holes (for example, the general winning hole 64 By entering a game ball in, forcibly opening the big winning opening 54 and allowing a game ball to enter, or by forcibly turning ON each winning opening switch, the I of the main control board 100 Even if an input signal is input to the input port of the /O port circuit 104), if the setting change mode is terminated and the game mode is not entered (the main control side timer interrupt processing is activated and the input processing (S53) , winning monitoring processing (S59), winning ball control processing (S60), etc. are not executed), the main CPU 101 does not access the input port of the I/O port circuit 104, so game balls enter various winning ports. The information that the ball has entered is not stored in the storage area of the RAM 103, and prize balls are not paid out during execution of this setting change mode.

(Other processing during setting change)
Next, description will be made regarding other processing when the device is shifted to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Even if the firing handle 12 is touched and rotated during the setting change mode, the operation of the firing handle 12 is determined to be invalid, or the touching of the firing handle 12 and the rotating operation are not detected. (configured to limit launch detection). That is, even if the shooting handle 12 is touched and rotated, the game ball cannot be shot. By configuring in this way, by accidentally touching the shooting handle 12 during the setting change mode and performing a rotating operation, unexpected shooting of game balls (use of game balls) or accidental entry of balls can be prevented. It can be prevented in advance. Further, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer during the setting change mode, the standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the setting change mode has ended even though the setting change mode is in progress. In addition, during the setting change mode, it is configured not to start the variable display of the special symbols (does not satisfy the special symbol variation start condition), and during the setting change mode, the variable display of the normal symbols is not started (normal symbols not satisfy the variable start condition). By configuring in this way, even if there is an unexpected entry of a ball (such as entry of a game ball staying in the game area PA) during the setting change mode, an unintended win-or-fail judgment and a variable display based thereon are performed. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting change mode or the game mode. Furthermore, even in the setting change mode, while it is possible to detect specific errors (for example, door/frame open errors and magnetic sensor errors), it is configured not to display error notifications related to the specific errors. In addition, a predetermined error (for example, an abnormal set value error and an abnormal setting change error, which will be described later) can be detected and an error notification can be made. By configuring in this way, during the setting change mode, unlike the game mode, by limiting the error notification of a specific error, giving priority to the notification of a predetermined error (error related to setting), setting change It can be an error notification mode suitable for the mode, and unlike the specifications that limit the display of launch detection and standby demo screens during the setting change mode, and the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, detection of specific errors is not restricted, the player himself/herself can appropriately grasp the current situation.

It should be noted that, as a modified example when shifting to the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, the turning operation by touching the firing handle 12 may be enabled (the game can be played by touching the firing handle 12 and performing the turning operation). ball can be launched). Further, during the setting change mode, the standby demo screen (customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer. Also, an error notification image may be displayed when an error is detected during the setting change mode. In that case, the error notification image is set in a layer higher or lower than the layer of the image "setting value is being changed".

(Processing when returning from changing settings)
Next, the processing when returning from the setting change mode to the game mode will be described. Even if you continue to hold the shooting handle 12 (touch the hand and rotate the Even if you continue to do so, or even if you continue to touch your hand), the touch effect is not executed (touch operation becomes invalid). Note that the touch effect means that the player touches the firing handle 12 and rotates it (or simply touches the firing handle 12) in a situation during the standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect). This is an effect that is executed under certain conditions. Specifically, the player touches the firing handle 12 and rotates it (or simply touches the firing handle 12) during the waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect). As a result, the voice output of "game start!" In addition, when returning from the setting change mode to the game mode, the state in which the game is not performed immediately after returning or after returning (game interruption state) continues for a predetermined time or more. configured to move to In other words, even if the shooting handle 12 is held continuously from the setting change mode to the game mode (waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) executed after the game mode starts) that shifts after the setting change mode ends. (Even if you continue to rotate after touching your hand, or even if you continue to touch your hand), the touch effect is configured not to be executed during the waiting demo effect (customer waiting waiting demo effect). there is Also, even if you continue to press the volume button (left key or right key) from the setting change mode to the game mode that transitions after the setting change mode ends, the volume level does not change during the game mode (volume operation does not change). disabled). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode, the volume level does not change (the volume operation becomes invalid). In addition, since the volume adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not presuppose that the waiting demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode is being performed. Also, when returning to the game mode, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light amount set before the transition to the setting change mode (before the power is turned off). is always set to "3" among the light amount levels of . In addition, even if the light intensity button (up key or down key) is continuously pressed from the setting change mode to the game mode that transitions after the setting change mode ends, the light intensity level does not change during the game mode (the light intensity operation does not change). disabled). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode, the light amount level does not change (the light amount operation becomes invalid). Since the light amount adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the waiting demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode is in progress. Also, when returning to the game mode, the light intensity level is set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light intensity set before shifting to the setting change mode (before the power is turned off). is always set to "3" among the light amount levels of .

Further, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, error notification (abnormality notification) with low priority is not executed, while error notification (abnormality notification) with high priority is executed. . In this way, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, by ignoring low-priority errors, the processing in the setting change mode can be prevented from being hindered, and the processing load due to the error notification can be reduced. can be prevented from increasing. Here, the high-priority error is an error type (type 1 error) whose priority (importance) is set to a high level to prohibit or make it difficult to continue playing the game. The first type errors include magnetic sensor errors, radio wave sensor errors, disconnection short-circuit power source errors, excessive prize winning errors, door/frame open errors, setting value abnormal errors, and setting change abnormal errors. A low-priority error is an error type whose priority (importance) is set to a low level such that continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult. This type 2 error includes a ball tray full error, ball jam/ball jam error, no ball error, etc., as a payout error (prize ball error). A setting value error is an error that occurs when a value that should not be set as a setting value (for example, a value that is not within the range of 1 to 6) is set. An error occurs when the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, and an operation is performed to switch to a mode other than the setting change mode. This is an error that occurs because an abnormal operation is assumed to have been performed when an operation is performed to shift to a mode other than the setting change mode. Details of other errors have been described in the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted here. Also, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the shooting of the game ball is restricted (the shooting handle 12 is disabled) even if either the first type error or the second type error occurs. can be

≪Processing in setting confirmation mode≫
Next, the processing during the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on will be described.

(Notification contents during setting confirmation)
First, when the transition mode at power-on is the setting confirmation mode, the contents of the notification by the performance display monitor 830, the main control display device 27, the external information terminal board 600, the speaker 11, the frame lamp 10, and the effect display device 70 will be explained. do. FIG. 84B is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting confirmation mode.

When the power is turned on and the setting confirmation mode is entered, the fourth display section 834 of the performance display monitor 830 displays the current set value that was set before the power was turned on (at the last time the power was turned off). When the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value indicating the setting value (for example, when the setting value is "1", the number "1") lights up in the 7 segments SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display section 834. After being displayed, a dot is displayed in the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display portion 834 by lighting. In other words, the current set value and the dot are displayed in pairs on the fourth display section 834 . The reason why the current setting values are displayed with dots in the fourth display unit 834 when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode is because the setting values are displayed when the mode is changed to the above-described setting change mode (display without dots). This is to distinguish from In this manner, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the current setting values can be confirmed.

Further, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device 27 is illuminated. This lighting display of the error indicator Er continues from the start of the setting confirmation mode to the end thereof. The other indicator lamps 71 to 79 of the main control display device 27 are extinguished from the time the setting confirmation mode is started to the end. As a modification thereof, all the other indicator lamps 71 to 79 or part of the indicator lamps may be illuminated or blinked. In that case, it is preferable to cause all of the LED segments forming each indicator lamp to be lit or blinked. As another modification, all the indicator lamps of the main control display device 27 including the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device 27 may be turned off.

Also, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board 600 to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine. The output of the security signal is started when the setting confirmation mode is started, and is stopped after a predetermined time (128 ms) has passed since the setting confirmation mode is ended.

In addition, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the speaker 11 outputs a voice saying "Setting value is being confirmed". The voice "Confirming the setting value" is repeatedly output from the time the setting confirmation mode is started until it ends.

In addition, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the screen of the effect display device 70 displays a setting-confirming image indicating characters "setting-confirming". The display of the image during setting confirmation is continuously performed from the time the setting confirmation mode is started to the end.

(Distribution of prize balls during setting confirmation)
Subsequently, prize ball payout when the transition mode at power-on is the setting confirmation mode will be described.

Here, a description will be given of the processing in the case where a power failure occurs during the payout of prize balls and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode at the time of recovery from the power failure. Specifically, when a power failure occurs while prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit 34, information on the number of remaining prize balls that have not yet been paid out is backed up in the storage area of the RAM 103. The power is cut off with the At the time of recovery from power failure, if an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode (an operation to turn on the setting key switch 810 while keeping the RAM clear switch 820 turned off and turn on the power) is performed, the memory area of the RAM 103 will not Information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is stored, but the payout of prize balls is temporarily interrupted until the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game mode is shifted to. The reason why the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends is that when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the game clerk or the like opens the front frame 2 and moves from the back side of the front frame 2. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 810 or the like, and when the front frame 2 is open, game balls may not be normally supplied from the ball supply device of the game arcade to the game machine, and prize balls may not be paid out correctly. Because there is Therefore, the payout of prize balls is temporarily interrupted until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout of prize balls is resumed after shifting to the game mode.

Also, when the power is turned on and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, even if the game ball enters one of the winning openings (for example, the general winning opening 64 By entering a game ball in, forcibly opening the big winning opening 54 and allowing a game ball to enter, or by forcibly turning ON each winning opening switch, the I of the main control board 100 Even if an input signal is input to the input port of the /O port circuit 104), if the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the mode is not shifted to the game mode (main control side timer interrupt processing is started, input processing (S53) , winning monitoring processing (S59), winning ball control processing (S60), etc. are not executed), the main CPU 101 does not access the input port of the I/O port circuit 104, so game balls enter various winning ports. The information that the ball has entered is not stored in the storage area of the RAM 103, and prize balls are not paid out during execution of this setting confirmation mode.

In addition, when the game mode is started after the setting confirmation mode is finished, when the jackpot game that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure is restarted, during the execution of the restarted jackpot game, No prize balls are paid out based on the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 during the setting confirmation mode, and the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 during the setting confirmation mode. Display of the cumulative number of prize balls based on (including update display) and count-up effects are not performed. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 during execution of the restarted jackpot game (for example, during execution of the round game immediately after returning), the game ball enters the big winning hole 54. However, display (update display) of the cumulative number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big winning opening 54 and count-up effect are not performed. The reason for restricting the display (update display) of the accumulated number of prize balls and the execution of the count-up effect after the jackpot game is restarted in this way is that after the power is restored, the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the game mode is changed. After the start, by displaying a predetermined power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) and a special jackpot screen after power failure recovery (special round screen after power failure recovery), This is because notification of recovery from power failure is prioritized over notification of information. It should be noted that, as a modification thereof, when the jackpot game is restarted by the return of the power off or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game mode is started, a predetermined power cut is performed in the round game at the time of the restart. A return image (recovery screen from power failure) is displayed, and normal operation is performed from the start of the round game next to the round game at the time of restart (for example, when the round game is restarted from the 5th round, the 6th round game). (during the jackpot), and display (update display) of the number of accumulated prize balls based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54, or a count-up effect may be executed.

In addition, as a further modification, when the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game mode is started, a certain round game of the jackpot game that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure is resumed, and the certain round is resumed. After the power failure recovery image is displayed along with the restoration of the power failure during execution of the game (or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game mode is started), a predetermined time elapses (for example, power failure recovery 5 seconds after the image is displayed), or with the end of the certain round game, normal jackpot production (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity jackpot production, Kotobuki jackpot production, and joy jackpot) production) may be configured to return to (that is, a predetermined time has elapsed, or, for example, the power was turned off during the third round round game and the power was turned off and returned (or the setting confirmation mode ended and the game mode is started), the normal round effect may be resumed from the start of the fourth round round game). In addition, as described above, the round production screen corresponding to the type of the production during the jackpot (super longevity jackpot production, Kotobuki jackpot production, joyful jackpot production) is displayed, that is, when the production pattern during the jackpot is the super longevity jackpot production In the case of a super longevity jackpot round screen (for example, a production screen in which five characters are displayed on a rainbow background), in the case of a longevity jackpot production, a longevity jackpot round screen (for example, on a red background A performance screen in which character introductions for two characters are displayed), and in the case of a joyful winning performance, a joyful winning round screen (for example, a performance screen in which a character introduction for one person is displayed on a blue background) is displayed. It is configured as follows. In this case, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during execution of the jackpot game after the round game is restarted, but the number of accumulated prize balls is not displayed before the power is turned off, but is started from "0". The accumulated winning balls counter is also cleared to "0" and the game is started. However, even if the game ball starts from "0", when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is updated, the count-up effect, the emphasized effect (enlarged display), etc. When the number of game balls entering the big winning port 54 exceeding the prescribed number (over winning) occurs during execution of the big winning game, the over winning performance is executed, and similarly, the restarted big winning game is executed. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during this period, updating of the display of the number of accumulated winning balls, count-up effect, and bonus winning effect are executed.

In addition, as yet another modification, when the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game mode is started, a certain round game of the jackpot game that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure is resumed. After the power-off recovery image is displayed along with the recovery of the power-off during execution of a certain round game (or the completion of the setting confirmation mode and the start of the game mode), a predetermined time elapses (for example, 5 seconds after the power failure return image is displayed), or when the round game ends, return to the special jackpot screen after power failure recovery (special round screen after power failure recovery) (That is, the passage of a predetermined time, or, for example, the power was turned off and restored during the third round round game (or the setting confirmation mode was terminated and the game mode was started ), it may be returned to the normal round production from the start of the fourth round round game), and in the case of such a configuration, during the execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game The display of the number of accumulated prize balls is not performed, and even if the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls is not updated, the count-up effect, the emphasized effect (enlarged display), etc. are not executed. Even if game balls in excess of the prescribed number (over winning) enter the big winning opening 54 during the execution of the big winning game, the over winning performance is not executed and similarly the restarted big winning is performed. Even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during execution of the game, updating of the display of the number of accumulated winning balls, count-up performance, and bonus winning performance are not executed.

(Other processing during setting confirmation)
Next, description will be made regarding other processing when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Even if the firing handle 12 is touched and rotated during the setting confirmation mode, the operation of the firing handle 12 is determined to be invalid, or the touching of the firing handle 12 and the rotating operation are not detected. (configured to limit launch detection). That is, even if the shooting handle 12 is touched and rotated, the game ball cannot be shot. By configuring in this way, by accidentally touching the shooting handle 12 during the setting confirmation mode and performing a rotating operation, unexpected shooting of game balls (use of game balls) or accidental entry of balls can be prevented. It can be prevented in advance. Further, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more during the setting confirmation mode, the standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the setting confirmation mode has ended even though the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, it is configured not to start the variable display of the special symbols (does not satisfy the special symbol variation start condition), and during the setting confirmation mode, the variable display of the normal symbols is not started (normal symbols not satisfy the variable start condition). By configuring in this way, even if there is an unexpected entry of a ball (such as entry of a game ball staying in the game area PA) during the setting confirmation mode, an unintended win-or-fail judgment and a variable display based on it are performed. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting confirmation mode or the game mode. Furthermore, even in the setting confirmation mode, while it is possible to detect specific errors (for example, door/frame open errors and magnetic sensor errors), it is configured not to display error notifications related to the specific errors. In addition, a predetermined error (for example, an abnormal set value error or an abnormal setting change error) can be detected and an error notification can be made. By configuring in this way, during the setting confirmation mode, unlike the game mode, by limiting the error notification of a specific error and giving priority to the notification of a predetermined error (error related to setting), setting confirmation It can be an error notification mode suitable for the mode, and unlike the specifications that limit the display of launch detection and standby demo screens during the setting confirmation mode, and the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, detection of specific errors is not restricted, the player himself/herself can appropriately grasp the current situation.

It should be noted that, as a modified example when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, the rotation operation by touching the firing handle 12 may be enabled (the game can be played by touching the shooting handle 12 and performing the rotation operation). ball can be launched). Further, the waiting demo screen (customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer during the setting confirmation mode. Also, an error notification image may be displayed when an error is detected during the setting confirmation mode. In that case, the error notification image is set in a layer above or below the layer of the image "Confirming set values".

(Processing when returning from checking settings)
Next, a description will be given of processing when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode. Even if you continue to hold the firing handle 12 (touch the hand and rotate the Even if you continue to do so, or even if you continue to touch your hand), the touch effect is not executed (touch operation becomes invalid). Note that the touch effect means that the player touches the firing handle 12 and rotates it (or simply touches the firing handle 12) in a situation during the standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect). This is an effect that is executed under certain conditions. Specifically, the player touches the firing handle 12 and rotates it (or simply touches the firing handle 12) during the waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect). As a result, the voice output of "game start!" In addition, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, the state in which the game is not performed immediately after returning or after returning (game interruption state) continues for a predetermined time or more. configured to move to In other words, even if the shooting handle 12 is held continuously from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode that shifts after the setting confirmation mode ends (waiting demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) that is executed after the game mode starts) (Even if you continue to rotate after touching your hand, or even if you continue to touch your hand), the touch effect is configured not to be executed during the waiting demo effect (customer waiting waiting demo effect). there is In addition, even if you continue to press the volume button (left key or right key) from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode that transitions after the setting confirmation mode ends, the volume level does not change during the game mode (volume operation does not change) disabled). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode, the volume level does not change (the volume operation becomes invalid). In addition, since the volume adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not presuppose that the waiting demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode is being performed. Also, when returning to the game mode, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light amount set before the transition to the setting confirmation mode (before the power is turned off). is always set to "3" among the light amount levels of . In addition, even if you keep pressing the light intensity button (up key or down key) from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode that transitions after the setting confirmation mode ends, the light intensity level does not change during the game mode (the light intensity operation does not change). disabled). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode, the light amount level does not change (the light amount operation becomes invalid). Since the light amount adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the waiting demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode is in progress. Also, when returning to the game mode, the light intensity level is set to the initial setting (for example, regardless of the light intensity set before the transition to the setting confirmation mode (before the power is turned off), "1" to "5" is always set to "3" among the light amount levels of .

<Performance information>
Next, the base value, which is game performance information, will be described. The base value, in a broad sense, means the ratio of the number of prize balls won by the player to the number of game balls shot by the player (the number of game balls reaching the game area PA). However, the base value applied in this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, is the number of game balls fired by the player when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state (the number of game balls that have reached the game area PA number of)) means the ratio of the number of prize balls won by the player.

In this embodiment, data related to game performance information (data such as a base value, total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of winning balls in normal time, etc., which will be described later) is stored in the RAM 103 provided on the main control board 100. Stored in area 103C.

Here, FIG. 85(A) is a diagram schematically showing the storage area of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. The RAM 103 is provided with a game control information storage area 103A, a set value information storage area 103B, a performance information storage area 103C, and the like. In the game information storage area 103A, information for controlling the progress of the game (information on the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, information on the jackpot game, information on the game state, information on payout of prize balls, etc.) is stored. ing. The set value information storage area 103B stores set value information for specifying the winning probability (jackpot probability) that the result of the special symbol win/fail judgment is a jackpot. Information for specifying game performance information (base value) is stored in the performance information storage area 103C. In addition, the performance information storage area 103C may store information used for processing for conducting a test defined by game rules. In this embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the information stored in the setting value information storage area 103B and the performance information storage area 103C is not erased.

FIG. 85B is a diagram schematically showing the performance information storage area 103C of the RAM 103. As shown in FIG. The performance information storage area 103A includes a total out number counter 1030, a normal out number counter 1031, a normal ball prize counter 1032, a base information storage area 1033, a base information switching counter 1034, a base information output data area 1035, and an output display. A switching timer 1036, a new startup flag 1037, and the like are provided.

The total number of outs counter 1030 is a counter for counting the total number of outs. The “total number of outs” is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA in all game states. All game states include a special game state in which a special game is being executed and a non-special game state in which a special game is not being executed. In addition, this non-special game state includes a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a variable probability game state. It should be noted that, as in the second embodiment described above, in the case of a gaming machine that employs a small hit rush mode, the non-special game state includes the normal game state, the time-saving game state, the probability variation game state, and the latent probability game. state. In addition, if the game machine is not equipped with a probability variation function (for example, a small hit V model equipped with a variation time reduction function), the non-special game state includes a normal game state and a time saving game state If the game machine is equipped with neither the probability variation function nor the variation time reduction function (for example, a small win V model that does not have the variation time reduction function), it will be in a non-special game state. contains only the normal game state.

The normal out number counter 1031 is a counter for counting the number of normal outs. The “normal out number” is the number (total number) of game balls ejected from the game area PA when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low-base state).

Note that the total number of outs and the number of normal outs are calculated by detecting the game balls ejected from the back side of the game board 20 (played balls that have finished the game by entering each winning hole or the out hole 29). It is calculated based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor 891 . As another method of counting the total number of outs and the number of normal outs, for example, based on the detection information of a ball detection sensor that detects the number of game balls (the number of balls shot) shot toward the game area PA. It may be configured to calculate the total number of outs (total number of shot balls) and the number of normal outs (number of shot balls in normal time). In that case, it is preferable to adopt a value obtained by subtracting the number of game balls (foul balls) that have returned without reaching the game area PA from the number of game balls launched toward the game area PA. .

The normal prize ball number counter 1032 is a counter for counting the normal prize ball number. The “normal number of prize balls” is the number (total number) of prize balls paid out to the player when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low-base state). In other words, the normal number of prize balls does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the game state (special game state) when the jackpot game is being executed in the low probability low base state, and does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the low probability low base state. Only the number of prize balls to be paid out in the game state (normal game state) when the big win game is not executed is included. Therefore, the number of prize balls in this normal state is the number of game balls entering the first start port 51, the game ball entering the second start port 52, and the game balls entering the general winning ports 61 to 64 in the normal game state. It is the cumulative number of prize balls paid out according to the number of balls entered. In this embodiment, each time a game ball enters a winning hole (a winning hole other than the big winning hole 54) to which prize balls are to be paid out in the normal game state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole into which the ball enters is accumulatively added to the normal prize ball counter 1032 (the main CPU 101 performs processing for adding to the normal prize ball counter 1032 in the RAM 103). In addition,
As another method for counting the number of prize balls in the normal state, the number of prize balls in the normal state is counted based on the detection information of the prize ball count sensor that counts the number of prize balls actually dispensed from the prize ball dispensation unit 34. good too.

The base information storage area 1033 is an area for storing a base value indicating game performance information. The "base value" is the ratio of the number of winning balls in normal times to the number of outs in normal times. That is, the base value is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state (low probability low base state). It is the ratio of the number (total number) of awarded balls that have been awarded, and is a value calculated by the arithmetic expression of "the number of awarded balls in normal times/the number of outs in normal times x 100". Therefore, the base value in this example is the base value measured in the normal game state, meaning the base value in the specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) or the base value in the special game state not something to do.

Although details will be described later, this base value is calculated for each preset management section (basically for each section until the value of the total number of outs counter 1030 reaches "60000"). The base value calculated in each management section is stored in the base information storage area 1033 in sequence. The base information storage area 1033 includes a current base value storage area 1033a for storing a base value (current base value) calculated in real time in the section currently being executed, and a section immediately before (1 of the section currently being executed). A base value storage area 1033b for storing the base value (previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reaches 60000 in the section previous to 2 times before base value storage area 1033c for storing the base value (2 times before base value) calculated when the total number of outs reaches 60000 in the interval 2 times before the middle interval); 3 times before base value storage area 1033d for storing the base value (three times before base value) calculated when the total number of outs reaches 60000 in the interval (three times before the currently executing interval) Consists of Although the details will be described later, the calculation of the base value is not performed in the section (section A described later) in which the total number of outs is less than 299 counted from the first power-on of the gaming machine (at the time of new start-up). .

The base information switching counter 1034 is a counter for switching the base value displayed on the performance display monitor 830 . When the value of the base information switching counter 1034 is "0", the performance display monitor 830 displays the base value of the current section. When the base value of the previous interval is displayed and the value of the base information switching counter is "2", the performance display monitor 830 displays the base value of the second previous interval, and the base information switching counter 1034 is "3", the performance display monitor 830 displays the base value of the section three times before.

The base information output data area 1035 is an area for storing the display data of the four display units 831 to 834 in the performance display monitor 830. FIG. Although not shown, the base information output data area 1035 includes a first output data area for storing the display data of the first display section 831, a second output data area for storing the display data of the second display section 832, It has a third output data area for storing the display data of the third display section 833 and a fourth output data area for storing the display data of the fourth display section 834 .

The output display switching timer 1036 is a timer for switching display data stored in the base information output data area 1035 . In this embodiment, the display data stored in the base information output data area 1035 is switched at a predetermined cycle based on the clock value of the output display switching timer 1036 .

The new startup flag 1037 is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine is powered on for the first time (at the time of new startup). That is, if the new start-up flag 1037 is ON, it indicates that the game machine is powered on for the first time, and if the new start-up flag 1037 is OFF, it indicates that the game machine is not powered on for the first time. It should be noted that this new startup flag 1037 is turned OFF immediately after the game machine is powered on for the first time (immediately after it is newly started up) (it is preferable that it is turned off at least during the power-on for the first time). As a modification, the new startup flag 1037 may be turned off when the total out number counter 1030 starts counting when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time.

≪Display of base value≫
Next, display of the base value will be described. In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 830 as shown in FIG. As described above, the performance display monitor 830 includes an identification display portion (identification segment) 830a consisting of a first display portion 831 and a second display portion 832 of the upper two digits, a third display portion 833 of the lower two digits and a second display portion 830a. A ratio display portion (ratio segment) 830b consisting of 4 display portions 834 is provided. In this specification, "lighting" is used as a concept including both continuous lighting and flashing lighting. In some cases, the blinking lighting is simply called "blinking" or "blinking display".

The identification segment 830a displays an identifier for identifying the type of base value (section for managing the base value). That is, the identification segment 830a includes "bL." indicating the base value of the current interval, "b1." indicating the base value of the previous interval, and "b1." indicating the base value of the previous interval. and "bL3." indicating that it is the base value of the third interval (base value three times before) can be displayed (details will be described later).

The calculation result of the base value corresponding to the identifier (measurement section) displayed in the identification segment 830a is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. That is, the ratio segment 830b includes the base value of the current section (real-time value), the base value of the previous section (final result value), the base value of the section two times before (final result value), and the base value of the section three times before. (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, “displaying the base value” means displaying both the identification segment 830a and the ratio segment 830b, except in special cases.

Here, FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of the base value of each section. As described above, the base value is measured for each preset predetermined management section (each section A, section B, section C, section D, . . . described later). The performance display monitor 830 displays the base value of the current section (FIG. 86(B)), the display of the base value of the last section ((C) of FIG. 86), and the base value of the section two times before. The display of the value (FIG. 86(D)) and the display of the base value of the section three times before (FIG. 86(E)) are switched and displayed every specific time (predetermined display switching time). In this embodiment, "4.8 seconds" is set as the display switching time of the base value. Note that the switching processing of the display of the base value is performed based on the value of the base information switching counter 1034 described above.

First, in the display of the base value of the current interval, as shown in FIG. 86(B), "bL." The base value (the base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a) is lit and displayed. Further, in the display of the base value of the section immediately before, as shown in FIG. 86(C), "b1." The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the last previous base value storage area 1033b) is lit and displayed. In the display of the base value of the section two times before, as shown in FIG. 86(D), "b2." The base value at the end of the interval (the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033c two times before) is lit. In the display of the base value of the section three times before, as shown in FIG. 86(E), "b3." The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033d three times before) is lit and displayed.

In the ratio segment 830b, the first decimal place of the measurement result of the base value is rounded off, and the integer part (integer value) after the rounding off is displayed. For example, when the base value measurement result is 35.49, "35" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b, and when the base value measurement result is 35.50, "36" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. In addition, when the numerical value after rounding off the measurement result of the base value is less than 10, “0” is displayed in the tens place of the ratio segment 830b (for example, “00” to “09”). Further, when the numerical value after rounding off the measurement result of the base value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. That is, if the number after the rounding is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b, and if the number after the rounding is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. (show dots). This is because the ratio segment 830b of the performance display monitor 830 can only display the base value as a two-digit numerical value. This is for notifying that the As a modification, the first decimal place of the measurement result of the base value may be truncated and only the integer part (integer value) may be displayed. If the number after rounding is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b, and if the number after rounding is 100 or more, "99." do).

When the gaming machine is powered on (returned from power off), all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 are fully displayed for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), as shown in FIG. 86(A). An all-flash display (also referred to as “initial display”) is performed in which the lit state and the all-light-off state are repeated at predetermined intervals (predetermined cycle). This predetermined interval (predetermined cycle) is 0.6 seconds in the present embodiment, and "lighting 0.3 seconds→blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets. In other words, the initial display (all flashing display) of this performance display monitor 830 is performed by all the LED segments SG1 to SG8 (a total of 32 LED segment) is displayed blinking. Then, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86A to 86E, after the initial display (all blinking display) of the performance display monitor 830 is completed, the display of the base value (switching of the display of the base value) is done. It should be noted that during the initial display period of this performance display monitor 830 (during the entire blinking display period), the main control side timer interrupt processing is activated, state return processing, etc.), prize ball control processing (discharge processing of unpaid prize balls before power off, etc.), LED output processing (lighting control processing of the main control display device 27, etc.), special symbol control processing, etc. mode is being processed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of the base value is started can differ according to the transition mode when the power is turned on. For example, when the gaming machine is switched to the gaming mode when the power is turned on, the initial display of 830 (all blinking display) is executed on the performance display monitor for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), and then the base value is displayed. be started. On the other hand, when the game machine is switched to the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, or the setting confirmation mode when the power of the game machine is turned on, the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the initial display of the performance display monitor 830 (all After the blinking display) is executed for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), the display of the base value is started. In addition, the predetermined time (initial display time, total blinking display time) is not limited to the above-mentioned 4.8 seconds, but for example, the time from 4.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds (5 seconds ± 10% time).

<<Base value measurement flow>>
Next, the flow of measurement of the base value after turning on the power of the game machine for the first time will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing display contents displayed in the identification segment 830a and the ratio segment 830b for each management section (measurement section). It should be noted that "when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time" means when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time and is newly started up. In this embodiment, based on the state of the new startup flag 1037 provided in the performance information storage area 103C, it is determined whether or not the game machine is powered on for the first time. That is, if the new start-up flag is ON, it indicates that the game machine is powered on for the first time, and if the new start-up flag is OFF, it indicates that the game machine is not powered on for the first time. In the present embodiment, when the new start-up flag 1037 is ON, an interval A described later (a period in which an identifier is blinked in the identification segment 830b and "--" is lit in the ratio segment 830b) counting is started. When the gaming machine is powered on for the first time, all the values of the total out count counter 1030, the normal out count counter 1031, the normal winning ball count counter 1032, the base information storage area 1033, etc. are all set to the initial value "0". It is Also, when the section currently being executed ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal prize ball number counter 1032 are cleared. In addition, when the interval currently being executed (except for interval A, which will be described later) ends and the next interval is started, the values stored in the one-time previous base value storage area 1033b and the two-time previous base value storage area 1033c The base values of the past intervals are respectively shifted to the base value storage areas of the previous interval (2nd previous base value storage area 1033c and 3rd previous base value storage area 1033d), and to the current base value storage area 1033a. The final value of the stored base value of the current section (the base value when the total number of outs reaches 60000) is shifted to the previous base value storage area 1033b, and this current base value storage area 1033a is shifted to the previous base value storage area 1033b. clear. The base value stored in the 3rd previous base value storage area 1033d is erased by being overwritten by shifting the base value stored in the 2nd previous base value storage area 1033c.

First, in a section (referred to as "section A") in which the value of the total number of outs counter 1030 is less than 299 calculated from the first time the power is turned on, the game machine is inspected and trial run (adjustment) is performed at the amusement arcade. This is a section (test section) where game balls are shot and prizes are awarded, and since an accurate base value cannot be obtained, it is excluded from the calculation of the base value. That is, this section A is set as a section in which the normal out count counter 1031 and the normal prize ball counter 1032 do not count (a section in which the base value is not calculated). However, even during execution of this section A, the total number of outs counter 1030 continues counting in order to determine switching of the section (to determine switching to the next section).

When displaying the base value of the section A currently being executed, the identification segment 830a blinks "bL." That is, the blinking display of "bL." of the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" of the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the interval A currently being executed cannot be displayed. In addition, since the previous section (the section from 1 time to 3 times before) does not exist, when displaying the base value of the previous section (the section from 1 time to 3 times before), the ratio segment 830b "--" is lit and displayed. Specifically, when displaying the base value of the immediately preceding interval, "b1." is displayed blinking in the identification segment 830a, and "--" is lit in the ratio segment 830b. The blinking display of "b1." of the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" of the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed yet. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval two times before, the identification segment 830a blinks "b2." The blinking display of "b2." of the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" of the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the section two times before is still undisplayable. Further, when displaying the base value of the section three times before, "b3." The blinking display of "b3." of the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "--" of the ratio segment 830b indicate that the base value of the interval three times before cannot be displayed yet. In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "lighting 0.3 seconds→flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Triggered by the value of the total number of outs counter 1030 reaching 299 from the first power-on, when the section A currently being executed ends, a new section (referred to as "section B") starts. . When the currently running section A ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal prize ball number counter 1032 are reset (cleared to zero) as described above. Also, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Interval B ends when the value of the total number of outs counter 1030 reaches 60000 from the end of the previous interval A. In section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real time value is stored in the current base value storage area 1033a of the RAM 103 sequentially. When displaying the base value of the section B currently being executed, if the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), "bL." The base value (real-time value) of the current interval B, that is, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. Here, the reason why the identification segment 830a blinks when the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is less than 6000 is that with less than 6000 measurement results, the number of samples required to calculate the base value of the current section is This is for informing that the base value is not stable because the On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is 6000 or more, the identification segment 830a lights up and displays "bL." The base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is displayed by lighting. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "lighting 0.3 seconds→flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In addition, in this section B, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section A), the identification segment 830a blinks "b1." indicate. This is because the base value has not been calculated in the previous section (section A), so the identification segment 830a blinks "b1." Indicates that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval two times before, the identification segment 830a blinks "b2." This is because the interval two times before does not exist, so the base value of the interval two times before is still displayed by the blinking display of "b2." not possible. Further, when displaying the base value of the section three times before, "b3." This is because the interval three times before does not exist, so the base value of the interval three times before is still displayed by the blinking display of "b3." not possible. In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "lighting 0.3 seconds→flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Triggered by the fact that the value of the total number of outs counter 1030 reaches 60000, when the section B currently being executed ends, a new section (referred to as "section C") starts. When the section B currently being executed ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal prize ball number counter 1032 are cleared as described above. Also, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Interval C ends when the value of the total number of outs counter 1030 reaches 60000 after the last interval B ends. In the interval C, as in the previous interval B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area 1033 a of the RAM 103 . When displaying the base value of the section C currently being executed, if the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), the identification segment 830a blinks "bL." At the same time, the base value (real-time value) of the current interval C, ie, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is 6000 or more, the identification segment 830a lights up and displays "bL." The base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is lit and displayed. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "lighting 0.3 seconds→flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In addition, in this section C, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section B), the identification segment 830a is illuminated with "b1." The final value of the base value in section B), that is, the base value stored in the last previous base value storage area 1033b is lit up. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval two times before, the identification segment 830a blinks "b2." This is because the base value has not been calculated in the interval (interval A) two times before, so the identification segment 830a blinks "b2." and the ratio segment 830b lights up "--" Indicates that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the section three times before, "b3." This is because the interval three times before does not exist, so the base value of the interval three times before is still displayed by the blinking display of "b3." not possible. In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "lighting 0.3 seconds→flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Triggered by the value of the total number of outs counter 1030 reaching 60000, when the section C currently being executed ends, a new section (referred to as "section D") starts. It should be noted that when the section C currently being executed ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal prize ball number counter 1032 are cleared as described above. Also, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Interval D ends when the value of the total number of outs counter reaches 60000 counting from the end of the previous interval C. In the interval D, as in the previous interval C, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area 1033 a of the RAM 103 . When displaying the base value of the section D that is currently being executed, if the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), the identification segment 830a blinks "bL." At the same time, the base value (real-time value) of the current interval D, ie, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a, is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." The base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is displayed by lighting. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "lighting 0.3 seconds→flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Further, in this section D, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section C), the identification segment 830a is illuminated with "b1." The final value of the base value in section C), that is, the base value stored in the last previous base value storage area 1033b is lit up. Further, when displaying the base value of the section (section B) two times before, the identification segment 830a is illuminated with "b2." The final value of the value, that is, the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033c two times before is lit up. When displaying the base value of the section (section A) three times before, "b3." This is because the base value has not been calculated in the section (section A) three times before, so that the identification segment 830a blinks "b3." and the ratio segment 830b lights up "--" Indicates that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "lighting 0.3 seconds→flashing 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Triggered by the fact that the value of the total number-of-outs counter 1030 reaches 60000, when the section D currently being executed ends, a new section (referred to as "section E") starts. It should be noted that when the section D currently being executed ends, the total out count counter 1030, the normal out count counter 1031, and the normal winning ball count counter 1032 are cleared as described above. Also, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Thereafter, every time the total number of outs counter reaches 60000 from the start of each section, the section ends and a new section starts. In other words, in FIG. 87, due to space limitations, the sections A to D are shown. When the total number of outs counter reaches 60,000, each section starts and ends, such as sections G, H, and so on.

≪Relationship between performance display and expected value of prize ball acquisition≫
Next, the relationship between the performance display and the prize ball acquisition expected value will be described. FIG. 88 is a time chart when the first hit occurs during execution of section A. FIG. In this embodiment, the identification segment 830a (identifier) of the performance display monitor 830 is displayed blinking until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the gaming machine was powered on. Specifically, as described above, when the measurement section currently being executed is section A, that is, the total number of outs counted from the initial power-on of the gaming machine is less than the predetermined number X1 (299). In this case, the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 blinks. In addition, in the next section B after the end of section A, that is, in section B from the end of section A until the total number of outs reaches 60000, the calculation will start from the start of section B. When the normal out number is less than the predetermined number X2 (6000), the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 blinks. As a modification, in the next interval B after the end of the interval A, that is, in the interval B from the end of the interval A until the total number of outs reaches 60000, the calculation is started from the time when the power is turned on for the first time. The identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 may be configured to blink when the normal out count is less than the predetermined count X2 (6000). When the identifier blinking in the identification segment 830a is the identifier (bL) indicating the current section, the ratio segment 830b displays the real-time value of the base value measured in the current section. . In this embodiment, these flashing displays are performed at intervals of 0.6 seconds (period of 0.6 seconds), and "0.3 seconds of lighting → 0.3 seconds of blinking" is repeated for eight sets.

On the other hand, the expected prize ball acquisition value (theoretical number of prize balls) paid out during the execution of the jackpot game, which is performed when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot in the normal game state, is the above-mentioned predetermined value. is set to X1 (299) or more. That is, the expected value (theoretical number of prize balls) obtained at the time of the first hit is set to be equal to or greater than the predetermined number X1 (299) that triggers the end of section A. Specifically, the jackpot types of the first special symbol include "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" and "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)", but both jackpot types are defined rounds of jackpot games. The number is set to 4 rounds, and since all the round games are long-open round games (long-open round games), the expected value of prize ball acquisition at the first hit in any jackpot type is 600. (4 rounds x 10 count x 15 prize balls = 600 balls). As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value of winning balls (600) at the time of the first hit is equal to or greater than the predetermined number X1 (299) that triggers the end of section A as the reached value of the total number of outs. is set to In other words, if the player gets the first hit while staying in the section A, it is possible to obtain a larger number of prize balls (600 at maximum) than the predetermined number X1 (299) that triggers the end of the section A. . Therefore, if the first hit can be drawn while staying in this section A, while hitting the number of prize balls (up to 600) obtained at the first hit toward the game area PA as own balls, The possibility that the game balls discharged from the game area PA, that is, the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number X1 (299) increases, and the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number X1 (299). It is expected to shift from section A to section B as As a result, the base value was not displayed (“--” displayed in the identification segment 830b) while staying in section A, but by shifting to section B, the base value is displayed in real time. As a result, in this embodiment, when the first hit is drawn at an early stage after the first power-on of the gaming machine, the number of prize balls (600) acquired in the big win game triggered by the first hit is used up. By the end of section A (test section) and transition to the next section B, the performance display can function (the base value of the current section can be displayed in real time), and cheating (output (whether or not there is an abnormality in ball performance) can be discovered at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value for winning prize balls during consecutive games including the first hit (that is, the expected value for winning prize balls paid out in the jackpot game performed from the first hit to the end of the consecutive game state) is , is set to a predetermined number X2 (6000) or less. That is, in this embodiment, the probability variable entry rate (65%), the ST continuation rate (set value 1=63% to set value 6=76%), the number of theoretical prize balls for each jackpot game (4R jackpot=600 pieces, 8R jackpot=1200 pieces), etc. are set. According to such a configuration, it is difficult to acquire the number of balls required to cancel the blinking of the performance display monitor 830 (the number of balls required to reach 6000 outs in normal times) in one first hit. By doing so (that is, by requiring multiple first hits), assuming that the first hit occurs immediately and the acquired game ball continues to shoot normally (the game continues until the ball runs out) However, the flashing of the performance display monitor 830 is not canceled until a game ball is shot any more, and the base value can be managed more accurately. In addition, the expected value of winning balls during this series is based on the type of jackpot at the time of the first hit and its selection rate, and the expected value of winning balls that can be obtained before returning to the normal game state (low probability, low base state). values are preferred.

In addition, in this embodiment, the shortest time required for digestion of the jackpot game at the time of the first hit and the shortest time required for digestion of the electric support state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game It is set in relation to the expected value (number of theoretical prize balls). Here, the shooting speed of game balls is set to a maximum of 100 balls per minute. Is required. Therefore, in this embodiment, the shortest digestion time of the jackpot game performed at the time of the first hit (digestion time when the game ball is constantly hit during the execution of the jackpot game), and the electric support that shifts after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that the total time of the shortest digestion time of the state (digestion time when the game ball is continuously hit during execution of the electric sapo state 100 times and the hold is not interrupted) is 6 minutes or longer. As a result, all the prize balls (theoretical number of prize balls) won at the first hit will be launched until the electric sapo state is exited, on the condition that the shooting of the game balls is continued. there is

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to satisfy the emphasized effect execution condition for executing the above-described emphasized effect (enlarged display), the cumulative number of prize balls must reach a specific value (multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls). As a condition, the predetermined number of prize balls (minimum value of the specific value) corresponds to a numerical value equal to or greater than a predetermined number X1 (299) and equal to or less than a predetermined number X2 (6000). That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500), the emphasis effect (enlarged display) is performed. At least one emphasized effect (enlarged display) is executed from when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number X1 (299) or more until it reaches a predetermined number X2 (6000). (In this embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls reaches 2500 after the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the predetermined number X1 (299) or more and reaches the predetermined number X2 (6000). Emphasis production is performed twice, when the number reaches and when the number reaches 5000). In this way, by reducing the condition for executing the emphasized effect more than the condition for canceling the blinking display of the identification segment 830a, the condition for executing the emphasized effect can be established even when the game is started without canceling the blinking display. It is possible to enhance the player's desire to play by generating an emphasis performance from an early stage.

≪Updating the base value during the initial display period when the power is turned on≫
Next, update processing of the base value during the initial display period will be described. FIG. 89(A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the game state at the time of power failure recovery is the special game state, and FIG. 4 is a time chart showing an initial display period;

In this embodiment, as described above, when the gaming machine is turned on (when power is restored), all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 are lit for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds). All blinking display (initial display) is performed in which the display state and the extinguished state are repeated every 0.3 seconds. Here, as shown in FIG. 89(A), when the game state at the time of power-off recovery is the low base state (special game state) during the jackpot game, the initial state of the performance display monitor 830 at the time of power-on During the display period, the counting of the total number of outs counter 1030 is performed, and the judgment processing (section switching processing) for switching to the next section is executed, but the normal number of outs counter 1031 and the normal prize balls are executed. Counting by the number counter 1032 is not performed, and arithmetic processing (base value update processing) for updating the base value is not performed. In other words, during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 when the power is turned on, if a ball entering the first starting hole 51 or the general winning holes 61 to 64 is detected and an out detection related to the ball entering is performed, the initial During the display period, determination processing (section switching processing) for switching to the next section is executed, but calculation processing for updating the base value (base value update processing) is not executed. After the end of the period, while it may have switched to a section different from the section before the power cut, the base value before the power cut will not be changed (if it is not switched to a section different from the section before the power cut) is the current section "bL." is not updated, and if the section is switched to a section different from the section before the power cut, the "bL." The base value is not updated and becomes the same as the base value in "b1." which is the interval after the power is restored after switching and after the end of the initial display period). Note that this base value update process is started after the initial display period ends. As a modification, if the special game state continues even after the initial display period ends, this base value update process is performed at least until the special game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state (more specifically, , the base value update process may not be executed until the high base state that shifts after the end of this special game state ends and shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89(B), when the game state at the time of power-off recovery is a low base state (normal game state) during a non-jackpot game, the initial state of the performance display monitor 830 at the time of power-on During the display period, the total out count counter 1030, the normal out count counter 1031, and the normal prize ball count counter 1032 are counted, and determination processing (interval switching processing) for switching to the next interval and base Arithmetic processing (base value update processing) for updating the values is executed. That is, during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 when the power is turned on, the first start port 51
When detection of a ball entering the general winning openings 61 to 64 and detection of an out related to the entry are performed, during the initial display period, determination processing (section switching processing) for switching to the next section , and calculation processing for updating the base value (base value update processing) are executed respectively, so after the end of the initial display period, there is a possibility that it will switch to a section different from the section before the power failure, There is a possibility that the base value before the power cutoff has been changed (if the section is not switched to a section different from the section before the power cutoff, the base value in the current section "bL." will be updated. , the base value in "bL.", which is the section before power-off before switching, and after the power-off recovery after switching and after the end of the initial display period. It may be updated and different from the base value in the interval "b1."). As a result, in this embodiment, even if the game state at the time of power failure recovery (power on) is the same low base state, the low base state (special game state) during the big hit game or the low base state during the non-jackpot game Depending on whether it is in the base state (normal game state) or not, the performance of the gaming machine is appropriately adjusted by switching whether or not to calculate the base value during the initial display period when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). can be evaluated. In addition, the total number of outs counter 1030 is counted during the initial display at the time of power failure recovery (at the time of power on) in both the low base state during the jackpot game and the low base state during the non-jackpot game. , the intervals of each time (intervals A, B, C, D, . . . ) can be appropriately switched. It should be noted that the aforementioned recovery from power interruption (power recovery) is recovery from power interruption without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820), and recovery from power interruption without RAM clearing (operation of RAM clear switch 820) In the case of the return, it shifts to the normal game state (low-probability low-base state).

When the initial display period ends, the base information switching counter 1034 starts counting from "0". Therefore, after the initial display period ends, the performance display monitor 830 first starts displaying the base value of the current section. Then, when the base value of the current section is displayed for 4.8 seconds, as described above, the base value of the previous section is displayed, the base value of the previous section is displayed, and the base value of the previous section is displayed three times. The display of the previous base value is sequentially performed for 4.8 seconds, and the display of the base value of the current section is performed again.

As a modification, the count of the base information switching counter 1034 is started at the start of the initial display period, and the count value of the base information switching counter 1034 is switched every 4.8 seconds even during the initial display period (internal Specifically, each interval is switched every 4.8 seconds), and at the end of the initial display period, the base value of the interval corresponding to the timing at the end of the initial display period may be displayed.

≪Updating the base value when a prize ball error occurs≫
Next, updating of the base value when an error relating to the payout of prize balls (prize ball error) occurs during execution of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 90 is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a jackpot game. This prize ball error means the same error as the payout error described in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, when a prize ball error (payout error) occurs during execution of a jackpot game, the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended from the time when the prize ball error occurs until the prize ball error is canceled. be stopped. Therefore, when a prize ball error occurs while prize balls are being paid out triggered by a game ball entering the big prize opening 54 during execution of the big win game, the prize ball error is canceled. Until then, among the prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 54, the payout of the prize balls not paid out until the prize ball error occurs is stopped. . In addition, even during execution of the big win game, if a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 after the occurrence of the winning ball error, the big winning game will be held until the winning ball error is cancelled. The payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the opening 54 is stopped. Here, after the jackpot game is completed, the state is shifted to a variable probability game state (high-probability high base state) or a time-saving game state (low-probability high base state), and the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times in this high base state. If you do (that is, if you do not hit the jackpot during 100 spins), you will fall into the normal game state (low probability low base state) after the completion of 100 spins. If the above prize ball error is canceled in the low-probability base state), the payout of prize balls is resumed in the normal game state (low-probability low base state). In other words, the prize balls that should have been paid out during the execution of the jackpot game (the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error) are in a high base state after the end of the jackpot game. It will be paid out in the normal game state shifted through. Here, the normal prize ball number counter 1032 counts the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state. 54), the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state is counted. Therefore, when a prize ball (a prize ball based on the game ball entering the big winning hole 54) that should have been paid out during execution of the jackpot game is to be paid out in the subsequent normal game state. , is excluded from being counted by the number-of-balls counter 1032 at normal times. In other words, when the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error are to be paid out in the subsequent normal game state based on the cancellation of the prize ball error. , the number of prize balls is not counted by the normal number of prize balls counter 1032, and is excluded from calculation of the base value, so that the base value can be properly managed.

As described above, if a prize ball error occurs during execution of the jackpot game, the prize balls based on the game balls entering the jackpot 54 that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game are , It is not counted by the normal winning ball number counter 1032 and is not subject to update of the base value, but the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 54 (winning number) is used in the game. It is counted by the total-out number counter 1030 as a valid game ball (a game ball discharged from the game area PA), and treated as a valid count value for switching the section of the base value.

In addition, if a prize ball is not paid out due to the occurrence of a prize ball error during execution of the jackpot game, not only the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 54 but also other prizes such as bonus prizes Prize balls based on game balls entering the winning openings (first starting opening 51, second starting opening 52, general winning openings 61 to 64) are not counted by the normal prize ball number counter 1032, Not subject to base value update. In addition, the number of game balls (number of prizes won) entering other winning ports (first starting port 51, second starting port 52, general winning ports 61 to 64) during the execution of the jackpot game is also calculated in the game area PA. , the total number of outs counter 1030 is updated because it should be counted as the number of valid outs (the number of shots) played in the game.

Also, when a prize ball error occurs during the execution of the big win game, that is, as described above, the game ball enters the big prize opening 54 during the execution of the big win game, and the prize balls are paid out. A prize ball error occurs while it is being played, and after the prize ball error continues to the normal game state that shifts through the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the prize ball error is resolved in the normal game state. In this case, during the execution of the jackpot game and after the prize ball error occurs, even if there are prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error (Even if the payout of prize balls is restricted), the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 54 (the trigger for the generation of the prize balls that were not paid out until the prize ball error is resolved) Triggered by the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 54 (when the value of the accumulated prize ball number counter is added), the display of the accumulated number of prize balls is updated and displayed, and the count-up effect is performed. is executed. In addition, even after the occurrence of the prize ball error, the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 54 (a trigger for the generation of the prize balls that have not been paid out until the prize ball error is resolved) Triggered by fulfillment of the emphasized effect execution condition based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 54 (which is triggered by the value of the cumulative prize ball number counter reaching a multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls) ), an emphasized effect (enlarged display) is executed, and the over winning effect is executed when the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied.

≪Base value display update cycle≫
Next, the update cycle when updating the display of the base value will be described. In this embodiment, until the normal out number counter 1031 reaches 6000 in each section (measurement section) except for the first section A, when displaying the base value of the section currently being executed, the identification segment 830a , and the real-time value of the base value is lit and displayed in the ratio segment 830b. At this time, the blinking display of the identification segment 830a (the blinking display of "bL.") is performed in a manner in which lighting for 0.3 seconds and lighting for 0.3 seconds are alternately repeated. That is, in this embodiment, the blinking period of the identification segment 830a is set to 0.6 seconds (0.3 seconds on + 0.3 seconds off). Switching between lighting and extinguishing in the blinking display of the identification segment 830 a is executed based on the time value of the output display switching timer 1036 of the RAM 103 . In this embodiment, the measured value of the output display switching timer 1036 is incremented by "1" for each interrupt (every 4 ms) of the main control side timer interrupt process, and the measured value of the output display switching timer 1036 becomes "75". , that is, when 0.3 seconds (4 ms×75=300 ms) have elapsed, the identification segment 830a is turned on and off. That is, each time the counted value of the output display switching timer 1036 reaches a multiple of "75", the lighting data of the identifier is set in the first output data area and the second output data area of the base information output data area 1035. The process and the process of setting the extinguishing data are alternately switched.

On the other hand, when displaying the base value of the section currently being executed in the ratio segment 830a, the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035 correspond to the base value of the current section. Set display data. Here, in the interval currently being executed, a base value (real time value) is calculated for each interrupt of timer interrupt processing, and this real time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area 1033 a of the RAM 103 . At this time, the display data corresponding to the base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is set in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. FIG. However, the update period of this display data is the same period as the blinking period of the ratio segment 830a described above. That is, the display data is updated every 0.6 seconds (600 ms) corresponding to the blinking period of the ratio segment 830a, not every period (4 ms corresponding to one interrupt) at which the base value is calculated. Therefore, every time the counted value of the output display switching timer 1036 reaches a multiple of "150", the display data of the ratio segment 830b is transferred to the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. The setting process is performed. Therefore, if the ratio segment performs lighting display for 0.3 seconds and then turns off for 0.3 seconds as one flashing display (unit display), the start time of this one unit display (0 .3 seconds of illuminated display is started), the display data of ratio segment 830a will be updated. As a result, when the display data of the ratio segment 830b is updated at the start of one blinking display of the identification segment 830a, the current base value stored in the base value storage area 1033a is updated during the one blinking display period. Even if (the current base value) is updated, the display data of the ratio segment 830b is not updated (the base value lit and displayed in the ratio segment 830b is not switched), and until the one blinking display ends. , the base value corresponding to the display data updated at the start of the blinking display is continuously displayed. Then, when the blinking display ends and the next blinking display starts, the display data of the ratio segment 830b changes to the current base value (the current base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a). ), and the base value displayed in the ratio segment 830b is also switched to the current base value (real-time value) corresponding to the new display data. By synchronizing the blinking cycle of the identifier displayed in the identifier segment 830a with the update cycle of the base value (real-time value) displayed in the ratio segment 830b in this way, the visibility of the base value can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to accurately and easily confirm the performance of the game.

In the present embodiment, assuming that all or part of the display of the performance display monitor 830 blinks, all the display units 831 to 834 are displayed in the initial display of the performance display monitor 830 when the power is turned on. The identification segment 830a (the first display section 831 and the second display section 832) blinks between the time of blinking display and the time the value of the normal out number counter reaches 6000 in each section (except section A). There are cases where it is done. At this time, the blinking period of each display section 831 to 834 (0.6 seconds described above) is determined by the blinking period of the initial display performed when the power is turned on, and the number of normal out counters in each section (excluding section A). It is set to the same period as the blinking period of the identification segment 830a until the value reaches 6,000. This flashing period (0.6 seconds) is the count-up display time (execution time of count-up effect) of the 15 prize balls paid out based on the entry of one game ball into the big winning hole 54. set to a longer time than In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the count-up display time for one prize ball (time required for count-up display from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". A count-up display time (count-up display from "N" to "N+15") corresponding to the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) given when one game ball enters the big prize opening 54 The time required for the display unit 831 to 834) is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up display time for one piece) = 0.45 seconds", so that the blinking cycle of each display unit 831 to 834 (0 .6 seconds) is longer. The reason why the blinking period of each of the display units 831 to 834 is set to be longer than the count-up display time of the accumulated number of prize balls is that the count-up display of the number of accumulated prize balls is used by general players. The display time is set on the premise that it is possible to recognize that the This means that it is possible to reliably recognize that each of the display portions 831 to 834 is blinking.

In the above embodiment, the update cycle of the display data (lighting data, light-off data) of the identification segment 830a is every 0.3 seconds, and the update cycle of the display data of the ratio segment 830b is every 0.6 seconds. This update cycle can be set as appropriate, and the update cycle of the display data of the ratio segment 830b may be the same as the update cycle of the display data of the identification segment 830a.

<<Relationship between base value display switching time and game ball launch time>>
In addition, in the present embodiment, the display of the base value on the performance display monitor 830 is performed by displaying the base value of the current section→displaying the base value of the previous section→displaying the base value of the previous section→ The display is switched every predetermined display switching time (4.8 seconds), such as the display of the base value three times before. is set to a shorter time than the time required to shoot the game balls for the prescribed count (10 counts) in the round game. Specifically, the shooting speed of the game ball is set to a limit of 100 shots per minute, and the shooting time of the game ball for the specified count number (10 counts) is "6 seconds (10 counts x 60 seconds ÷ 100 shots)”. As a result, the display switching time of the base value (4.8 seconds) is shorter than the game ball shooting time (6 seconds) for the prescribed count number. According to this configuration, during execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to switch the display of the base value until the end of one round game. Even if the value of the number counter reaches 60000 (even if the current measurement section ends and the next measurement section is to be started), the switching situation is recognized during execution of one round game. can be done.

Note that the effect button 15 in this embodiment is configured such that the effect button itself can vibrate or a movable object inside the effect button 15 can rotate due to the internal mechanism of the effect button. In this way, the effect button 15 not only changes the contents of the effect displayed on the effect display device 70 by the operation of the player, but also suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit to the player by the action of the effect button 15 itself. It is configured so that it can be notified. Such an action of the production button 15 is called a production button action.

This effect button operation can be executed during the variable display or during the big win game, and during the variable display, it is executed when suggesting or notifying that the degree of expectation for the big win is very high (for example, the effect display device 70 It is executed in association with the execution of a specific notice effect executed in (or suddenly executed regardless of the execution of such a specific notice effect), and if it is during a jackpot game, the above-mentioned promotion effect or suspension It may be executed in association with the execution of the Nairenso production.

More specifically, if the variable display is in progress, the production button action is a specific advance notice production that is executed in the middle of the fluctuation display (before the reach is established in the middle stage). Or, when executing a notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit to be notified), the scene of the above-mentioned win-lose branch executed in the middle of the variable display (after the reach, which is the final stage) (The final result of the SP reach shows the big hit. It is executed at the same time as the execution of the variable role production that informs the jackpot winning in the branch scene of whether the content indicates whether or not (the production button operation associated with the advance notice production). It should be noted that, in one variation (jackpot variation), both the next notice effect and the variable character effect for notifying the winning of the big win are configured to be executed. The execution time of the effect button operation is longer when the effect is executed. It should be noted that predetermined notice effects other than specific notice effects (for example, comment notice effects, etc.) are configured not to be executed in association with the effect button operation, but the effect button operation at the time of fluctuation start as a look-ahead to be described later. and the execution timing overlaps, and they happen to be executed at the same time. In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect, the operation suspension ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the next notice effect described above and the variable character effect that notifies the jackpot winning can be executed) Operation related to high expectation fluctuation Immediately after the start of the variable display related to the operation pending ball that is digested earlier than the suspended ball), the effect button action is suddenly executed as a foreseeing notice (the effect button action at the start of fluctuation as a foreseeing) is executed. If it is done, even at the start of the variable display related to the operation holding ball that is the target of the foreseeing notice effect that arrived via the foreseeing notice effect, the effect button operation is not the foreseeing notice, but suggests the degree of expectation of the variation of the big hit or It is executed as a notice effect to notify (operation of the effect button at the start of fluctuation via look-ahead). It should be noted that the production button operation at the time of fluctuation start as a look-ahead and the production button operation at the time of fluctuation start via look-ahead are configured so that the execution time is shorter than the production button operation associated with the above-described advance notice production. Note that the performance button operation is completed during one variable display, and is not continued across two or more variable displays (for example, from the end of a certain variable display to the It is not constructed so that the vibration of the production button 15 continues until the beginning of the next variable display after the variable display). In addition, if the jackpot game is in progress, it is executed in association with the execution of the promotion performance or the execution of the reservation performance, and is executed in association with the execution of the above-mentioned jackpot mid-accessory performance ( Production button action during the jackpot). It should be noted that the effect button operation during the big hit is configured to be executable over a plurality of round games (for example, from the end of a certain number of round games to the next round game of the certain number of round games). Vibration of the production button 15 can be continued until the beginning of the round game).

Here, the effect button actions are roughly divided into those that are executed based on the operation of the effect button 15 by the player and those that are not executed based on the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. In other words, it is roughly divided into those that are immediately executed when the player operates the effect button 15 and those that do not require the player to operate the effect button 15 in the first place. The above-described effect button operation during the big win and the effect button operation associated with the variable accessory effect for notifying the winning of the big win are immediately executed when the player operates the effect button 15 (in other words, , when the player operates the production button 15, a promotion production, a reservation production, and a variable role production that notifies the jackpot winning are executed), and the operation of the production button at the time of fluctuation start as the above-mentioned look-ahead. , the effect button operation at the time of fluctuation start via look-ahead, and the effect button operation associated with the next notice effect are executed without the need for the player to operate the effect button 15 in the first place (in other words, the player's effect Without requiring the operation of the button 15, the effect button operation at the start of fluctuation, the effect button operation at the time of start of fluctuation via look-ahead, and the next notice effect are executed). Here, as a modified example, even if the player operates the production button 15 in spite of the big hit variation display, the variable accessory production for notifying the winning of the big win is not executed and is associated with it. There may be a case where the effect button action is not executed (a case that suggests a failure in the scene of the win-lose branch). It may be constructed such that the characters "Resurrection!" are displayed at a timing after the timing of suggesting that there will be a hit, to suggest or notify that a big win has occurred. In such a configuration, the effect button operation is executed even during the execution of the effect (also referred to as the resurrection effect or the reverse effect) in which the characters "Resurrection!" It is configured so that the operation of the button 15 is not necessary in the first place.

Further, when the production button action is executed, the frame lamp 10 and the above-mentioned character object lamp are configured to emit light in a specific manner. It should be noted that the light emission mode (light emission color) is configured to differ depending on the effect situation when the effect button action is executed. Specifically, when a promotion effect, a reservation performance, a variable performance that informs you of a big hit, or a resurrection effect is executed, it will emit light in rainbow colors, and the effect button operation at the start of the change and the change via look-ahead. It is configured to emit blue light when the effect button operation at the start and the next notice effect are executed. However, in any case, if an error occurs during rainbow or blue light emission due to the effect button operation, the light emission is always switched to red light emission.

When a selection operation to shift to the RAM clear mode or the game mode is performed when the game machine is turned on, the performance button operation is executed not as a performance but after the power is turned on as an operation confirmation after the power is turned on. In this case, the production button operation is executed in a relatively short time (executed in a shorter time than the production button operation associated with the variable role product production that informs the winning), and the frame lamp 10 and the above-mentioned The role lamp also emits light in red. When the variable display starts during the performance button operation, a button image prompting the player to operate the button may be displayed. By performing, it is possible to change the effect display on the effect display device 70 (for example, by operating the button, the button image is erased and the comment notice effect is displayed, etc.). In addition, when the selection operation to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the effect button operation as the operation confirmation is not performed after the power is turned on. As a result, it is possible to omit the effect button operation as operation confirmation. In addition, as a modification, by ending the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it may be possible to execute the effect button operation as the operation confirmation.

The main effects achieved in the fourth embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the fourth embodiment, when the first hit occurs in an early stage (section A where the total number of outs is less than 299) after the first power-on of the gaming machine, a predetermined By being able to acquire the number of prize balls equal to or greater than the number (299), while the acquired game balls are being launched (until the game balls in hand are exhausted), the next section (section B) is entered. Since it is possible to display the base value (real-time display) by using the becomes possible.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, even if the game state is the same low base state, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not measurement is necessary depending on whether or not the game state is a game state in which a special game is given. By enabling calculations for updating the base value from the initial display period (all blinking display period) after the power is turned on, the base value can be properly managed from an early stage after the power is turned on. It is possible to realize an appropriate game performance evaluation.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the prize balls that have not been paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error are released in the normal game state after that based on the cancellation of the prize ball error. , the number of prize balls is excluded from updating the base value, so that the base value can be properly managed, thereby realizing an appropriate gaming performance evaluation. It becomes possible to

In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, the payout of prize balls is restricted for an unexpected winning during the setting confirmation mode, and the winning in the jackpot game restarted after the setting confirmation mode is ended is controlled by the player. While executing the payout of prize balls with priority on the acquisition of actual profits, by limiting the effect display triggered by the payout of the prize balls, the game is played while not giving disadvantages to the player. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the machine.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, when power failure occurs while prize balls are being paid out in the jackpot game, setting confirmation is made as to whether the transition mode at the time of power failure recovery is the setting change mode. Appropriate restriction measures for prize ball payout suitable for the transition mode are executed according to the mode, and when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball payout is thereafter resumed when the jackpot game is resumed. To reduce the processing load of a gaming machine while preventing the player from being disadvantaged by canceling the restriction measures and continuing to restrict the performance display triggered by the payout of the prize balls. becomes possible

[Modification]
Next, modified examples of the first to fourth embodiments will be described. The game machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the game machines of the first to fourth embodiments, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly the different parts will be described.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol is a big hit, the normal probability variation gaming machine that determines the presence or absence of the probability variation transition based on the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) of the special symbol is adopted. It is not limited, and if the result of the success/failure determination of the special symbol is a big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a probability change transition according to whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the big win game V A variable game machine may be adopted. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the probability variation gaming state that is given as a trigger to become a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol within the limit of the preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times) Alternatively, a game machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive times of the hidden game state may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the probability variation function of special symbols is configured as a variable probability gaming machine that continues from after the end of the big win game until the next big win occurs, but the probability variation function of special symbols is specified. It may be configured as a probability variable gaming machine (number of times cutting probability variable machine, ST machine) that operates continuously by the ST number (for example, 100 times). Conversely, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probability variation gaming machine (number of times cutting probability variation machine, ST machine) that continues to operate only for the specified number of times ST, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is It may be configured as a variable probability game machine that continues from the end of the big win game until the next big win occurs.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a model with only one big winning hole installed in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model with multiple big winning holes installed in the game area may be applied. may In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V probability variation gaming machine has a specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of special symbols Two or more large winning openings, ie, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening not provided with this specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area) may be installed. As an example of the board layout, the first and second large winning slots may be arranged substantially vertically or horizontally in the right area of the game area, or the first large winning slots may be arranged. The board area where the lottery is placed and the board area where the second big winning hole is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the first big prize hole (number of unit prize balls) and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big prize hole The number of awarded balls (unit number of awarded balls) may be the same or different. In addition, of the two big winning openings, the first big winning opening (or second big winning opening) is a big winning opening for small winning games, and the second big winning opening (or first big winning opening) is for big winning games. It may be configured as a large winning opening. In that case, the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) in the big prize opening for the small winning game may be set to 10, and the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) in the big prize opening for the big hit game may be set to 15, etc. good.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of game states, the latent probability variable game state is defined as a game state in which the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time reduction function are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability variable gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which only the probability variation function of special symbols is activated, and the variation time reduction function of special symbols and the electric chew support function are not activated. may Further, the special symbol variation time shortening function is divided into the first special symbol variation time shortening function and the second special symbol variation time shortening function, and the latent probability variable gaming state is changed to the special symbol probability variation function and the second special symbol variation time shortening function. It may be defined as a game state in which the variable time shortening function of 2 special symbols is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function) shortening function).

Next, in order to facilitate a clearer understanding of the technical significance of the above embodiments and modifications, problems associated with the above embodiments and modifications will be outlined.

In conventional pachinko machines, it is known that when a game ball enters the big prize hole during the execution of a special game, a prize effect (for example, displaying the number of prize balls or outputting sound effects) is executed. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-123602).

However, since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the amusement of games in order to differentiate them from conventional models.

In addition, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, during the execution of a special game, the number of times the round game is executed in the special game currently being executed and the number of rounds of the round game currently being executed are reported. is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-125303).

However, since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the amusement of games in order to differentiate them from conventional models.

In addition, conventional pachinko game machines are equipped with a performance display device that displays game performance information obtained by measuring the number of game balls discharged from the game area and the number of prize balls awarded to the player. is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-186936).

However, there are already many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration as conventional models, and there is room for further improvement in order to realize appropriate evaluation of game performance.

In addition, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is known to have a function (so-called setting function) to set the winning probability that the result of the winning judgment will be a big hit (for example, "JP 2019-205605"). reference).

However, there are already many pachinko gaming machines that employ such a configuration as conventional models, and there is room for further improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load of the gaming machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above embodiment and modifications, the configuration as described above is adopted for the purpose of further improvement, and the effects as described above are achieved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, an appropriate combination of the constituent elements described in the above embodiments and modifications, or part of the constituent elements described in the above embodiments and modifications are deleted or converted by well-known and commonly used techniques, etc. It is also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 10 Frame lamp 20 Game board 24 Movable accessory 27 Main control display device 51 First start port 52 Second start port 53 Operating gate 54 Big winning port 64 General Winning port 70 Effect display device 71 First special symbol display device 72 Second special symbol display device 77 Round indicator light 100 Main control board 103A Game control information storage area 103B Set value information storage area 103C Performance information storage area 200 Effect control board 220 Effect control means 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board 810 Setting key switch 820 RAM clear switch 830 Performance display monitor 830a Identification segment 830b Ratio segment 891 Played ball detection switch 892 Frame open switch 1030 Total number of out counter 1031 Normal time Out number counter 1032 Normal prize ball number counter 1033 Base information storage area

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and allowing a game ball to enter;
a second starting port provided at a position different from the first starting port in the game area and changing between an open state in which a game ball is easily entered and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
A first success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port;
A second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port;
a large winning opening which is provided in the game area and is opened according to the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means to allow a game ball to enter;
When the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit , until the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches a specified number or for a specified time a special game executing means capable of shifting to a special game in which the unit game for opening the big winning opening is repeated a plurality of times until elapses ;
It has a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ease of ball entry into the second starting hole is higher than in the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state or the easy ball entry state is set. Executable ball entry state control means;
a performance display device that displays specific information;
a production display device for displaying a production display ;
and an audio output device that outputs a production sound ,
A game ball launched into the game area can be detected,
It is possible to count the total number of shot balls, which is the total number of game balls shot to the game area in all game states,
It is possible to count the number of normal shot balls, which is the total number of game balls shot into the game area in a normal ball entry state under a predetermined situation,
It is possible to count the number of normal prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls given to the player in the normal ball entry state under a predetermined situation,
It is possible to measure a base value that indicates the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired at normal times,
The performance display device displays a base value information display section for displaying base value information that can specify a base value, and identification information for identifying the type of base value information displayed in the base value information display section. and an identification information display unit that is
During the execution of the special game, it is possible to update and display the display of the cumulative number of prize balls, which is a display showing the cumulative number of prize balls given to the player, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening. and
Triggered by the accumulated number of prize balls reaching a specific value during execution of a special game, correspondence to a specific value indicating that the accumulated value of the number of prize balls awarded to the player has reached the specific value The display can be displayed separately from the display of the cumulative number of winning balls,
During the execution of the special game, if a power outage occurs in a situation where the display corresponding to the specific value is displayed due to the entry of one more game ball into the big winning hole, and the power outage is restored, the above Even if one game ball enters the big winning slot, the display corresponding to the specific value is not displayed.
During the execution of the special game, the volume level of the effect sound output from the sound output device can be adjusted with the player's volume adjustment operation as a trigger,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to be able to display a volume adjustment image showing a plurality of stages of volume levels, triggered by the player's volume adjustment operation,
While the special game is being executed, the specific value correspondence display and the volume adjustment image can be displayed at the same time, but the volume adjustment image has higher display priority and is configured to be displayed in front of the specific value correspondence display. and
A predetermined error in which awarding of prize balls to a player is temporarily interrupted when awarding of prize balls to the player is triggered by a game ball entering the big winning hole during execution of a special game. occurs, and the predetermined error continues until the normal ball-entering state, which transitions after the end of the easy-ball-entering state, which transitions after the end of the special game, and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball-entering state. In this case, the prize balls that were not given to the player during the execution of the special game due to the occurrence of the predetermined error will be given to the player after the predetermined error in the normal ball entry state is resolved. , while
During the execution of the special game, the predetermined error occurs when the game ball enters the big winning hole and the prize ball is awarded to the player, and the process shifts after the special game ends. After the predetermined error continues until the normal ball-entering state transitions after the end of the easy-ball-entering state, if the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball-entering state, the predetermined error occurs. Even if the prize balls that were not awarded to the player during the execution of the special game are awarded to the player, the accumulated prize during the execution of the special game and after the occurrence of the predetermined error The display of the number of balls can be updated and displayed, and the display corresponding to a specific value can also be displayed.
During the execution of the special game, the predetermined error occurs when the game ball enters the big winning hole and the prize ball is awarded to the player, and the process shifts after the special game ends. After the predetermined error continues until the transition to the normal ball-entering state after the end of the easy-ball-entering state, the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball-entering state, and the predetermined error occurs. If the prize balls that were not awarded to the player during the execution of the special game are awarded to the player after the predetermined error in the normal ball entry state is resolved, the predetermined error Triggered by the awarding of the prize balls that were not awarded to the player until the error is resolved, the base value is not measured, but the player is notified of the error until the error is resolved. It is configured so that the total number of shot balls can be counted based on the shot balls that enter the big winning slot during the execution of the special game, which is the trigger for generating the prize balls that have not been granted. A pachinko machine characterized by:

Images